Home

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User`s Manual

1. MELSEGAJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CON A IL B SEL c icr POWER SET RUN 2 UP LRUN hec E O 3 DOWN Lerr Station number setting switch SW1i o Transmission speed setting switch 0 4 B elo OFF 0 10 520 OFF 5 gajili 20 9 E 0 40 8 OFF Station Elo number 4 PA 141 ON 6 OFF 1 OFF J 7 D 4 B 2 OFF gt 156kbps Ee m 1 OFF 8 CON d J MODE Mode select switch 3 Ver 2 Mode Nomal mode IP E CON R D MITSUBISHI EZ No 10 41 10 41 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Datalink Input data hold clear P Hold Cclear Default Clear Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Master station
2. 1 Ver 1 Station number 1 Station number 1 icompatibl i t remote i i i i i output RY Bo i Slalloninumber s i 1 Station number 4 E o to Station number 6 i i Station number 7 i Ver 2 an Station number 1 compatiblelStation number 21 Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 2 remote i i i i 7 i i i i i output RY Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 5 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 7 to i NER Ahah AA Octuple 3 The remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode cannot be used with the QJ61BT11 4 Data link is not available when the version set the station type of the master station information is different from that of the remote station For example when the station type of the master station information is set as Ver 1 remote device station although the actual remote device station is set to Ver 2 remote device station data link cannot be performed with the ERR LED on the master station flashing and the L RUN LED on the remote device station turned OFF 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Whether send receive is enable
3. 4 31 4 4 Handy Functions e ed a c m te riii 4 45 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 4 45 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program 4 49 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup 4 52 4 4 4 Communicating with intelligent device stations Remote net 4 54 4 4 5 Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode 4 54 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station UNCION ce 4 55 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station Setting 4 56 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchronous function 4 57 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function 4 61 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link
4. Ver 1compatible local station Ver 2compatible local station Master station station number 1 station number 5 1 compatible Local station Ver 1 compatible Local station buffer memory PLC CPU buffer memory PLC CPU C Rwroo Rwwoo f w1000 RWw00 wo100 RWwro1 LRWwO1 w1001 RWwO1 WO101 RWro2 RWwO2 W1002 RWwO02 W0102 RWr03 RWwOS W1003 RWw03 W0103 RWr04 RWw04 wi004 RWw04 WO0104 RWr05 RWwOS wi1005 RWwO05 W0105 RWr06 RWw06 W1006 RWw06 W0106 RWr07 FL RWwO7 W1007 RWw07 W0107 RWr08 RWwo8 w1008 RWw08 W0108 RWro9 RWwo9 w1009_ RWw09 W0109 RWrOA _RWwoA W100A RWwOA W010A RWrOB RWwOB W100B RWwOB WO010B Rwroc RWwoG wi00c RWwOC W010C RWrOD RWwOD W100D RWwOD WO010D RwroE RWwOE W100E RWwOE WO010E RWrOF C RWWOF E wioor J RWwOF WO10F RWwoO i C Rwro0 Wooo0 RWr00 0000 RWwo1 RWr04 W0001 RWr01 W0001 Rwwo2 RWr02 wooo2 RWr02 wo002 RWwOS RWr03 Woo03 RWr03 W0003 RWwO4 RWr04 wooo4 RWr04 wo004 RWw05 RWr05 W0005 RWr05 W0005 RWwo6 Rwroe WO0006 RWr06 WO0006 RWw07 RWrO7 W0007 l RWr07 W0007 RWwos Rwro8 wooo08 RWr08 W0008 Rwwos RWro9 woo09 RWro9 W0009 RWwOA RWrOA WOO0A RWr0A W000A RWwOB RWroB WOO0B RW
5. number 2 4208 RY 8F to RY 80 RX 8F to RX80 40084 number 2 42091 RY9F to RY 90 9F to RX90 4009 420A4 RY AF to RY AO RX AF to RX AO 400A 420Bu RY BF to RY BO RX BF to RX BO 400B 420 RY CF to RY CO RX CF to 400 420D RY DF to RY DO RX DF to RXDO 40009 420E RY ED to RYEO to 400 to to to to 43FC4 RY1FCF to RY1FCO RX1FCF to RX1FCO 41FCu 43FDu RYIFDF to RY1FDO RX1FDF to RX1FDO 41 0 RY1FEF to RY1FEO RX1FEF to RX1FEO 41 43FFu RY1FFF to RY1FFO 1 to RX1FFO 41 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 11 Ver 2 compatible remote registers RWw RWr Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station RWw remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used poi
6. MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Ver 1compatible local station Ver 2compatible local station Master station station number 1 station number 5 La station po M obs NE REN CPU RWwoo woo00 Rwwo1 wi001 RWwo2 wi002 RWw03 W1003 RWw04 wi004 RWwo5 woo RWwO06 W1006 RWwOD W100D W100E C Rwwor LL W100F C Rwroo J woooo RWrot wo001 Rwro2 W0002 RWro3 W0003 RWr04 W0004 n RWr05 p gt 4 __wo0005 RWr06 W0006 Master station Ver 2 compatible RWrOD WO00D Ver 2 compatible Local station PLC CPU buffer memory RWr0E WOO0E buffer memory PLC CPU RWr00 tL RwroF L WOO0F i L _Rwwo0 RWro1 E B EMEN RWwo1 RWr02 RWw02 RWr03 RWwo3 RWr04 RWw04 RWr05 RWw05 RWr06 RWw06 RWrOD RWwOD RWrOE i RWwOE RWwOF RWr10 E RWwIO RWr11 RWr12 RWwi2 RWr13 I E RWwIS RWr14 RWwIA RWr15 4 RWwi5 RWr16 RWw16 RWHD RWw1D RWHE LLL RWwIE RWr1F L RWwiF RWwOO Rwroo RWw01 i L RWro1 RWwO02 RWrO2 RWw03 RWr03 RWw04 Rwro4 RWw05 M RWro5 RWw06 Rwroe 1 1 RWwOD RWrO0D RWwOE LL RWr0E RWwOF RWrOF RWw10 RwrtO RWw11 RWw12 iL LL
7. 8 33 Host parameter 8 33 Host standby master station setting status 8 28 Host station operation status 8 29 Host station switch change detection 8 29 Host type 8 28 How to check the function version 2 8 signal list 2 12 1n es 8 2 Initial setting of the remote device station 10 7 10 25 10 45 Input data status of host data link faulty STATION ciu ncn ete be A Esci ru 8 28 Installation rrr ntl 7 3 Installation environment 7 4 Intelligent device module A 14 Intelligent device station A 14 1 1 Intelligent device station communication 1 5 Intelligent function module A 15 Internal current consumption 3 1 LED display oaa 7 5 Lire StAtUs 5 cree dete ente 8 36 7 15 Line test 8 37 Line test 1 result 8 37 Line test acceptance status 8 27 Index 2 Line test complete status 8 28 Line test request 8 26 Line test 8 32 Line test station setting
8. Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station T station Remote station stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations Data link continues Station number 4 Station number 7 Faulty station Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 st tion Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations 7 Automatic return function When a station that has been disconnected from the link due to power off recovers the normal status it will join the data link automatically see Section 4 3 2 1 6 1 6 1 VER EENEN MELSEC Q 8 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error The data link status can be set to either stop or continue when an error causing the operation to stop such as SP UNIT ERROR occurs in the PLC CPU at the master station With errors enabling the operation to continue such as BATTERY ERROR the data link will continue regardless of the setting see Section 4 3 3 9 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station The data entered received from a data link faulty station can be cleared or the previous status immediately before the error can be maintained see Section 4 3 4
9. 5 26 5 2 6 Master station lt intelligent device station ssssssseeneeenennenene nnn 5 34 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions 20 0 0 eee eeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeaseeatenas 5 35 5 3 1 Master station local station cnr tenen re erre et eee en nao e eta 5 35 5 3 2 Local station lt local station eene tenen tnn entr t ntn n nnns 5 38 5 3 3 Master station intelligent device station esssssssssseeeeeeeneennen 5 39 A 7 A 7 5 4 Link Refresh Tinie Sas dated we vada Sue Patel vita 5 40 5 4 1 Master station local station ssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeenne nnne nnne nnne tnnt nnne nnns 5 40 5 5 Station Status at Error OCCUFTOTICO c eds eet dp m Oe LX ER ER RET HR re Foe cep X NY Eae Rn ege d 5 44 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence nennen nnne 5 44 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence 5 45 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link 6 1 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter
10. 6 1 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer 6 2 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction 6 2 6 2 Parameter Setting ccccecesececceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeceeeeaeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaesseseaeeaesaessaseaesaeseeeaeeaesaeeeeseaeeats 6 3 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 6 5 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssseseenenenenneneenne nennen 6 5 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter 6 10 6 3 3 Local station network parameter settings ssssssseseeeneenenennnee nennen 6 12 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings ssneen 6 15 6 4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 6 17 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssseeneeeeneeneeneennen nennen 6 17 6 4 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings senn 6 22 6 4 3 Local station network parameter settings sse nennen 6 24 6 4 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings seen
11. Cyclic transmission enabled Cyclic transmission disabled Prohibited 4 FUNCTIONS 4 MELSEC Q Mismatch in number of points between parameter set expanded cyclic setting and installation status If there is a mismatch in the number of points between the parameter set expanded cyclic setting and installation status the QJ61T11N stores the error code into SW0069 Also it stores the matching status of each station into SW009C Precautions for modes between the master and local standby master stations At any of the following settings an error error code B3A0 will occur at the local station standby master station If the error has occurred correct the mode in the parameter of the master station local station standby master station and reset the PLC CPU The mode set at the master station differs from the mode set at the standby master station When the master station is set to the remote net ver 1 mode the local station is set to the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode When the master station is set to the remote net ver 2 mode the local station is set to remote net additional mode 6 Automatic refresh setting a By specifying refresh devices automatic refresh is performed in the END processing of the PLC CPU The automatic refresh covers the areas from station No 1 to the station No set with the network parameter including occupied stations
12. No setting Already set Indispensable settings No setting Already set Setif it is needed s Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwite SCRL 11 23 11 23 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Case of CPU STOP Refresh clears compulsoril stations Default Occupies 1 station single double quadruple octuple double setting Default single Master station Master station Master station Duplex function Master station Duplex function Type Local station Local Station Standby master statior Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 1 mode R f emoteinettver mode C Remote net Ver 2 mode D Mode Remote n t mode Remote net Additional mode Female o ner mode Remote I O net mode Onf line Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All connect count medu Default 64 Ver 2 Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Special relay SB Device name Sel
13. irren enhn nnne nnns 1 2 TS Features ete VENERE ENTE LH ENTIRE LH EHE EL REEL eed 1 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 9 2 1 System 2 1 2 2 Applicable SySteM anythin otis dee nee pet ete n ee ten et eats 2 4 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be 2 4 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration nennen nre nennen 2 6 2 2 3 How to check the function version sess nennen nnne nnns 2 8 pou cm 2 9 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 7 3 1 Performance Specifications cccccccceccecceeeseeceeceeeeseeeecaeceeeeaecaecaesseeeaesaeceeseeeeaesaeeeesaesaeseeseeesaeeeseeseaeeaees 3 1 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 3 3 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 3 5 3 2 CC Link Dedicated Cable esses i einst tne a sinere 3 6 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 75 APU IRUNCUONIEISE Sse be eet see cot bets bla set ntn t Lbs ones cee 4 1 4 2 Basic FUnCtlons ee eoe Me m e i e ee e ee e I e EM cg ee em 4 8 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaesaesreneeaes 4 8 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations
14. MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable 11 Wu TP disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range MOVP H30 W1015 setting RWw9 SET on initial data setting EON GT SG Ash occ ER Y Request flag RY19 gt AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting processing 1078 urns off initial data 178 RST Yi078 processing completion flag RY18 X1079 initi Turns off initial data setting 202 RST 1103 J request flag RY19 ee output value read AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Reads CH 1 digital woN WO D500 oa output value RWr0 X1001 1 Reads CH 2 digital E De m output value RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 236 MOVP w8 D508 Reads error code RWr8 Biron tee l SET YIOIA 1 Turns on error reset z request flag RY1A YIOIA XIO1A r 4 Turns off error reset 261 4 LRST renuest flag RY1A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X107B ne 4 CH 1 digital value 264 4 MOVP 500 Digital value setting RWw0 500 setting 2 des move 000 wo CH 2 digital value AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X107B setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog 290 KX Y1060 output e
15. Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting iz Program Device comment Parameter is PLC paramete Network 144 Remote pass Device memory Device init 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational settin Operational settings Type Master station Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count Remote Remote outpul Remote register Awr Remote register ww Ver 2 Remote input Rx Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register wi Ver 2 Remote register E Www Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No 11 5 Project Ready PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Interrupt setting Remote device station initial settinu Stop Asynchronous Station information Jnitial settings Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings setting Already set Set if itis needed No setting Already set Host station 002 Ovrwrte 11 5 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to th
16. sssssssseeeeeeennee nenne 9 9 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program sse 9 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 1to 10 57 10 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used ssssseseeneeeenenee nennen 10 1 10 31 Configuring a System a oot et tro eta ania eco ated ate o ten 10 1 1 Setting the master painan aada naa aAa annis tein ainsi trennt 10 2 2 Setting the remote device station sess trennen 10 3 10 1 2 Setting the master station parameters sssssssssssssseseeeeeeeennennet enne 10 4 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station ssssssssssseeeenns 10 4 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 6 10 1 3 Initial setting of the remote device station sssneeneenennenennn 10 7 1 Setting the target station number sssssssssssssssssseeeee nennen tnnt tnnt trennt tette nnns 10 7 2 Setting the regist procedure registration essent 10 7 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings 10 11 10 1 4 Creating a program ssssssssssssssssseseeeee eee 10 13 A 9 A 9
17. 4 62 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function essen 4 63 4 4 12 Multiple PLC system support sssssssssssessesssseeeeneennetnn nnne 4 64 4 4 13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting 4 65 4 4 14 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 4 67 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions ssssssssssssssssseseee eene entente 4 75 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions 4 75 in erre eer 5 1 5 2 Transmission Delay do da de de Eee d rage 5 4 5 2 1 Master station remote I O station essen nennen enne nennen 5 4 5 2 2 Master station lt remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave 5 7 5 2 3 Master station lt remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 5 12 5 2 4 Master station lt local station Ver 1 compatible slave 5 20 5 2 5 Master station lt local station Ver 2 compatible slave
18. 2 Remote register Rw Ver 2 Remote reaister AWw Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt setting Operational settings Local station Remote net Ver 1 mode Interrupt settings Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset ne NUM SCRL Indispensable settings No setting Already set Ovrwrte 002 Host station 11 8 11 8 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc
19. DUNS FX 1 occupies 1 station 2 occupies 2 stations 3 occupies 4 stations quadruple single BT 0 8 ST 2300 50 110 X 1 160 NI 12 16 1 800 12 X 15 980 NW 11 16 2 900 3 X 50 1050 N 5 3 1200 11 X 100 2300 ni 12 A 12 B 3 C 11 nw 10 LS 0 8 27 16 X 4 8 16 X 9 6 5 30 12 X 4 8 10 X 9 6 2300 160 2908 8 s 2 91 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 2 For remote I O net mode LS BT 27 NI X 4 8 N 30 ni X 4 8 ST F u s BT Constant transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps Br ste ia sz xe m NI NI Final station number must be a multiple of 8 Los losa Number of connected modules Total number of occupied stations ST Constant 250 ni X 10 F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 X BT X 1 number of retries Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station Station Station Station number 1 1 number 2 1 number 3 1 Master station Remote Remote Remote I O station I O station station 1 occupies 1 station BT 0 8 ST 200 ni X 10 NI 23 58 200 3 10 N 3 230 ni 3 LS
20. Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Sets the station for which line tests are executed SWO0008 Line test station 0 Entire system executed for all stations 608v setting 01 to 64 Specified station only Default value 0 Sets the monitoring time when a dedicated instruction is used Default value 10 seconds swo009 Monitoring time 101 609 Setia Setting range 0 to 360 seconds 9 The monitoring time of 360 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified Sets the CPU response monitoring time when the CPU is accessed with a dedicated instruction SW000A CPU monitoring time Default value 90 seconds 60 setting Setting range 0 to 3600 seconds The monitoring time of 3600 seconds will be used if a value outside of the above setting range is specified swo0z0 Indicates the module status 620 Module status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the data link restart instruction with eee Data link restart result aoe 641 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master Refresh instruction at SW0043 tandbv masier switching 6434 j cert 0 Normal WI I n Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 3 Only the bit for the first station number i
21. Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV LF L Remote device station station number 1 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD DB ire CL DG 9 7 10 2 10 2 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual WELSEG AJ65VBTCU 68ADV CON SE S 2 3 Station number setting switch SW1 Transmission speed setting switch T o 4 0 5 o Stati ation 4 number 1 6 o D 4 1 E gt gt 156kbps j 8 2 S J n MODE N gt Mode select switch 0 N
22. 8 31 Link refresh time 5 40 Link 1 5 1 Link special relays SB 8 19 8 26 Link special registers SW 8 20 8 31 Local A 14 Local StatiOn iret A 14 1 1 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 15 6 27 6 40 Local station communication 1 4 Local station network parameter Settings 6 12 6 24 6 37 Loading status 8 33 Loading parameter consistency status 8 37 Loop test 13 19 Master module A 14 Master A 14 1 1 Master station automatic refresh parameter Setlings eme 6 10 6 22 6 34 Master station information 8 29 Master station network parameter Settings tnter 6 5 6 17 6 29 Master station return specification information 8 29 Master switching request acknowledgment sss 8 28 Master switching request complete 8 28 Master station transient transmission Stat S e HQ 8 30 Master module A 14 Max communication station number 8 34 Max link scan time
23. Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting CAsynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting sto 11 18 11 18 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Station Expanded Number of Remote station Reservelinvalid Intelligent buffer select word Station type occupied No cyclic setting Stations points station select Send Receive Automatic Occupies 4 stations 1 Ver 1 Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 128 Occupies 2 stations 5 Ver 2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 128 b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project parameters Setting the CC Link list im Project Edit Find Replace c ols sallali Boards No of boards in module 1 Unset project Blank no setting Program Device comment Parameter PLC paramete Network 12 Remote pass Device memory Device init 1 2 3 Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational settin Operational settings Type Master station Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode connect count Remote input FiX Remote outpu
24. POINT In the event of cable disconnection the data link cannot be performed because there is no terminal resistor ERR LED lights up Master Local Local station station station A Ag Terminal Disconnection Terminal resistor resistor 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal Automatic return function This function allows remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have been disconnected from the data link due to power off to automatically reconnect to the data link when they return to the normal status Setting method Set the Automatic reconnection station count value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error This function sets the data link status when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that stop the operation It is possible to continue the data link among the local stations 1 The data link continues when the master station PLC CPU falls into an error that stops the operation 2 Ifa standby master station is being set the data link will not continue when the master station PLC CP
25. X101F to X1010 RXO2F to RX020 X102F to X1020 RXOSF to RX030 X103F to X1030 RXO4F to X104F to X1040 RXO5F to RX050 X105F to X1050 RXO6F to RX060 X106F to X1060 RXO7F to RX070 21070 to x1070 11 10 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Master station Local station Local station PLC CPU Master station PLC CPU lt lt olajuj u 1 oOjojojojojojojojojojol o joljo jolo i 2 2 2 i a 2 J i 8 5 8 8 8 6 amp 5 8 5 8 8 2 j2 2 2 9 z ez jz E EE E E E E E E ERE 22 2 2 2 518 0 co r ojoj a imiojaj uju o j je wljeol siuvidovo rjolol aioija 9 5 9 8 2 9 8 3 23 3 3 3 23 23 23 23 2 2 2 i lolrlaloals 222 2 2 i i W10E W10F 11 11 11 11 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 1
26. station number 1 1 1 to RX 10 X1F to X10 1614 number1 For station J 2 i 1624 For station number 2 1634 number2 For station 4 EE EE 1644 For station number3 E5 bd EE 1654 number3 For station E6 MEE ME 1664 Forstation number 4 7 1674 number 4 1 i 1 For station 8 i 168 For station number 5 E94 1694 number5 1 M 1 1 1 2 1 to to i to For station f 1504 RX7CF to RX7CO 1 MEE 1DC For station number 63 15Du RX7DF to RX7DO MER ME 1DDuJ number 63 For station 15 RX7EF to RX7EO 1 ME 10 For station number 64 15 RX7FF to RX7FO P d E 1DF4 number 64 1 1 I 1 8 PROGRAMMING Station Buffer memory number Station Buffer memory number 6 8 EM address EOH to E1H 2 to 4 to 5 to E7H 8 to 9 to EDH to FOH to F1H 2 to 4 to 5 F6H to F7H F8H to 9 address 160 to 161H 162 to 163H 1644 to 165H 166 to 167H 168 to 169H 16 to 16B 16 16D 16 16 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table o
27. 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer the data is cleared when the RY refresh device is set to Y the data is cleared or held when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 2 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station the receive area is retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations 5 44 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 5 2 Status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 lists the status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Table 5 2 The status of the remote device station local station standby master station when the local station is operating and intelligent device station at error occurrence Remote device station Local station standby master station intelligent device station when local station is operating Data link status Remote Remote Remote Remote register register Remate TOS register jen t RX tput RY t RX input
28. 10 13 10 13 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr PERS etus Remote device station station number 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV For write 1 5 i W100 RWwO A D conversion enable prohibit specification W101 RWw1 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting w102 RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting W103 RWws3 Average processing specification W104 RWwA CH 1 average time number of times setting W105 RWw5 CH 2 average time number of times setting W106 RWw6 CH 3 average time number of times setting W107 RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting W108 RWw8 CH 5 average time number of times setting W109 RWw9 6 average time number of times setting W10A RWWA 7 average time number of times setting W10B RWwB 8 average time number of times setting For read wooo RWr0 CH 1 digital output value WO001 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value WO02 RWr2 CH 3 digital output value w003 RWr3 CH 4 digital output value W004 RWr4 CH 5 digital output value W005 RWr5 CH 6 digital output value WO006 RWr6 CH 7 digital output value W007 RWr7 8 digital output value
29. 8 30 8 36 Other station monitoring 18 17 Other station switch change status 8 30 8 36 Other station watchdog timer error occurrence status 8 35 Other station watchdog timer error status 8 30 P Parameter 8 33 Parameter information read acknowledgment status 8 28 Parameter information read completion Slat depu hats 8 28 Parameter information read request 8 26 Parameter 6 1 Parameter receive status 8 29 Parameter setting checklist App 43 Parameter setting items 6 3 Parameter setting status 8 29 Parameter setting test result 8 32 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction eesesesseeeeeeeeennnnne 1 6 4 23 Parameter settings 6 1 Part identification nomenclature and settings eese 7 4 Performance specification 3 1 Precautions on programming 8 1 Procedure before starting the data link 7 1 Processing time for dedicated instructions 5 35 Progr arni iiei c ertet Eee rebut
30. M310 XOF 3624H ME Mc NO M320 NO 4320 Refresh of RX SB6E 380 MW FROM HO HOEO K4X1000 K6 Refresh of RWr SB6E 396 FROM HO 2 0 D1000 K4 Station number 1 control program 580 0 413 Station number 1 control program H Station number 2 control program sW8o0 1 f 427 Station number 2 control program Station number 3 control program 3180 2 441 Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E d 455 0 HO HIEO D2000 K4 J Refresh of RY SB6E 412 K4Y1000 K6 488 MCR NO Refresh of SB SW SM400 489 TO HO H5EO K4SBO K4 TO HO H600 SWO K64 2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices App 39 MELSEC Q First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word Dedicated instruction RLPASET 2 Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F RXr0 to RWr3 are read to D1000 to D1003 D2000 to D2003 are written into RWw0 to RWw3 Y1000 to Y105F are written into to RY5F 80000 to SBOO3F are refreshed SW0000 to SWO003F are refreshed App 39 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Differences Between the New
31. b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX Desire Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 09 8 Program Device comment B Parameter Start 1 0 No si PLC paramete Operational setine Operational settings Type Local station Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Y connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote registerFi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register R WT Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode settine Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial ___Interupt setting Interrupt settings 1 1 1 _ EL Device memory Device init 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set eady Host station wwe Read 02 H i 0 NUM 11 9 11 9 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 2 4 Creating a program Master station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103
32. 8 15 8 PROGRAMMING Buffer memory number address 2E0n to 2 2 4 to 2E7H 2 8 to 2 4 2 to 2 2 0 to 2 6 2 4 to 2 7 2 8 to 2 2FCH to 2FFH 300H to 303H 3044 to 307 308H to 30BH 30C to 310H to 313H Station Buffer memory address 1 0 to 1 1 4 1 7 1 8 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 1 4 to 1 7 1 8 to 1 1 to 1FFH 200 to 203H 204 to 207H 208 to 20BH 20 to 20 210 to 213H number BEI EA 9 MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 314u to 317H 15 318H to 31BH 16 31Cu to 31FH 17 320H to 323H 18 324 to 327H 19 328 to 32BH 20 32Cu to 2 21 330H to 333H 22 334H to 337H 23 338H to 33BH 24 33CH to 33FH 25 340H to 343H 26 344 to 347H Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 348 to 34BH 28 4 to 4 29 350H 353H 30 354 to 357H 31 358 to 5 32 5 to 35FH 33 360H 363H 34 364H to 367H 35 368H to 36BH 36 36CH to 36FH 37 370H to 373H 38 374u to 377H 39 378 to 37BH Station Buffer memory number address 40 37Cu to 7 41 380H to 383H 42
33. 8 34 Maximum number of link points 3 1 Maximum overall cable distance 3 1 3 3 3 5 Maximum transmission distance 3 1 Min link scan time 8 34 Mode selection method 8 40 Mode setting 8 33 Module operating status 8 33 Module 8 27 8 31 Monitoring time setting 8 31 Multiple temporary error invalid station specification eese 8 31 Index 2 N No of automatic return 1 8 33 No of retries information 8 33 Notes on the system configuration 2 6 Number of host occupied stations 8 29 Number of connected modules 8 34 Number of CPUs that can be installed 2 4 Number of I O occupied points 3 1 Number of link points per station 3 1 Number of occupied station 3 1 Offline test 8 28 Operation specification when CPU is down 8 29 Other station data link status 8 30 8 35 Other station fuse blown status
34. Project Edit Find F Online dow 2 cl Beine 7 ep tla s 15 Jalal a a 1 Habe al sil ses a 8 tol amp xm I BB Unset project No of boards in module J Boards Blank no setting 9 08 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 5 18 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 2 PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings Network Typ Master station E 19 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start ad 8 Device memory Mode Remote 120 net mode x v 18 Device init All connect count 3 Remote input Ei 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote registerfR wir Remote register EwW w Ver 2 Remote input Ei Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register R Wr Ver 2 Remote register RW w Special relay SB 5 0 Special register SW sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station intial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 4 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Alreadyset Project Ready Q02 H Host station Ovwwte NUM 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION A
35. 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIRD instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU 1 Command G RIRD 1 Buffer memory 2 Device memory Device memory Receive buffer 2 1 Accesses the buffer memory specified by S 2 and S 3 of the station specified by S 1 or the PLC CPU device 2 Stores the data that has been read in the receive buffer of the master module 3 Stores the data that has been read after the device specified in D1 and the device specified by D2 turns on b The RIRD instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other instructions for transient transmission refer to Appendix 2 is not allowed to the same local station or intelligent device station Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is completed App 5 App 5 APPENDIX Sequence program RIRD instruction Completion device Status display device at completion App 6 MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRD instruction the completion device D2 and status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at com
36. 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 The other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave station connected to the master local station becomes faulty The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration faulty status or other conditions 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 6 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Stores the fuse blown occurrence status of each station 0 Normal 1 Abnormal SW0088 6884 SW0089 b15 6891 Other station fuse SWO0088 16 6 swooga blown status SW0089 32 68 008 48 SW008B SWO008B 68 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the switch change status of other stations performing data link SW008C 0 No change 68 1 Change occurred SW008 68D Other station switch 008 SWoosE change status ies 68E 510080 SWO008E ee SWO008F 68 b15 614 6012 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the line status Line status 0 Normal 1 Data link cannot be performed disconnected Indicates the occurrence status of a transient transmission error SWO094 0 No transient transmission
37. E E NO M100 Initialization procedure registration SBOF 38 RST XI01B X151B I 34 X1018 56 SET X1518 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting change 0 D 00000000 Initial setting change i 59 wovP OVP H30 MOVP 200 KIG SET X1019 90 RST AJ65VBTCU 68ADV digital output value read Xi01B 1000 92 MOV WO X1001 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 124 OVP W8 Error reset SET Y101A X101A 149 ME RST The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 54 SBOD SBOD W100 W101 W103 W105 Y1019 Y1019 D500 D501 D508 Y101A Y101A MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal Turns off initialization procedure registration directive Turns on initialization procedure registration directive AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1
38. to FDH FEu to FFH 100 to 101H 102 to 103 104 to 105 106 107 108 109 10 10 10 100 10 10 110 111 112 113 number Station Buffer memory address H to 115H Hto 117H H to 119H H to 11 H to 11DH H to 11 Hto 121H H to 123H H to 125 H to 127H H to 129H H to 12BH H to 12DH number Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12F 130 to 131 132 to 133 134 to 135 136 to 137 138 to 139 1 to 13B 13 to 13D 1 to 13F 140 to 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 Station number Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14 14 140 14 14 150 151H 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 15 15 15 to 15DH 15 to 15FH PROGRAMMIN dins E MELSEC Q 3 Remote registers RWw and RWr Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station RWw remote device station RWw local station RWr 1 Master station The data to be sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station and the remote registers RWr of all local stations are stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station The data sent to the remote register RWw of the remote device station can also be received Four wor
39. 11 38 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX evene Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list eel erst o nol e n ata re cc B EB un Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 89 8 Program 8 1 Device comment 1 2 3 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 ur PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Local station x M 2 Remote pass Master st
40. Because the start address the remote resister side is an odd address new and old data may be mixed in 16 bit 1 word units 2 Access by the sequence program must be made in units of even points PLC CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station 1 T 1 Because the access is made for each single point 1 word new and old data may be mixed in 16 bit 1 word units 11 1 11 1 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used 11 2 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with one connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJ61BT1 P Terminal resistor Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 2 11 2 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch x 10 Masterstaion 0 o Local station 0 1 x 1 M Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC 1 NC DA 2 SLD 3 DB 3 ire CC gt DG 9 7
41. Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 p Expanded cyclic setting r Data link disorder station setting Hold input data p Case of CPU STOP setting Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 9 Set the number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data single x r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel h Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using Expanded cyclic setting Default value single Setting range single double quadruple octuple Example Set to double Parameter name Number of exclusive stations L p Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel i Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Additional mode
42. Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJE5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to A D conversion enable the first condition Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 7 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 8 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execut
43. b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw remote device station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the data for the remote device station is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan t
44. e Stabilized power supply Remote module Remote module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 3 Access to station No 64 a Toalocal station of No 64 other station access from GX Developer or GOT is not allowed If the station No is changed to other than 64 other station access is executable b The CC Link board is not allowed to access a local station or intelligent device station whose station No is 64 If the station No is changed to other than 64 other station access is executable 4 Precautions for use on remote I O stations Pay attention to the following for use on remote I O stations Interrupt setting of network parameters is not available Transient transmissions using dedicated instructions are not allowed to local stations and intelligent device stations 2 2 3 How to check the function version The following describes how to check the function version 1 How to check the function version of the QJ61BT11N a Checking the SERIAL column of the rating plate on the module side CCrink WA MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial No first 5 digits Function version SERIAL 05032000000000 i i Conformed standard A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b See Section 13 4 for how to check the function version with GX Developer 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 4 CC Link version There are two types of CC Link version i e Ver 1 and Ver 2 1 Definition
45. i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop 3 Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q n Set 0 for the delay time Set the station data using Station information settings Default value Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station including local
46. 02 Set data Setting range Data type Un Stat number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored m Md specified device Within the range of the f D1 Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored 19 Device name specified device 52 Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D2 Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the Bit reading D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 A 2 0985 0000 0004H User Attribute code Buff f poi 5 51 4 Specify the read data count in word units 1 to 480 App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the intelligent device station from which data will be read 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intel
47. Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match s the corresponding local station performing data ink Do the number of occupied stations settings for a ocal station match to the station information for a e Check the LED display on the corresponding local station e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 master station s data written to the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station e Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 e Check the max communication station number 5 0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading status SW006
48. Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name i Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station 9 Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 2 mode h Setthe total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using
49. M10 J Control program when the master station is operating SB7B _ E Control ladder when the standby master station is operating Local station operating Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation When forcibly switching the data link control right from the standby master station to the master station The areas enclosed by the broken and dotted lines in the program example shown in d must be modified as shown below Forced master switching M200 M10 M200 SB46 1 SET SB0C NCR NO 1 M11 Control program when the standby master operation is operating local station operation SB5D HK rst SBOC 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 Handy Functions This section explains some handy functions of the QJ61BT11N 4 4 1 Simplifying the initialization procedure registration of remote device stations Remote device station initialization procedure registration function The initial settings of remote device stations which in previous models were done using the sequence program can now be performed using the GX Developer for registration to the PLC CPU Settings such as A D conversion enable disable and Averaging processing specification can be performed easily with the AJ65BT 64AD For an example of an initialization procedure using the GX De
50. arte the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example When is turned ON this program stores 10 word data from DO to buffer memory address 100H and succeeding addresses of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO M13 is the RIWT instruction executing flag Ki D101 H4 D102 H100 D103 K10 D104 DO MO App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 RIRCV instruction The RIRCV instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and reads data from the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Available for modules that have handshake signals e g AJ65BT R2 Usable devices Set data urs user File Direct JAO function sister ee Instruction Execution symbol condition dormar RIRCV G RIRCV Command RIRCV erR Un 5 n 2
51. b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X24 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 1 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 e M
52. output value output value output value RWr7 RWr8 RWr9 RWrA RWrB Reserved Reserved Reserved Ver 2compatible for write W1001 RWr1 CH 2 check code RWr2 CH 3 check code CH 4 check code CH 5 check code CH 6 check code heck code CH 8 check code Error code Reserved Reserved W1500 1 digital W1501 RWw1 CH 2 digital W1502 CH 3 digital W1503 4 digital W1504 RWw4 CH 5 digital value setting W1505 RWw5 CH 6 digital value setting W1506 7 digita W1507 RWw7 8 digital value setting W1508 RWWw8 Analog output enable disable setting W1509 RWw 9 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting W150A RWWA CH 5 to CH 8 output range setting W150B J RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting W150C RWC Reserved W150D RWwD Reserved W150E Reserved W150F RWwF Reserved Ver 2compatible for read W1000 RWr0 CH 1 check code RWrA RWrB Reserved Reserved RWrD Reserved RWrE Reserved RWrF Reserved 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN wc NO M100 Xo XOF Xi 9800
53. 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 of the master module specified by Un 2 Stores the data read after the device specified by D b The RIFR instruction reads data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station c The maximum points that can be read by the RIFR instruction are 4096 d The basic number of steps of the RIFR instruction is 9 steps e The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the setting for number of points to read n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start I O num
54. 10 Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station backup station for the master station if a malfunction occurs in the master station due to a malfunction of the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to online even during data link control by the standby master station and prepares itself for standby master station system down see Section 4 3 6 Standby master station Data link control by the master station Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 a Mis Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Standby master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Data B control in progress LA Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Continued from the previous page Master station returns to normal and comes back online gt Master station prepares itself for standby master station system d
55. 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below sul elel EL s de p le 50 pal a Program ZI Unset project No of boards in module yj Boards Blank no setting ta Program 1 Device comment 1 18 Parameter Hs Ez B a PLC paramete i i Operational settinc ii Network Type Master station 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start B Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 181 Device init connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote register wir Remote register Aww Ver 2 Remote inputf RX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register Wi Ver 2 Remote register E Ww Special
56. 62 96 64 X 192 b8 X 384 compatible slave stations that occupy 2 stations Condition 2 x 96 c2 X 160 c4 X 320 c8 x 640 which are set to Single c The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Single d The total number of ver 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Single X 128 d2 224 d4 448 d8 x 896 lt 8192 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Double The number of ver 2 compatible stations that X 4 a2 X 8 a4 X 16 a8 x 32 occupy 4 stations which are set to Double b X 8 b2 X 16 b4 X 32 b8 64 Condition 3 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that X 12 2 X 24 4 X 48 c8 xX 96 occupy 1 station which are set to Quadruple d X 16 d2 X 32 d4 X 64 d8 X 128 lt 2048 p4 The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Quadrupl
57. Asynchronous mov KO D7 Dealay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M300 Y 6 ma First station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 mov H102 D11 Second Remote I O station T occupies 1 station station number 2 mov H103 D12 Third Remote l O station occupies 1 station Reserved station specification data station number 3 M300 891 4 mov H4 D50 71 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification data M300 wH H2 60 Error invalid station specification station number 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 120 mov K100 D70 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word moy K100 71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word Mov KO 72 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14H for station No 20 6 PARAMETER SETTIN Z MELSEC Q Parameter registration data link startup M300 48 GP RLPASET uo DO D10 D50 D60 D70 301 Dedicated instruction RLPASET Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 181 N300 Turn the parameter setting instruction off SB3 1 Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction M310 Instruct to start the control program at normal completio
58. other than 14 to 40s The total number of occupied stations set Total number of stations error XT Set a parameter value of 64 or B385 with the station information parameter parameter less exceeded 64 The number of all occupied stations in Set the occupied station Number of occupied stations SEA A B386 the station information parameter was set number to a value between 1 x setting error parameter pus to 0 4 The delay time setting in the master Ta B387 Delay time setting error station network parameters is out of the Set a value within the setting x parameter range setting range Station type setting error The station type in the station information Set to a value between 0 and B388 low x parameter parameter was set to other than O to 2 2 Remote device station settin The number of remote device stations Set the remote device station to B38B 9 was set to 43 stations or more with the 42 stations or less with the error parameter Sau Mus station information parameter station information parameter The number of intelligent device stations Set the intelligent device station Intelligent device station setting including local stations was set to 27 eng nes B38C to 26 stations or less with the error parameter stations or more with the station EA 5 station information parameter information parameter Other than module head station number or station numb
59. pue M I 2 ee ON RIRCV instruction Completion device Status display device at completion Receive completion RYn Request device RXn Completion device Other end station send ready d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRCV instruction is 10 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error l 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction 4003 When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data t
60. swe0 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 2 I O Signals for the PLC CPU This section explains the input output signals for the PLC CPU of the master local module 8 2 1 I O signal list Table 8 1 shows a list of the I O signals The in the table indicates the master local module s first number which is determined by both the installation position and the module installed before the master local module Example When the master local module s first number is X Y30 Xn0 to X n 1 F X30 to X4F YnO to Y n 1 F gt Y30 to Y4F Table 8 1 I O signal list Signal direction PLC CPU lt Master local module Signal direction PLC CPU Master local module xo Mole O o vo Xni Hostdealnksaus w x2 JUsepobtd w xn3__ Otherstationdatalinkstatus 4 Yn4 Xn6 Yn6 Xn9 Use prohibited Yn9 XnC YnC xr O w TEE _ Use prohibited X n 1 F 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q IMPORTANT The use prohibited output signals shown in Table 8 1 are accessed by the system and cannot be accessed by the user In the event these signals are used turned on off by the user normal operations cannot be guaranteed In the A QnA series data link startup was performed by setting the Yn6 Data Link Startup Request initiated by a buffer memory parameter and Yn8 Data link Startup Request initiated
61. 2 4 2120 Wy Woy X x z 4 Similarly make the procedure registration of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 4 The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to Analog output enable the first condition Set the Output range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set the HOLD CLEAR setting of channels 1 2 to CLEAR the third condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the forth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the sixth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the seventh condition Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 4 Input format HEX T Execute Operational Executional condition Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data ON ww 10 48 10 48 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indic
62. 2 Local station program 26 5 0 a gs BE Gee iius 11 12 11 2 5 Performing the data link anniari kiai eii trennen h 11 14 1 Confirming the operation with the LED 11 14 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence 11 15 11 3 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode iS 11 16 Gonfigurirdg a SVSIeI Ds ales ahaa a nete ipe petenti a ia nine tae 11 16 1 Setting the master and local stations sssssssssssessssseeeneeenet enne 11 17 11 3 2 Setting the master station parameters sse nennen 11 18 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 11 18 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 11 20 11 3 3 Setting the local station parameters sees 11 21 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 11 21 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station NUMBER ws ave Avan n n LL E e a Pn ae 11 23 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 11 24 4 Setting the automatic refre
63. Cyclic communication Master station is down Data link control by the standby master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 X A Cyclic communication Standby master station Station number 1 0 1 Controlling Cyclic beefnunication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Master station returns to normal mode and system operation Master station prepares itself for standby master station system down Master station Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Station number 2 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 V N Standby master station Station number 0 Controlling Cyclic communication Cyclic communication To the next page Cyclic communication x1 When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station the station number of the standby master station becomes 0 x2 When the master station returns to system operation as a standby master station the station number of the master station becomes the one specified in the Standby master station number in the network parameters 4 32 4 32 4 F UNCTIONS
64. L B D R SW L B D W R pecial register Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Retry count our times y Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10 modules count Default 1 Blank 1 4 Blank N i ifi Standby master station No ank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Stop contin PLO down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Set 0 C Scan mode setting Asynchronous synchronous App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 2 Station information setting checklist Station information setting checklist Expanded Number of Remote murem buffer select Word Station Send Station type cyclic occupied station station select eco Automatic m E 44 44 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Expanded Number of Remote A buffer select Word Station pop Station type cyclic occupied station station select P Receive Automatic E MR eS App 45 App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC Q MEMO App 46 App 46 INDEX A Appendix roinnean iinn App 1 Applicable CPU 2 4 Applicable system 2 4 Automatic CC Link startup 1 9 4 52 Automatic return function 1 6 4 26 Au
65. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual QJ61BT11N CC Link Master Lokal Module Art no 158161 01 07 2005 SH NA aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version D ersion e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions gt DANGER resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTION 4 DANGER e See Chapter 5 of this manual for each station s operating status when there is a communic
66. Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY5F to RY50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY8F to RY80 RY6F to RY60 The last two bits cannot be used the communication between the master and local stations 4 FUNCTION ee MELSEC Q On off data from the master station to local stations 6 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of the master station 7 The data in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored automatically for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the local station 8 The input status stored in the buffer memory remote input RX is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 2 Local station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX RvoFto Rvoo l 7 f RxoFtoRXoo l 7 jf RXOFtoRX00 RY1D to 10 1 IRX1D to RX10 J LIIBXITD to RX10 RY2F to RY20 RX2F to RX20 RX2F to RX20 RY3F t
67. Station that controls the data link system One master station is required for each system Local station Station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Remote I O station Remote station that handles bit unit data only Performs input and output with external devices AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D Remote device station Remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only Performs input and output with external devices and analog data conversion AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI Remote station Generic term for remote I O station and remote device station Controlled by the master station Intelligent device station Station that can perform transient transmission such as the AJ65BT R2 including local stations Standby master station Backup station for data link control when the link to the master station is disconnected due to a PLC CPU or power supply problem Slave station Generic term for remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Master local module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 and A1SJ61QBT11 Master module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJe1QBT1 1 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as master stations Local module Generic term for QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 AJ6
68. a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 3 1 5 30 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple
69. b When the remote net additional mode is selected data of station No 1 to the last Ver 1 compatible station including occupied stations and data of Ver 2 compatible stations from its first station No the last Ver 1 compatible station No 1 to the last station No are automatically refreshed to devices specified in the first and last halves respectively c Inthe Ver 2 compatible remote register data in the area up to the last remote device or intelligent device station No are refreshed Example In the case where the remote net additional mode Ver 1 compatible station No 1 to 8 Ver 2 compatible station No 9 to 16 occupying 1 station quadruple setting refresh devices first half Y1000 and refresh devices last half Y1100 are set Master station remote output 160 Station No 1 PLC CPU Y0000 16 Station No 8 Y1000 Y10FF Y1100 Master station Ver 2 compatible remote output Y12FF 4200H Station No 9 Station No 16 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 5 Transient Transmission Functions This section explains the transient transmission functions 4 5 1 Performing transient transmission Dedicated instructions The following dedicated instructions can be used for transient transmission Applicable Reference Instruction Description station section Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station Appendix Master station or a PLC CPU device of a specified station 2 1 Local station EIUS
70. b13 Table 10 2 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master D Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Remote device station the initialization procedure registration SB000D CRAP While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and BEO b13 initialization procedure raniols registers stops x registration instruction OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOO5E Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure 5E5n b14 device station initialization OFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SBOO5F NOTER procedure execution f SEOs b15 initialization OFE Not complete ON Complete device stimon Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO05F LP instruction with SBOOOB f Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 2 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals tha
71. 10 1 5 Performing the data NE UNAN URNE 10 16 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display seen 10 16 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 10 17 10 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode iS ener 10 18 10 21 Configuring a System oto et rot eta dete i teo alto at oe E det 10 18 1 Setting the master SEatioh iiie irre cade trea te dtc eder tco ED Lg aca aede ED E 10 19 2 Setting the remote device station essent nnns 10 20 10 2 2 Setting the master station parameters 2 2 10 22 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 10 22 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 24 10 2 3 Initial setting of the remote device station sssssneeneeennen 10 25 1 Setting the target station number sse tenente nne tnnt nnns nnns 10 25 2 Setting the regist procedure registration cscceccecceseseeceeceeeaeceeceeeeesaecaeseeseaesaesaeeeeeeaesaesaeeeeeeateaes 10 25 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings seen 10 29 10 24 Creating a program va octo tr rrt pere Dr epi d DD hana 10 32 10
72. 10 55 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status o O Otf Module is normal QJeIBTTIN The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN Controlling data link MST S MST Sending data ERR O LERR e am NA e oe s 4 b LED display of the remote device station For both the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN confirm that the LED display status is as shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 24 V DC is being supplied D Module is normal s e The data link is being performed normally a 5 D 10 56 10 56 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VB
73. 143 144 145 146 147 address 1 1AF 1BOu 1B1 1 2 to 1B3 1 4 to 1B5 1B6u to 1B7 1 8 to 1B9 1 to 1BB 1 to 1BD 1 to 1BF 1C0u to 1C1H 1 2 1C3H 1 4 1 5 1C6u to 1C7H Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Station number Buffer memory address 148 to 149H 14 to 14 14 140 14 14 150 151H 152 153 154 to 155 156 157 158 159 15 15 15 to 15DH 15 to 15FH Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1 9 1CAu to 1 1 to 1CDu 1 to 1 1D0xH 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 to 107 108 109 1DAu to 10 10 to 1DDu 10 to 1 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station gt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored Two words are used per station 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored Two words are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below
74. 2 4 or 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station The data received from the remote I O station remote device station RY and master station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 2 to 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote I O station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting double Address Remote output RY Remote input RX Address Station T So H1 Station 42004 RY F to RY O XOF to _ RX F to RX o 4000 umber 1 number 1 RX 1F to RX 10 40011 RX 2F to RX 20 4002 RX to RX 30 4003 201 i exl i RX 4F to RX 40 40041 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 Station _ 4207 RY 1F to RY 10 RY 2F to RY 20 RY to RY 30 RY 4F to RY 40 1 1 1 1 1 1 RY 5F to RY 50 5 to RX50 40054 RY 6F to RY 60 6F to RX60 40064 RY 7F to RY 70 RX 7F to RX 70 40074 Station
75. 4 _ RISEND Un Si 63 03 Command RISEND L L 4emsew Un 62 Set data Setting range Data type Start I O number of the module to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the S1 Start number of the device in which control data is stored 9 specified device Within the range of the i D1 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored d specified device 52 Start number of the device in which the interlock signals are Within the range of the stored specified device D2 Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of Within the range of the writing D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion specified device The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data Setting range Set by Stores the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code S1 1 Station number Specify the station number of the intelligent device station 0 to 64 A d 51 2 ccess code Get 0004H 0004H User Attribute code Buff S1 UHSE TERSIN Specify the buffer memory start address User address Number of points x2 S1 nop Specify the write data count in word units 1 to 480 User App 18 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the intellige
76. Asynchronous mode SM LS 2 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple S Se Eee 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM Xn 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms PROCESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 6 Master station lt intelligent device station The transmission delay time between the master station and an intelligent device station varies by the type of intelligent device station used See the User s Manual for the intellig
77. Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that t
78. Expression Maximum a RIRD value instruction OT 15 X BC read points 16 16 x 1 067 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant psp 39 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 4 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms RIWT instruction OT LS x BC write points 16 72 1 13 ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU_ 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant ns proie ow poen 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words OT LS X BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 72 1 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 X 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 4 Link Refresh Time This section indicates link refresh time increase of END processing time at the PLC CPU 5 4 1 Master station local station This section indicates the link refresh time o
79. For the system that includes a standby master station it is recommended to change for the remote net ver 2 mode When the remote net additional mode is used the sequence program for the standby master station must be corrected Setting method Using GX Developer set the network parameters For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions for cyclic points increase setting a Whether system can be configured or not The following table indicates whether cyclic transmission can be made or not in each station Slave station QU61BT11 3 AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 QISIB TIN AJ61QBT11 Remote station A1SJ61QBT11 A80BD J61BT11 A80BD J61BT13 Local Standby Remote I O BTE station master station i master Remote device station station station station Master stati Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 2 Additional Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 2 Ver 1 Ver 1 aster station mode mode mode mode mode mode mode mode compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible ee ERES E Cyclic transmission enabled A Cyclic transmission enabled on condition Cyclic transmission disabled Intelligent device station QJ61BT11N QJe1BT11 1 When the master station is the QJ61BT11N in remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode and when the local station is the QJ61BT 11N in remote net Ver 1 mode or the QJ61BT11 the local sta
80. MELSEC Q 5 5 Station Status at Error Occurrence This section explains the status of each station at error occurrence 5 5 1 Status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Table 5 1 lists the operation of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station upon the occurrence of an error Table 5 1 The status of the master station standby master station when the master station is operating and remote I O station at error occurrence Master station standby master station when the master station is operating Remote output Remote Remote register Remot t RX Input Output RY register RWw RWr When data link is stopped due to an error generated 1 1 Cont Hold Cont by the master station PLC CPU data link continue bia uibs DM When data link is stopped due to an error generated Remote station Data link status by the local station PLC CPU data link continue When data link for the entire system is communication error power off etc occurs in a remote I O station When a communication error power off etc occurs in a remote device station When a communication error power off etc occurs in a local station The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station i
81. MOVP HO W1017 SET Y1078 SET 1079 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed To the next page 10 30 2 2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data Average processing setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 10 30 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS From the previous page AJeSVBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change i Initial setting change
82. Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU Generic term for QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QCPU A mode Generic term for QO2CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A QnCPU Generic term for QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU and QO2CPU Generic term for QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Generic product name of the product types SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n in the model name is 4 or greater Q series modules other than the CPU module power supply module and I O module that are mounted on the base unit A series and QnA series modules that are mounted on the base unit excluding the CPU module power supply module and I O module QnACPU QCPU Q mode QnHCPU Intelligent function module Special function module Product Components The components of the QJ61BT11N are listed below Item name Quantity QJ61BT11N main unit Terminal resistor 110 Q 1 2 W brown brown brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated cable or Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor 130 1 2 W brown orange brown used when wiring with the CC Link dedicated high performance cable 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview MELSEC Q This manual describes the specifications parts names and settings of the QJ
83. Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 16 11 16 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch x 10 Masterstaion 0 o Local station 0 1 x 1 M Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC 1 NC DA 2 SLD 3 DB 3 ire CC gt DG 9 7 11 17 11 17 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Operational station setting Default Clear settings Case of CPU STOP Refresh clears compulsorily CRefresh gt Clears compulsoril setting P y Default Refresh Master station Mater station Master
84. R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Roi ue M L B T C ST D W Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR RWr Remote output RY Remote register RWw Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 10 4 10 4 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Default Stop CStop P continue Scan mode setting Asynchronous synchronous Asynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Set 0 MEE master station Number of occupied stations Intelligent buffer select word Reserve invalid station select Remote station points Station No Expanded cyclic setting Station type Occupies 3 stations Remote device station single 96 points b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project parameters Setting the CC Link list Saa
85. RX output RWw RW input RX RWw When data link is st d due t ted On Cara MSS SOPPA Ee bea aba Continue Continue Continue Clear Continue Continue Continue by the master station PLC CPU data link continue When data link is st d due t ted NA SORPRESE abd e Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue 3 Continue Continue by the local station PLC CPU data link continue Clears the receive The GX Developer Clear f th Retains the Whendetalinkfor asta link fault All points ie i stations receive area the entire system is OE y Undefined P Undefined Undefined Hold stopped station is set local OFF Retains the receive from other PP station setting Hold areas from other stations stations Clears the receive area from a remote I O station with a When a Ace E The GX Developer communication communication error data link fault error j j power off etc MES si Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station is set local Retains the receive occurs in a remote station setting station g area from a remote I O station with a communication error Clears the receive Retains the area from a remote _ 4 receive area device station with Whena pa ED The GX Developer a communication communication error data link fault error power off etc SANA Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Continue i Conti
86. Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 54 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q OVP HOFC W1508 H30 W1509 SET Y1519 Y1519 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting X151B 181 KS 500 1500 Digital value setting oye K1000 1501 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X151B 207 11500 Analog output enable 11501 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing X151A 2361 W1000 D510 K2 w1008 D518 Error reset SET Y151A Y151A X151A 265 4 ME RST Y151A 268 MCR NO 269 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 55 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 i Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CH 1 digital value setting RWw0 500 CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog output enable disable flag RY00 Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RY01 Read CH L check code RWr0 RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A
87. Receive area Receive area Sendareato Send area to Send area to Send area to Receive area from local Receive area from local station No 2 _ 3 i S Local station station number 1 Buffer memory Remote output RY Host station station number 1 send area Receive area from local station No 2 to Remote input RX Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWr Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWw Host station station number 1 send area Receive area from local station No 2 4 E Link scan 3 2 2 13 Link scan 13 Local station station number 2 Network parameters Buffer memory Remote output RY 5 Receive area from local Automatic refresh gt station No 1 i 2 i Host station station number 2 send area Remote input RX Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWr Receive area from master station Receive area from master station Remote register RWw Receive area from local station No 1 Host station station number 2 send area Automatic refresh e H E Automatic refresh l Automatic refresh 11 Au
88. Remote output Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote 2 Remote register Rw Ver 2 Remote reaister AWw Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt settings Interrupt setting Set if itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Already set pi RUM SCRL Ovrwite 002 Host station 11 25 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overl
89. Section 4 3 3 ENS occurs at the master station PLC CPU Setting the status of input data from Sets the status clear hold of the input receive data from a easiness a data link faulty station station that became data link faulty because of power off Slave station refresh compulsory CERA Sets whether output data to the slave stations will be refreshed clear setting in case of PLC CPU Section 4 3 5 STOP or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU comes to STOP Continues the data link by switching to the standby master Standby master function Section 4 3 6 station when a problem occurs in the master station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Table 4 3 lists the handy functions Table 4 3 List of the handy functions Description Reference section Remote device station initialization Performs initial setting of remote device station using GX Saisir dd ection 4 4 procedure registration function Developer Issues events when the conditions set by GX Developer are established and causes the PLC CPU to run an interrupt Section 4 4 2 Event issuance for the interrupt program program Automatic CC Link startup Starts the CC Link automatically by turning the power on Section 4 4 3 Performs communication with all stations remote station local Remote net mode 2 Section 4 4 4 station intelligent device station and standby master station Shortens the link scan time for a system consisting only of
90. Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Setthe ver 2 compatible remote input RX refresh device using Ver 2 remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1500 f Set the ver 2 compatible remote output RY refresh device using Ver 2 remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1500 g Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWr refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 h Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWw refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1500 i Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B
91. Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO A Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO O Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX MEI Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list fll 4 s5 ER ER EB 29 le alle sn aE5 css cert BRIS FAG No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting B rtp Unset project 9 88 Program E Device comment 1 2 3 1 wf Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 19 PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Master station X 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start 2 BI Device memory Remote net Ver 2 mode x x I Device init connect count 2 Remote input FiX X1000 Remote outputf RY 1000 Remote wa Remote register ww 1000 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRiY Ver 2 Remote register wi Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry cou
92. Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 1070 to Y107 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 I k107D to x107 Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Ver 1 compatible buffer memor RYOOF to RY000 RYO1F to RYO10 RYO2F to RYO20 RYOSF to RY030 RYOAF to RY040 RYO5SF to RYO50 RYO6F to RYO60 RYO07F to RY070 RXOOF to RX000 RXO1F to RX010 RX02F to RX020 RX03F to RX030 RX04F to RX040 RXO5F to RX050 RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 Ver 2 compatible buffer memory RYO7F to RYO70 RYO8F to RY080 RYO9F to RY090 RYOAF to RYOAO RX07F to RX070 RX08F to RX080 9 to RX090 RXOAF to RXOAO Local station PLC CPU Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to 1060 107b to Y1070 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 RYO6F to RY060 RYOBF to RYOBO RXO6F to RX060 X106F to X1060 1070 1500 o 1510 1520 1530 1540 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 11 43 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr
93. parameter Parameter setting with dedicated instruction Slave station cut off function E peo eer Automatic return function _ Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error Functions for improving or Setting the status of input data from a data link system reliability faulty station Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in Pera of PLC CPU STOP Standby master function sd master function Remote device station initialization Pe en function Event issuance for the Event issuance for the interrupt program program PE E DN per Dm Eme tme dT Tonporryerorinaldsaionseting union 0 o Dump e PLC system support Functions for transient Transient transmission transmission Available Unavailable Basic functions 1 Supported by Q00J Q00 Q01CPU starting with function Ver B App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 Parameter Setting Checklist This checklist may be used to set the parameters required to configure a CC Link system Please make a copy of this checklist and use it as needed For more details see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 Appendix 7 1 Parameter setting checklist Parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 station setting Default Clear Case of CPU Refresh clears compu
94. pq oes rene ce eg ERE E Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote output RY RYoF to RYoO RYOF to RYOO Handshaking signals such RY1F to RY10 5 RY1F to RY10 reset request flag i and initial data processing i RY2F to RY20 _______________ jog complete flag i 4 J RYSF to RY30 E a a RY4F to RY40 RYOF to RYOO RY5F to RY50 9 RYIF to 10 RY6F to RYeO 1 RY7F to RY70 M re un RY8F to RY80 to RY7FFto RY7FO Signal direction Master module AJ65BT 64AD Signal name Selection of offset gain values Selection of voltage current RY02 to Not used RY17 RY18 Initial data setting complete flag RY19 Initial data processing request flag RY1A Error reset request flag RY1B to Not used RY1F 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of each remote device station Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master s
95. prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 i Average processing i i i Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 12 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 4 Creating a program This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY 5 x LC CPU Remote device station station number 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV X100F to X1000 SS to RXOO X102F to X1020 to X1030 Y100F to Y1000 to RYO to RYOO Y101F to Y1010 i oe RY1F to RY10 Y102F to Y1020 Y108F to Y1030
96. sse 4 5 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations esesssssssssssesseeeee nennen 4 10 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device stations ssssseeneeennns 4 16 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer sss nennen nnns 4 22 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction sese 4 23 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability sess 4 25 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off trt rre E ete e ERRAT END ies 4 25 4 3 2 Automatically reconnecting a disconnected data link faulty station when it returns to normal Automatic return function cn iv d edd tante eere HR c eae 4 26 4 3 3 Continuing the data link when an error occurs in the master station PLC CPU Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an 4 27 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty Station sss 4 28 4 3 5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 4 29 4 3 6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function
97. the master module 3 Data are written to the buffer memory specified in S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified in S1 1 4 The master module turns the remote output RY specified in S2 0 ON 5 The station specified in S1 1 performs processing for the remote output RY 6 Upon completion of the processing for the remote output RY the station specified in S1 1 turns the remote input RX specified in S2 1 ON and the remote output RY specified in S2 0 turns OFF Also the response showing completion of write to the master module is returned 7 The device specified in D2 turns ON App 20 App 20 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b The RISEND instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other instructions for transient transmission refer to Appendix 2 is not allowed to the same intelligent device station Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is completed c There are two types of interlock signals for the RISEND instruction the completion device D2 and the status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RISEND instruction Normal complet
98. 0000 E PLC paremete Operational setting Operational settings 2 Network para Master station z 127 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Device memory Mode Remote netlVer 1 mode E Device int All connect count 5 Remote inoutfAX X1000 Remote outputfRY Y1000 Remote reaister AW wo Remote registerfRWw Ver 2 Remote inpu EX 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote recisterfAWi Ver 2 Remote reaister R Ww Special elay SB SB0 Special registerfSW SWO Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial settir Initial gs Interrupt setting Interrup L1 180 Indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setifitisneeded Noseting Abeady set Project 4 4 Ready 02 Host station Ovewrte NUM 2 Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Set the remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M
99. 1 Target station 3 Input format z DEC Execute Operational Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Execute Setnew v RX v Execute Same v RX SON Aww 0 15 Execute Setnew H HA Execute Setrew H H Execute Set new Execute Set new Execute Set new et new et new et new et new et new et new et new et new et new en 4 4 en n en cn co 41 4 4 4 4 41414 wo 4 Default i i End setup Cancel 2 Validate initial settings Before creating a program for communication with remote device stations create a program to validate the initial settings that use SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction and SB5F completion status of remote device station initialization procedure For more details see Sections 10 1 4 10 2 4 and 10 3 4 3 Preparation for communication with remote device stations 1 Register the network parameters and the created program in the PLC CPU 2 Reset the PLC CPU or turn the power from off to on 3 Instruct the master station to register the remote device station initialization procedure This instruction may not be necessary in some cases such as when the remote input RX is set as a startup condition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Because one step is performed per link scan as the number of settings increases the processing time
100. 1 Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Ver 1 Remote l O station Ver 1 Remote device station Ver 1 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Ver 2 Remote device station Ver 2 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Expanded cyclic setting When station type is ver 1 compatible station single cannot be changed When station type is ver 2 compatible station single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Remote station points When station type is ver 1 remote I O station 0 points reserve station 8 points 8points 8points reserved 16 points 32 points When station type is other than ver 1 remote station 0 points reserve station n points n Calculated automatically by GX Developer according to the number of occupied stations and expansion cyclic setting Refer to Section 3 1 for the number of points Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the
101. 1 mode A 14 2 2 Remote net ver 2 mode A 14 2 2 4 68 Remote output 8 10 Remote register RWr 8 14 Remote register RWw 8 14 Remote station A 14 Reserved station function 4 55 Reserved station specified status 8 29 8 34 RIRGN App 13 PIR edd App 3 RIF Ree ayes App 23 RISEND aa a 18 26 1 are rtl App 8 iste cette spe aati etn App 29 15 PRW EHE 15 EU recorre toe 15 apr A 15 Index 3 S ee esaet rien E A 15 Scan mode setting information 8 29 Scan synchronous function 1 10 4 57 Selecting a mode according to the system 1 9 Setting checklist App 42 Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station 1 7 4 28 Slave station cut off function 1 6 4 25 Slave station offset size information 8 17 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 1 12 4 29 Special function module
102. 11 3 11 3 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Operational station setting Default Clear settings Case of CPU STOP setting All connect count Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register RWr Ver 2 Remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Standby master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay information setting 11 4 Refresh clears compulsorily Default Refresh C Refresh D Clears compulsorily Mater station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode
103. 13 66 15 66 2 ms instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 1 067 SM ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant JE SENSO dE Su SM x1 Master station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME i Sian MELSEC Q Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Lnik OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 X 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME 5 3 2 Local station lt local station MELSEC Q 1 Local station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is executed by one local station until a response from another local station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 X 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time LS QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant Transmission rate 156 kbps 625 kbps 2 5 Mbps 5 Mbps 10 Mbps m ie v SL Target station sequence prog
104. 13 10 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer sss nnnnnn 13 16 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram esesssseseeeeeeneeeeneen nennen rennen App 1 Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List sessesssseseeeeeeeenennennen nennen nennen nennen App 2 Appendix 2 1 RIRD instruction emae iria eiir r iir EEr A NE etre i App 3 Appendix 2 2 RIWT instruction nennen nennen rennen nnne App 8 Appendix 2 3 RIRCV instr ctiOn 2 nu oder ed App 13 Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction netten ennt tnter sts ennt nnns App 18 Appendix 2 5 RIEFUIBSITUGOLU s 32 ois inc eiecit Per POR TURQUIE I RES App 23 Appendix 2 6 RIT O instruct n wis eee rer teret rre reete rte pectet n eda App 26 Appendix 2 7 RLPASET instruction 29 Appendix Differences Between the New and Previous App 40 Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to 61 11 App 41 Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QUJ61BT11N sss App 41 Appendix 6 CPU dependent Function Availability essent App 42 Appendix 7 Parameter Setting Checklist esses App 43 Appendix 7 1
105. 1E3 1E2 1E1 1EO 1FF 1FE 1FD 1 1 1FA 1F9 1F8 1F7 1F6 1F5 1F4 1F3 1 2 1F1 1FO 8 PROGRAMMING 6 MELSEC Q Link special registers SW The link special registers store the data link status using word data Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH correspond to link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF For more details on the link special registers SW0000 to SWO1FF see Section 8 4 2 Random access buffer The random access buffer stores any data to be sent to other stations The reading and writing of data are performed using transient transmission Communication buffer The communication buffers stores the send and receive data when performing transient transmission communication using the communication buffers between the local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations The communication buffer sizes for the local station standby master station and intelligent device station are set with network parameters For more details on the communication buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Example of communication using the communication buffers Master station Local station first module CPU CPU Buffer memory 1 RIRD a Device memory Receive buffer for the first module 1 Accesses the buffer memory of the local stat
106. 2 to conversion enable the first condition Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 45 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 46 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execu
107. 5 1535 write may 3 2 5 be disabled 1536 to PANS specia register Stores the data link status peice SW on the 8 3 2 6 2047 device 2048 to Use prohibited 2559 2560 The specified data is stored and used by Read write Section to Random access buffer 4095 transient transmission enabled 8 3 2 7 Stores the send and receive data and control 4096 data when performing transient transmission ER A S Read write Section to Communication buffers communication using the communication 8191 enabled 8 3 2 8 n buffers with the local station standby master station and intelligent device station Stores the automatic update data when 8192 io Automatic update performing transient transmission with the Read write Section 12287 buffer AJ65BT R2 communication using the enabled 8 3 2 9 automatic update buffer 12288 Use prohibited 16383 Available Not available 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 3 3 Availabil Address Readiwite F val Ail Reference em esc m aster Local Hexadecimal Decimal possibility Section station station For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local 40001 16384 Ver 2 compatible intelligent device standby b remote input RX 3 master stations neag ia 41FFu ne For the local station Stores the input status from the master station Fo
108. Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting y i CAsynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting set 11 34 11 34 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Intelligent buffer select word Station Number of Remote station Reserve invalid N Station type cyclic settin occupied oints tati lect o y g stations p station selec Seni Receive Automatic Occupies 4 stations 1 Ver 1Intelligent device station single 128 points No setting 128 Occupies 2 stations 5 Ver 2Intelligent device station double 96 points No setting 128 b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset im Project Edit Find Replace ct Boon parameters Setting the CC Link list sallali ee No of boards in module 1 Boards Unset project Blank no setting Program 1 2 Start 1 0 No 0000 Device comment Parameter B x est s Operational settin Operational settings Type Master station 19 paramete Network 19 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Mode Remote net Additional mode
109. Blank no setting 89 88 Program Device comment 1 E af Parameter Stattl 0 No 0000 E PLC paremete Operational setting Operational settings 2 Network para Master station 127 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Device memory Mode Remote netlVet 2 mode E Device int All connect count 5 Remote inoutfAX X1000 Remote outputfRY Y1000 Remote reaister AW wo Remote registerfRWw w000 Ver 2 Remote inpu EX 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote recisterfAWi Ver 2 Remote reaister R Ww Special elay SB SB0 Special registerfSW 0 Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial setti Initial settings Interrupt setting Interrupt settings L1 180 Indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setifitisneeded Noseting Abeady set Project 4 4 Ready 02 Host station Ovewrte NUM 2 Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Set the remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh d
110. Continued from the previous page Problem occurs in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 7 Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic cop nication Standby master station returns to normal mode and system operation Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Standby master station r Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby XK N 7 Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used The following shows an overview of link data transmission when the standby master function is used a When the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Standby master station standby Station number 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote i i input RX output RY Remote station input RX output RY Station number 2 i Number of o
111. Creating program uius diurni iere predetto dp Edad RR RIRs dada 10 52 10 3 5 Performing the data link a nnn e 10 56 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 10 56 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 10 57 11 1 Secured 32 bit Dat ond pacis bee s nete erint 11 1 11 2 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used rennen rennen nns 11 2 11 2 1 Configuring a system sssssssssssssssssssssseeeenne nennen 11 2 1 Setting the master and local stations sssssssssssssssseeeeneetnet nennen 11 3 11 2 2 Setting the master station parameters sse 11 4 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station sssssssssseeeeenns 11 4 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 11 6 11 2 3 Setting the local station parameters sse nennen 11 7 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station 11 7 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the local 11 9 11 2 4 Creating a program ach pP Pp Ra pid ep Rp 11 10 I Master Station DrOgTami acc iocicoci itii cioe coco ATRETAN TANAAN ETENA EOE PANA i a enn Eras 11 12
112. Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified No Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select blau Sio Stop continue Asynchron nchron Scan mode setting syncnronous synchronous CAsynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Set 0 Standby master station Number of occupied stations Station Intelligent buffer select word No Remote Reserve invalid station points station select Expanded cyclic setting Station type Send Receive Automatic Occupies 1 Ver 1Remote device station 3 stations single 96 points No setting Occupies 1 station 4 Ver 2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list E ct Edit e View Online Di Tools Window Help 18 x Led tinh e Brioude ed S 15 alale gla ele zisleal seu nl S Fm I ELE Ek Hale B B Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 09 8 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 2 3 5 18 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 si PLC paramete
113. END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIWT instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing processing END processing END processing Sequence program 6 ON the RIWT instruction Ne RIWT instruction OFF 1 Ge 8 10S J Completion device re oar ake eames x T VES Normal completion 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIWT instruction is 8 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 Status display device OFF at completion 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO
114. Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m Remote device station response time ms 20 3 2x 3 1 5 39 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Master station RY remote device station RY This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote device station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the m
115. L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 3 Local station network parameter se
116. Master station program Local station status confirmation XO XOF 580 0 NC NO M100 SW80 0 1 150 NO M100 Control program X1000 0 4 X20 34 H o_ a 100 36 MCR NO i m 2 Local station program Confirmation of data link status X0 XOF 0 0 it moo NO M100 Control program X1000 18 J 21 11 12 MELSEC Q Station number 1 is performing the data link Station number 1 is faulty Control program using data received from a local station Program to generate transmission data to a local station Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from the master station Program to generate send data to the master station 11 12 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Securing cyclic data on a per station basis By configuring an interlock with remote I O RX RY cyclic data can be secured on a per station 4 word basis 1 Data of more than one station are not secured MELSEC Q Configure an interlock with remote I O RX RY as shown in the following example Sending station master station 1 HO Y1000 1000 2 BKOY 00 w100 3 SET X1000 7 Y1000 Y1000 Receiving station local station 1 4 NO X1000 5 I 34 BMOV D100 6 SET RST 1 The send receive command MO turns ON 2 Data of DO to D3 are s
117. Program ET Device comment i 2 3 Ea Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 W PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 27 Network Master station E IB Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start X lt T Device memory lode Remote 1 0 net mode 18 Device init All connect count 5 Remote inputf Px Remote outputfRY Remote register wir Remote register R Ww Ver 2 Remote inputfRX Ver 2 Remote outputfRY Ver 2 Remote register wi 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register Sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop zi 2i Scan mode setting Asynchronous al lt Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial settinc Interrupt setting Interrupt settings Indispensable settings No setting Already set Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready 002 Host station viwite NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000
118. RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Remote l O station Local station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Address Remote output RY Address YOF to YOO to Y10 For station 160 RY F to RY 0 number 1 1611 RY 1F to RY 10 0 For station E1 number 1 E24 For station E3 number 2 For station 162 number 2 163 gt E44 For station 5 number 3 For station J 1644 number 3 165 gt E64 For station 7 number 4 For station J 1664 number4 167 gt E8 For station E9u number 5 For station J 1681 number 5 1694 N 15C4 For station 15Du number 63 For station J 10 number 63 1DD 15E4 For station 15F number 64 For station jJ 10 number 64 M 8 PROGRAMMING Station Buffer memory number address 1 160 to 161H 162 to 163H 164 to 165 166 to 167 168 to 169 16 16 7 16 to 160 16 to 16FH 170 to 171H 172 to 173H 174 to 175 176 to 177 178 179 10 11 12 13 Station Buffer memory address EOH to E1H E2u to 4 to 5 to E7H E8x to 9 to EBH to EDH to EFH FOH to F1H 2 to 4 to 5 F6H to F7H F8H to F9H number 6 8 EM MELSEC Q The following tables show the station numbers and
119. Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 10 27 10 27 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX m perational xecutional condition Details of execution E condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data 2 4 2120 Wy Woy X x z 4 Similarly make the procedure registrati
120. Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified I Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop m Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS n Set 0 for the delay time MELSEC Q Set the station data using Station information settings Default value Ver 1 Remote I O station single Occupies 1 station 32 points or no setting for reserved stations error invalid Setting range Station type No setting Ver 1 Remote l O station Ver 1 Remote device station Ver 1 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Ver 2 Remote device station Ver 2 Intelligent device station Local and standby master stations included Expanded cyclic setting When station type is ver 1 compatible station single cannot be changed When station type is ver 2 compatible station single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 station
121. Stat 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting ings 4 Operational s Local station E Master station data link type Z E Remote net Ver 2 mode E ele 1000 Y10001 wo W100 SB 5 0 Indispensable setngs setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Project Ready 0 Host station I wwe INUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value
122. Stations 6 3 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series Iz Project Ein 8ltaltal eil Ve wu x S 28 21 ala 2 zisiel al slal olele lalala alela Lo Program z 1 Ofte al pre expen ole a x E E Unset projec No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting EE Program Device comment 1 8 14 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 i PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings ype Master station Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode i9 Network 027 Remote pass 18 Device memory 18 Device init 44 4 4 All connect count Remote input EX Remote outpulfRY Remote registerFIw Remote registeifelw w Ver 2 Remote inputfEiX Ver 2 Remote outputf Y Ver 2 Remote reaister AW Ver 2 Remote reqisterfR Ww Special relay SB Special registe S W Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop x x Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial setti lri
123. Stores the details of the LED display status 0 OFF 1 ON 615614613612 611610 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO LI ee eree c LINE ERROR Cable is disconnected or the transmission path is affected by noise gt TIME ERROR Responses cannot be received from any station due to the cable being SW0058 Detailed LED display disconnected or the transmission path being affected by noise 6581 status PRM ERROR Invalid parameter value M S ERROR Duplicate master station on the same line SW ERROR Error in switch settings LOCAL Operating as a local station S MST Operating as the standby master station i Operating as the master station gt ERR Error occurrence RUN The module is operating normally Stores the contents of the transmission rate setting 0 Cancel 1 Set b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bd e e SW0059 Transmission rate 6594 setting 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 3 8 Availability oo Available x Not available Number Description Master station Local station Forced master switching instruction 650 9 result result S0060 Mode setting status 6604 SW0061 Host station number 6614 510062 Module operating 662 status SWO0064 No of retries 664 information 51 0065 No of automatic 6654 return stations ela
124. THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference For reference an example setting performed with the sequence below Checking of AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV status Xo XOF Xi 5080 0 o Hr wc NO M100 1 5080 0 1 90 x NO__M100 Initial settings X1018 25 7 7 Wo 7 Yi009 Changing ofinitialsetings EET Initial setting change asit wovP w100 OVP H30 W101 MOVP H200 W103 F MOVP K16 W105 SET Yi009 Processing at initial settings X1018 A 4 6 RST yoi J X1019 y 82 3 RST yioig Read of digital output values X101B X1000 84 Mov WO D500 1 X1001 Mv D501 1 Processing at error occurrence 101 107 MOVP 8 0508 Error reset J _ SET Y101A Y101A X101A RST Y101A MCR NO 1 i ti 1 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings changed 10 12 MELSEC Q program is shown AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable
125. W008 J RWr8 Error code WO009 RWr9 Reserved W00A RWrA Reserved WOOB RWrB Reserved 10 14 10 14 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Checking of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV status X0 XOF Xi 9080 0 o Hr M M wc NO M100 9080 0 90 NO M100 Initialization procedure registration 1018 SBOD SBOD Changing of initial setings 4107 0S 710 ee ptem ert Initial setting change MOVP 100 MOVP H30 101 wove H200 W103 MOVP W105 SET Y1019 x1019 64L 3 1 RST Y1019 Readofdigitaloutputvalues EE Xi01B 1000 66 Mov Wo D500 X1001 MOV Wi D501 Processing at error occurrence Xi01A 890 4 w8 D508 Error reset SET YIOIA YiO1A XIO1A 2 105 Mt RST Y101A 108 MCR NO 109 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 15 1 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal Turns on initialization procedure registration directive Turns off initialization Procedure registration A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on
126. Word data from a local station to the master and other local stations 12 Word data set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the local station However the data is stored only in the area corresponding to its own station number 13 The data in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored automatically for each link scan in the remote register RWr of the master station and the remote register RWw of other local stations 14 The word data stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters 15 The word data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and local stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in a local station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in a local station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the local station 3 The local station returns a writing
127. Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station or Appendix a PLC CPU device of a specified station 2 2 Appendix Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified station 24 M Appendix RIWT Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified station 22 Automatically performs a handshake with the specified RIRCV station and reads data from that station s buffer memory Appendix Available for modules that have handshake signals e g 2 3 AJ65BT R2 Automatically performs a handshake with the specified Intelligent device RISEND station and writes data to that station s buffer memory Appendix station Available for modules that have handshake signals e g 2 4 AJ65BT R2 Reads data from the automatic update buffer of a RIER specified station Appendix Available for modules that have the automatic update 2 5 buffer e g AJ65BT R2 Writes data to the automatic update buffer of a specified RITO station Appendix Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING TIME This chapter explains the data link processing time such as the link scan time and transmission delay time 5 1 Link Scan Time This section explains the CC Link scan time The following describes the method for calculating the normal value and maximum value for the remote net mode or remote I O net mode Link scan time LS 1 For remote net
128. X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM Xn X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Master station RY gt local station RX This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON OFF until the local station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 X 1 X3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan
129. Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 Y107D to Y1070 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Ver 2 compatible buffer memory Local station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 RXOOF to RX000 X107 to x1070 o Y1000 X101F to X1010 RXotFtoeRX010 E fi o Y1010 X102F to X1020 RX02F to RXo20 o Y1020 X103F to X1030 to RX030 o Y1030 X104F to X1040 RXO4F to RX040 o Y1040 X105F to X1050 RXO5F to RX050 o Y1050 X106F to X1060 RXO6F to RX060 o Y1060 X107D to X1070 RXO7F to RX070 to Y1070 X108F to X1080 to RX080 o Y1080 X109F to X1090 RXO9F to RX090 o Y1090 X10AF to X10A0 RXOAF to o Y10A0 X10BF to X10B0 RXOBF to RXOBO Y10B0 X10CF to X10C0 RXOCF to RX0CO o Y10C0 RXODF to RXODO RYODO 10DD to Y10D RX000 RX01F to RX010 X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 RX02F to RX020 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 x107D to X1070 X108F to X1080 X109F to X1090 X10AF to X10A0 X10BF to X10B0 X10CF to X10C0 to 11 27 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS
130. a E E Program a 1 Bins PERRE 21214 nel 212 21 tle ud B ET Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 9 8 Program HF Device comment i 2 3 B I Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational Operational settings 1 Network parat Type Master station EZ ha x 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x x Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode E X X E Device init All connect count 1 Remote Remote output RY Remote register R wr Remote register Fi ww Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote outputfRY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop z y Scan mode settinc Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information Station information Remote device station initial Initial settinc ___Interrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 No setting Already set Setif itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Already set PLC parameter Q02 H Host station Owwte NUM 10 5 10 5 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q
131. and Previous Models The following lists the differences between the QJ61BT11N and older models QU tBTHN QJ61BT11 A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 Startup using the Startup using the parameters of the parameters of the Startup using Yn6 Yn8 Startup using Yn6 Yn8 Startup procedure master station CPU master station CPU and dedicated and master station CPU Yn6 and Yn8 cannot Yn6 and Yn8 cannot instructions parameters Remote device station initialization procedure registration function Module reset function using the sequence stations via the CC Link Parameter settings using FROM TO Not supported Not supported Supported Supported instruction Parameter settings using dedicated Supported Supported Supported Not supported instruction Parameter settings Supported Supported Not supported Supported using GX Developer Standby master The master station that The master station that The master station that The master station that function is down can recover is down can recover is down cannot recover is down cannot recover Event issuance for the Supported Supported Not supported Not supported interrupt program Parameter verification EET E EPRoM o CPU parameters No CPU parameters Expanded cyclic setting Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP App 40 App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 Precautions when Changing from AJ61QBT11 to QJ61BT11N 1 The fol
132. applicable Master Offline station Local station Indicates the execution result of refresh instruction at standby master switching 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 SW0073 Standby master station Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 number 1 to 64 station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 On off timings of link special relays SB relating to the standby master function The following shows the on off timings of the link special relays SB relating to the standby master function 5 70 Master station information SB7B Host master standby master operation status SB5A Master switching request acknowledgment SB5B Master switching request complete SBO01 User operation Refresh instruction at standby master switching SB42 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching SB43 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching ON OFF ON OFF When SBBB is turned on the program switches RX to RY and RWr to RWw In addition the program turns SBO1 on 4 FUNCTIONS Master station MELSEC Q 6 Program example when the standby master function master station duplex function is used A program example is crea
133. automatic update buffer 0 word no setting or 40 64 word to 1000 4096 word Note that the total size of the communication buffer is within 1000 4096 word Automatic update buffer 0 word no setting or 80 128 word to 1000 4096 word Note that the total size of the automatic update buffers is within 1000 4096 word Stores the station numbers of the remote I O stations set as 8 8 point remote points in the remote I O station points setting 1 2 station setting Default value 0 no setting Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on DOs to 208 to 211 1 Used in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode x2 When the setting is 8 points 8 points reserved the station numbers are stored into both the 8 point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting 8 9 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 NE Information Area List 3 3 D4 to D7 212 to 215 EN the station numbers of the remote I O stations set as 16 16 point remote points the remote I O station points setting 1 2 station setting Default value 0 no setting Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on Stores the station numbers of the reserved stations set to 0 points 1 Default value 0 no setting 0 points reserve D8 to DB 216 to 219 ih station setting Storage area Bit corresponding to th
134. creating a sequence program see Section 4 4 1 12 Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues an event when the conditions set by the GX Developer are established in order to make the PLC CPU execute the interrupt program see Section 4 4 2 13 Automatic CC Link startup By installing the QJ61BT11N the CC Link is started up and all data are refreshed by simply turning on the power without creating a sequence program However when the number of connected modules is less than 64 it is necessary to set the network parameters in order to optimize the link scan time see Section 4 4 3 14 Selecting a mode according to the system The CC Link system has four types of modes according to various systems See sections 4 4 4 4 4 5 and 4 4 14 The overview of the modes is described in the following table Connectable Remote net ver 1 mode Remote net ver 2 mode Remote net additional mode Remote O station Remote device station Intelligent device station Local station Standby master station Remote I O net mode Remote station Mode in which complete compatibility with the conventional module QJ61BT11 is achieved Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product points and configuring a new system Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible slave station to the existing s
135. d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Data link disorder station setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting H Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name i Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station 9 Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote
136. disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data single x r Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel h Set the expanded cyclic setting of the local station using Expanded cyclic setting Default value single Setting range single double quadruple octuple Example Set to double Parameter name Number of exclusive stations p Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel i Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 2 mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings 7MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lim Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window lialta el c Bleue 38 opo es ss p ae s pepe s ess oela S Helela l elel le csl z spes s ul eli AL 1 i t wll B8 Program zl x No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 1 2 3
137. during data link and or station type reset the master station after changing Check the error code in the Error dialog box of GX z Developer Check the error code list and take corrective action GX Developer cannot communicate with the other Does the PLC CPU of the station set in Transfer station PLC CPU setup have an error Check the error code of the PLC CPU Is the station set in Transfer setup executing data Check whether the L RUN LED of the link corresponding station is on or not 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Received During Data Link Do the parameter settings and the installed system configuration match properly Revise the parameter settings or installed system configuration Are the master Station link special registers 51 0080 to SW0083 other station data link status turned on Master station malfunction Are the master Station link special registers SW0098 to SWO09B station number overlap status turned on Check on master station side Check the module for which SW0098 to SWO009B are on Check the module for which SW0080 to SW0083 are on Check on slave station side station number Switches set properly Are there any station numbers that are incompletely matched 2 Is the pow
138. each system Maximum 26 A S T y A NO Master station Master station Master station Local station Local station Local station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 Terminal resistor required CC Link dedicated cable 26 42 64 P d ae C A B C ic E Intelligent device station Remote device station Remote I O station 00 000 00 000 annu Og RS 232C Analog digital Remote I O module Interface module converter module AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BT R2 AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BTC 32D CC Link dedicated cable Terminal resistor required Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the following conditions must all be satisfied a2 a4 a8 a The total number of ver 1 compatible slave D b b2 b4 b8 X 2 stations that occupy 1 station and ver 2 Condition 1 compatible slave stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Single d d2 04 d8 X 4 lt 64 The total number of ver 1 compatible slave X 32 a2 X 32 a4 X 64 a8 X 128 stations that occupy 2 stations and ver 2 E b X 64
139. error 1 Transient transmission error occurrence 6944 5 0090 6904 SW0095 lent b15 614 b13 b12 ransien 695 695 transmission eee SW0096 status 2 SWO0095 696 SW0096 SW0097 SW0097 6974 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 7 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Stores the overlap status when the first station number of each module is not overlapped SW0098 0 Normal 6981 5 0099 6991 b15 b14 612 to b3 b2 Station number swooga overlap status 7 SOM 694 SWo0099 W009A SW009B tus 698 SW009B 1 Overlap station number first station number only Stores the consistency status between the loaded station and the parameter settings A matching error occurs in any of the following cases 1 Station type mismatch Number of occupied stations mismatch Expanded cyclic setting mismatch CC Link compatible version mismatch A matching error will not occur when installation lt parameter For example a matching error will not occur when a remote device station is installed and the parameter setting is an intelligent device st
140. factors such as the on off status of specified RX RY and SB devices and the match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data in order to allow the PLC CPU to execute the interrupt program Because the conditions for issuing the events are set using the GX Developer the number of program steps is reduced thus shortening the scan time Events can be issued for all stations A maximum of 16 event issuance conditions can be set 1 Event issuance conditions Events are issued under the following conditions On off status of specified RX RY and SB devices Match mismatch status of specified RWr and SW device data When the link scan is completed 2 Event issuance condition setting method a First set the Interrupt setting in the network parameters 1 Input format Set the data input format for Word device Setting range DEC HEX Default DEX 2 Device code Set the device to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range RX SB RY RWr SW Scan completed 3 Device No Set the device number to be used for the event issuance conditions Setting range When RX or RY is selected 0 to 1FFF H When SB or SW is selected 0 to 01FF H When RWr is selected 0 to OOFF H 4 Detection method Set the detection method for the event issuance conditions Setting range Edge detect Issues event only at rise and fall Level detect Issues each link scan event when the event issuance conditions are established
141. for station No 33 or higher use FROM TO instructions to read write data 2 Execution conditions a When the parameters are not set the automatic CC Link startup function is applicable only to one QJ61BT11N Even when more than one QJ61BT11N is mounted on the base unit the automatic CC Link startup function is applicable only to the first one It is applied to the QJ61BT11N that has the smallest start I O number as seen from the PLC CPU side b When performing an automatic CC Link startup without setting the parameters up to three MELSECNET H modules can be used on the master station CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 4 Communicating with intelligent device stations Remote net mode The remote net mode allows communication with all stations remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master stations Furthermore it allows not only cyclic transfer but also transient transmission which transfers data at an arbitrary timing to intelligent and local stations Setting method Set the remote net mode in Mode of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 4 5 Speeding up the response from remote I O stations Remote I O net mode The remote I O net mode can be used for a system consisting of only the master station and remote I O stations The remote I O net mode allows cyclic transmission at high sp
142. initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 15 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status o O Otf Module is normal QJeIBTTIN The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN lt Controlling data link MST e O SMST SD RD _ Receiving data Sending data ERR O O LERR b LED display of the remote device station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 24 V DC is being supplied Module is normal The data link is being performed normally O D ez D 2 m 10 16 10 16 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN T
143. input data r Case of CPU STOP setting Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS f MELSEC Q Set the station type using Type Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote I O net mode Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 6 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lg Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window 10 c Bleue e 38 po ae s repe s e oela S sspe o a ala lel sees ada 1 i Program
144. instruction at standby master Refresh instruction aries switching is complete or not complete status at standby master switchin Eber 9 1 Switching complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBO00C signal Forced master switching can be executed or not executable status OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgement status of the standby master station when it has received a master switching request from the line OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switch from the standby master Master switching request station to the master station is complete complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether a forced master switching request has been Forced master switching acknowledged or not request acknowledgement 0 Not acknowledged 1 Instruction acknowledged Master switching request acknowledgement 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Table 4 5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function 2 2 580050 5 5 b13 580062 5 6 b2 SB0070 7 b0 SB0071 7 b1 SB0079 7 b9 SB007B 7 b11 Forced master switching request complete Host standby master station setting information Master station information Standby master station information Master station return specification information Host master standby master operation status b Ap
145. instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range App 6 APPENDIX 5 Program example MELSEC Q When is turned ON this program stores 10 word data to DO and succeeding addresses from buffer memory address 100d of the intelligent device station number 1 which is connected to the master module installed at I O numbers from X Y40 to X Y5F When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO M12 is the RIRD instruction executing flag 0 Mi2 SW80 0 MOVP KI H4 MOVP H100 MOVP K10 GP RIRD U4 D100 DO D101 D102 D103 D104 MO App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 RIWT instruction The RIWT instruction writes the data for the specified points to the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Ed gre user File prem function register module Instruction Execution i symbol condition Command L snmwr n 63 I Command RIWT f I 4 c serm Set data mone range Data da ues Start I O number of the module OtFEH to FEH Binary 16 bits 16 bits Wi
146. intelligent device station or standby master station Execute line test 2 according to the following procedure 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module At normal completion of test The L RUN LED lights up At abnormal completion of test The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result MELSEC Q PR RAMMIN MAUS MELSEC Q 8 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains common items relating to programming 8 1 Precautions on Programming The following explains precautions on the creation of a program Create a program that allows the detection of data link status and interlocking with the remote I O stations remote device stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station In addition create an error handling program Program example Set the Special Relay SB Refresh Device to SBO and the Special Register SW Refresh Device to SWO of the master station with GX Developer When setting the refresh devices of the special relay SB and the special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not duplicate with device numbers on the MELSECNET H network Module error Module ready Host data link status SW80 to SW83 Other station data link status X nO XnF Xni H H
147. make an access 4 FUNCTION a MELSEC Q 4 4 13 Reducing the reserved points of the remote I O stations Remote I O station points setting The points of each remote I O station can be set to 8 16 or 32 points This saves the refresh device points of the PLC CPU The remote I O station points setting can be used in the remote net ver 2 mode only For parameter setting use GX Developer of version 8 03D or later This function cannot be executed if the dedicated instruction is used for parameter setting This function can be executed when read write from to the CPU devices is performed according to the I O points of each station at cyclic data refresh using the FROM TO instruction Remote I O station Remote station Remote station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 PLC CPU Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station 8 point output module Device area when remote I O points setting is made L Device area when remote I O points setting is not made Set points to even numbered 8 point setting remote I O stations consecutively If points are set to odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations select 8 points 8 points reserved in the remote station points setting of the last of the consecutive remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Rem
148. master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD DB ire CL DG 9 7 10 39 10 39 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Setting of AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV AJeSVBTCU 68ADV CON Station number setting switch Transmission speed setting switch Station number 1 156kbps 2 Mode select switch 0 Nomal mode MITSUBISHI 10 40 10 40 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN
149. mode QnACPU AnUCPU and reads the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 32 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffers in master station and local station Remoteregster m E Link specialrelay Link special register Device memory in the PLC CPU or eee eee um Gera Intemalrelay M O Decima 09 So Lt O J Decima _ 8 Ley 0 B O Hexadecimal 29 Timer contact T O P 09 t o J Dooma o Timer Tt Dema 0 Retentive timer conta O Retentive imer s O Retentive timer present value st Decimal Counter contact c O m Rmi a Counter presentvaue im Dataregister D O Dema omn Linkregister Hexadecimal 24 Fleegse 34 n X O 8 Special iink reay se O Hexadecimal _ 69 Special ink register sw Hexadecimal em Specialrelay sd O 4 Specialregister s o Dema 4 Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit device specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 4 App 4 APPENDIX
150. mode LS BT 27 NI X 4 8 NW X 9 6 N X 30 ni X 4 8 nw X 9 6 ST EX F TR us BT Constant transmission rate er s a2 16 os NI The final station number in a b and c It includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 a Total number of occupied stations for remote I O stations b Total number of occupied stations for remote device stations c Total number of occupied stations for local stations standby master station and intelligent device stations NW The final station number in b and c Includes the number of dedicated stations but excludes the reserved stations and must be a multiple of 8 nw 2 s 4o e se e Number of connected stations excluding reserved stations x a b c excluding reserved stations nw b c excluding reserved stations ST Constant A Last station number of remote I O stations B Last station number of remote device stations including the number of occupied stations C Last station number of local standby master and intelligent device stations including the number of occupied stations The largest value found in 1 to 3 below However 2 is disregarded when B 0 and 3 is disregarded when C 0 1 800 A X 15 2 900 B X 50 3 For C lt 26 1200 C X 100 For C gt 26 3700 C 26 X 25 DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q EX Consta
151. not be treated as a faulty station Specify unoccupied station numbers as reserved stations An unoccupied station number will be treated as a data link faulty station can be verified with link special registers SW0080 to SW0083 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings Transmission rate and mode settings are specified with the transmission rate mode setting switch For details on the transmission rate mode setting switch see Section 7 3 The transmission rate that can be set varies depending on the total distance For more details see Sections 3 1 1 and 3 1 2 POINT Use the same transmission rate for the master station remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station If the setting for even one of the stations is different data link cannot be established properly 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test After connecting all of the modules with CC Link dedicated cables verify that they are correctly connected and that data linking can be performed with remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station Line test 1 checks the status of communication with all modules that have been connected Line test 2 checks the status of communication with specific modules Neither line test 1 nor line test 2 requires par
152. number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 2 Station number 5h Remote register RWr Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote output RY Station number 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 m Area of refresh compulsory clear setting target O Area refreshed independently of setting The remote output RY is refreshed or compulsorily cleared according to the setting when the PLC CPUs for the master and local stations come to STOP The remote input RX remote register RWw and remote register RWr are refreshed regardless of the setting when the PLC CPUs for the master and local stations come to STOP 4 29 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Specifying compulsory clear disables compulsory output to slave stations at CP
153. number and the number of occupied stations of the module Reduce the number of master stations on the same line to one Alternatively check the line status There is most likely a hardware error in either the QJ61BT11N the CPU module the base unit or other modules Contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Wait for a while before ransmitting again transient overload status CPU monitoring timer time out The CPU monitoring timer timed out phere arget station Handle by referring to the roubleshooting section of the Ethernet Interface Module User s manual Handle by referring to the roubleshooting section of the MELSECNETHH MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 13 4 CC Link Diagnostics Using the GX Developer 13 16 Check the status of each module after all the modules have been connected using CC Link dedicated cables and verify that data link can be performed normally It is also possible when the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the remote I O station of MELSECNET H 1 Host monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of the host the station to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 2 3 Select CC Link for Module Setting Specify the target module of Host monitoring for Module No or I O Address Click the Sta
154. number of cyclic points When increasing the number of cyclic points select one from the following two modes Remote net ver 2 mode Mode suitable for configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Mode suitable for adding a ver 2 compatible slave station to the existing ver 1 system In the remote net ver 1 mode the number of cyclic points cannot be increased When using GX Developer for setting use Version 8 03D or later The number of cyclic points per module can be increased as indicated in the following table Table 4 8 Expanded cyclic setting double quadruple octuple Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Remote register RWw RWr 8 points Remote I O RX RY 96 points 12 points Remote I O RX RY 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points Remote register RWw RWr 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Remote net ver 2 mode This mode is designed to configure a new system The number of cyclic points can be increased as indicated below Per station RX RY can be increased to up to 128 points and RWw RWr to up to 32 points Per CC Link network RX RY can be increased to up to 8192 points and RWw RWr to up to 2048 points Remote device station Local station Remote device station Remote station Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 mode Ver 2 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number
155. of Ver 1 00 and Ver 1 10 Version 1 10 modules have a uniform station to station cable length of 20 cm or more by improving the restrictions on the conventional station to station cable length In contrast the conventional modules are defined as Version 1 00 See Section 3 1 2 for the maximum overall cable distance of Version 1 10 In order to make the station to station cable length uniformly 20 cm or more the following conditions are required 1 All the modules that configure the CC Link system must be compatible with Ver 1 10 2 All the data link cables must be CC Link dedicated cables conforming to Version 1 10 The specifications for Version 1 00 should be used for the maximum cable overall distance and station to station cable length if a system contains modules and cables of both Version 1 00 and Version 1 10 See Section 3 1 1 for the maximum overall cable distance and station to station cable length of Version 1 00 2 Definition of Ver 2 As Ver 2 is characterized as increase of cyclic transmission data size Ver 2 compatible module is defined to support this function 3 Checking version The modules including CC Link logo on the rated plate are compatible with Ver 1 10 The modules including V2 logo on the rated plate are compatible with Ver 2 CC Link EAA MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL SERIAL 050320000000000 B Conformed standard 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This section describes
156. of the remote Parameter not set error of the _ station initialize procedure registration device station initialize procedure B125 remote device station initialize function was turned on without setting the registration function after setting the procedure registration function remote device station initialize procedure remote device station initialize registration procedure registration during sending ransmission specified or if the corresponding station is stopped A transient request was issued to other 3 B205 Transient target station error han the intelligent device station Check the target station B301 Processing request error during Line test request was issued while the Perform a line test while the link is link stop link was stopped being established The specified station number exceeded he highest communication station Specify a station number that is no B302 Specified station number number during temporary error invalid greater than the highest Check the communication status of Corespondina station error A data link error occurred at the other stations whether or not a B201 9 corresponding station during transient temporary error invalid station is setting error e 9 request temporary error invalid cancel communication station number request B303 Specified station number not Ee que Set a specified station number set error error invalid cancel request SW0003 SW0
157. or later If any incompatible PLC CPU is used the operation cannot be guaranteed 4 Incompatible with the remote net additional mode When the module is used the operation cannot be guaranteed 5 For use in a redundant system select the QJ61BT11N with first 5 digits of serial No 06052 or later When any incompatible QJ61BT11N is used the operation cannot be guaranteed x6 For use in the remote net additional mode use a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of serial No 07032 or later If any incompatible PLC CPU is used the operation cannot be guaranteed 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q b When performing the parameter setting with the dedicated instructions Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted QO00JCPU QOOCPU Maximum 2 Q01CPU QO2CPU Q02HCPU It can be mounted only QO6HCPU Maximum 64 with the Q mode Q12HCPU 45 Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Maximum 64 Q25PHCPU x1 gt Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Mountable base unit QJ61BT11N can be mounted on any of the base unit s I O slots 7 However depending on combinations with other mounted modules and the number of mountings there may be cases where the power capacity is insufficient Be sure to consider the power capacity when mounting the module 7 Must be inside the point number range of 1 CPU unit and network module for remote I O station Applicable software package The software package availab
158. overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series Mass Unset EE Isto barometers Setting the CC Link list ua s s el l um TEES Program zl me al F all els xl T TF CET No of boards in module hz Boards Blank no setting B Been comment 1 22 15 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 5 0 lt settings E ro sui eg M Remote net Additional mode z I Device init All connect count Remote input RX 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register E wT WO Remote 100 Ver 2 Remote 1500 Ver 2 Remote output RY 1500 2 Remote reaister R Wr W1000 Ver 2 Remote registerfAww W1500 Special relay SB 5 0 Special register SW 5 0 Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No eT i z i Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial lt __Interupt setting f Interrupt settings d e Indispensable settings No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready Q02H Host station Owwte axi 11 42 11 42 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 11 4 4 Creating a program MELSEC Q This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationshi
159. performed 17 normally L RUN QJ61BT11N Module is normal RUN MST O O SMST sj n E ERR O O LERR Sending data 11 30 11 30 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 1 turns on 2 When X21 of the local station of station No 1 is turned on 40 of the master station turns on 3 When X21 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 5 turns on 4 When X21 of the local station of station No 5 is turned on Y41 of the master station turns on Master station Terminal resistor station number 1 occupies 4 stations N Ver TcompatibIe local station Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Sum P om 11 31 11 31 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used 11 4 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with two connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU6e1BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Ver
160. power off the system in advance when removing the terminating resistor to charge the system If the terminating resistor is removed and mounted while the system is energized normal data transmission will not be guaranteed 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 2 2 Installation environment For further details see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings The following section describes the parts names of the master and local modules and the contents of the LED display and switch settings es QJ61BT11N RUN LRUN MST SMST D RD L ERR 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 1 i LED display Verify the data link status with the LED ON OFF Off When a watchdog timer error occurs On All stations have a communication error Also lights up when the following errors occur Switch type setting is incorrect There are more than one master station on the same line There is an error in the parameter contents The data link monitoring timer was activated The cable is disconnected QJ61BT11N Or the transmission path is affected by noise RUN To check the source of the error see Section 13 4 MSI Or see Section 8 4 2 for details regarding SW0058 detailed ERR LED display status Flashing A communication error station identified or remote station No duplicated Operating as a master station du
161. registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 49 10 49 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference MELSEC Q For reference an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown below Status confirmation of AU65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN XO XOF 5080 0 0 wc No M100 NO 100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting X1018 38 MOVP H3 w100 MOVP H31 W101 MOVP 200 W103 MVP W105 SET Y1018 SET Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting change f Initial setting change i 67 H3 100 H30 mo 200 wi0g K16 W105 SET Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setti
162. relay SB Special register SW _ Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop __ mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt setting Ready Q02H Host station Ovwte NUM 10 6 10 6 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 3 Initial setting of the remote device station 10 7 This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target to 1 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Unit1 Target No of Target No of 1 1 D Begstprocedure 3 Reaistprocedue 2 Regstprcedue 10 Regist procedure 3 Regist pracedwe 11 Regist procedure Regist procedure 12 Regist procedure 5 Beastprcedue 3 Reaist procedure 6 Redist procedure 14 Reaistprocedure 7 Hegstprcedwe 5 Reaist procedure 8 J hegstprcedwe 16 Reaistprocedue Clear Cancel Check End setup b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1
163. remote or remote A station station device station device station Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable terminal resistor of 110Q used Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable distance ____ m 2 2 20cm or longer a BEES EN Ms Ss ftom 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 CC Link Dedicated Cable Use the CC Link dedicated cable for the CC Link system If a cable other than the CC Link dedicated cable is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed If you have any questions regarding the CC Link dedicated cable or if you wish to see its specifications see the CC Link Partner Association homepage http www cc link org For details refer to the CC Link cable wiring manual issued by CC Link Partner Association 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of QJ61BT11N dividing them into four sections Basic Functions Functions for Improving System Reliability Handy Functions and Transient Transmission Functions Some functions are unavailable depending on the mounted CPU Refer to Appendix 6 for details 4 1 Function List 1 Table 4 1 lists the basic functions Table 4 1 List of the basic functions Communication with remote I O aio
164. remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1500 g Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWr refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 h Setthe ver 2 compatible remote register RWw refresh device using Ver 2 remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1500 i Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q j Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO POINT When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not
165. setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 26 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g
166. setting with GX Parameter setting with the The RLPASET instruction Data link continues Developer RLPASET instruction completes with an error Parameter setting with the Parameter setting with GX LINK PARA ERR occurs in Data link stops RLPASET instruction Developer the PLC CPU Note that data link continues to be performed if the designation of operation at CPU down S1 5 of the RLPASET instruction is set to Continue When the PLC CPU is switched from RUN to STOP RY of the master station and outputs to the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations are retained 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 Functions for Improving System Reliability This section explains the functions for improving the reliability of the CC Link system 4 3 1 Disconnecting data link faulty stations and continuing the data link with only normal stations Slave station cut off function This function disconnects remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that have become data link faulty due to power off and continues the data link among normal remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station no setting is required Local Local station station Master Down station Remote Remote station station Terminal Terminal resistor resistor Continues data link excluding faulty stations
167. so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accid
168. station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 2 mode Generic Term Abbreviation Description Link special relay for CC Link Bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SB for convenience Link special register for CC Link 16 bit unit information that indicates the module operating status and data link status of the master station local station Expressed as SW for convenience Remote input for CC Link Information entered in bit units from the remote station to the master station Expressed as RX for convenience Remote output for CC Link Information output in bit units from the master station to the remote station Expressed as RY for convenience Remote register Write area for CC Link Information output in 16 bit units from the master station to the remote device station Expressed as RWw for convenience Remote register Read area for CC Link Information entered in 16 bit units from the remote device station to the master station Expressed as RWr for convenience Generic term for AOJ2HCPU A1SCPU A1SHCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 ASACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for ABUSCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU Generic term for Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1
169. station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 1 QJ61BT11N RUNO CL RUN STATION NO Station number setting switch 0 x10 Master station must be set to 00 0 x1 Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC NC DA 2 SLD DB ire CL DG 9 7 10 19 10 19 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote device station Settings of the remote device station switches are shown below For more detailed information about the contents of the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Setting of AJOBVBTCU 68ADV MELSEG AU65VBTCU 68ADV CON A IL 1 B SEL di POWER S T O p RUN 2L LRUN 3 LERR Station number setting switch SW1 Transmission speed setting switch 4 0 o 5 Station 2 number 1 6 0 o 7 0 156kbps 8 V y _ MODE N X Mode select switch 0 Nomal mode Bi M 2 C E MITSUBISHI CCtink 10 20 10 20 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER S
170. system configuration specified in Section 6 5 CC Link station information Module 1 x Expanded Exclusive station Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 4 Btation Station type cyclic setting count points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Ver TRemote 1 0 station x single Exclusive station 1 32 points v No setting X 2 2 __ Ver 1Remote device station v single Exclusive station 2 64 points No setting 3 4 Ver2lnteliigent device station double Exclusive station 4 224 points v No setting x 64 64 128 4 8 Ver2Remote device station v quadruple Exclusive station 64 points gt Reserve station 5 9 Ver 2intelligent device station octuple Exclusive station 4 896 points v No setting T 64 64 128 v Default End Cancel 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station number 4 20001 First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Send buffer 207 Automatic update buffer 2080 First module station number 4 Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Intelligent device station Receive buffer 20FFu Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Send buffer
171. the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 2 3 1 1 5 42 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LSXm SMyvalue when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms
172. the status of the device will remain as it was prior to the STOP operation when the CPU is stopped See Section 4 4 10 for how to stop the data link If wire breakage occurs in the CC Link dedicated cable the line may become instable resulting in a data link communication error at multiple stations Configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program to operate the system toward the safety side if a data link communication error occurs at multiple stations Failure to do so may result in an accident due to false output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTION N CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the CPU user s manual to use Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert the module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point Improper installation may result in malfunction breakdown or dro
173. the status when the instruction is complete S1 0 Completion status 0 No error normal completion System Other than 0 Error code Specifies whether the individual setting data from S2 to S5 is valid or invalid 0 Invalid 1 Valid 614613 b4 b3 b2 b1 60 PT oleo I to 0 L Slave station setting data S2 Reserved station specification data 51 1 Setting flag S3 Error invalid station specification data S4 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data S5 Mode 00 Remote net Ver 1 mode 01 Remote net Additional mode 10 Remote net Ver 2 mode 11 Not used Number of connected modules 4 i Sets the number of connected slave stations involved in communication S1 3 Number of retries Sets the number of retries to a communication faulty station Number of Sets the number of slave stations that can be returned per one link scan automatic return modules Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC Operation CPU error occurs 81 5 specification when 0 Stop CPU is down 1 Continue Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for Scan mode sequence scan specification 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous S1 7 Delay time setting Set 0 for the delay time 0 1 For the setting data specified invalid default parameter will be applied 2 Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal co
174. time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the data for the CPU device is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 14 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms
175. time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 1 3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 1 1 10 30 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS 2 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple S e a ee ee 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM
176. to 2DBH DCu to 2DFH iw O m m A 25 A o S 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Slave station offset size information In the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode the assignment of RX RY RWw RWr for the station numbers varies according to the expanded cyclic setting and remote I O station points setting a Offset Stores the head buffer memory address of RX RY RWw RWtr assigned to each station When 2 or more stations are occupied values are stored into only the head buffer memory address of the station number When station No 1 occupies 2 stations values are stored into the RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 1 and the RX RY RWw RWr offset and size of station No 2 remains default b Size Stores the size of RX RY RWw RWr assigned to each station in word unit When the size is less than 1 word it is rounded up and 1 is stored When the remote I O station points setting is 8 points 1 is stored Refer to Section 4 4 13 for the remote I O station points setting method For the reserved station OOOOH is stored Table 8 4 Correspondence between Station Numbers and RX RY RWw RWr Offset Size Buffer Memory Addresses Buff ry address uer memo Item Default Hex 3E0H Station No 1 RX offset 00004 Station No 1 RX size 00004 to to to 45 45F 1120 0000s 4611 RICE es a ee ee eee 1377 0000s to to E eoi 5DFH 1503 Station No 6
177. to 5FFH correspond to link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF For details on the link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF see Section 8 4 1 The following table shows the relationship between buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH and link special relays SB0000 to SBO1FF Address b15 014 b12 bii b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 5E0H F E D B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 1 1F 1E 1D 1 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 5 2 2 2 2D 2 2B 2A 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 5 3D 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 5 4 4E 4D 4C 4B 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 5E5x SF 5E 5D 5C 5B 5A 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 5E6n 6F 6E 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 5 7 7F 7E 7D 7 7 7 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 5E8H 8F 8E 8D 8C 8B 8A 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 5 9 9F 9E 9D 9C 9B 9A 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 5 AD 9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 AO 5 BC BB BA B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO 5ECu CF CE CD C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 2 1 co SEDH DF DE DD DC DB DA D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO 5 9 E8 E7 E6 ES E4 E3 E2 1 FF FE FD FB FA FB F7 Fe F5 F4 F3 F2 Fi FO 0 10F 10E 10D 10C 10B 10A 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 10
178. to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 r Parameter ECLinkM E alion 1 Y Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting 9 z Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Data link disorder station setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting H Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name i Data link disorder station setting Hold
179. user File rel function EE ed register module Instruction Execution symbol condition Command RLPASET Command RLPASET _ GPRPASE Un 51 52 93 SO 55 D Master station set data Setting range Data type number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Within the range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stared specified device 52 Start number of the device in which slave station setting data is Within the range of the stored specified device Start number of the device in which reserved station Within the range of the Device name specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which error invalid station Within the range of the specification data is stored specified device Start number of the device in which send receive and Within the range of the automatic refresh buffer assignment data is stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of m Within the range of the reading P specified device D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data x When the setting data for S2 to S5 are not to be set specify a dummy device App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Control data Set data Setting range Set by Stores
180. when compared to the remote net mode The following provides an overview of the communication between the master station and a remote I O station using the remote I O net mode In the communication with the remote I O station the on off data of the switches and indicator lamps are communicated through remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Network Network parameters parameters Automatic refresh parameters Buffer memory 3 Krma refresh dod 2 5 4 Automatic refresh gt id cn Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote input 2 The input status of a remote I O station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station XOF to X00 X1F to X10 Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 The output status
181. will extend beyond that specified in the sequence program 2 While SBOD remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction is on the refresh of the remote input output and remote registers stops When the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD turns OFF after completion of the initial processing all of RY signals that have turned ON during the registration turn OFF Therefore for signals that should be kept ON e g Conversion enable flag of the AJ65BT 64RD3 4 turn them ON in the sequence program The remote device station initialization procedure execution complete status SBOO5F does not turn ON unless the procedure registration for all stations that are set to the remote device station initialization procedure registration is completed If any error station exists turn OFF the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD depending on the status of the other stations The remote device station initialization procedure registration is not allowed for the standby master station When replacing a remote device station while the standby master station is operating as a master perform initial setting on the sequence program 4 FUNCTION a MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Performing high speed processing Event issuance for the interrupt program This function issues events signals to execute an interrupt program according to
182. 0 89 mov H4 D50 Reserved station specification station number 3 Error invalid station specification data wH H2 60 Error invalid station specification station number 2 Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M300 120 mov D70 First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word moy K100 71 First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word moy KO 72 First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14h for station No 20 App 37 App 37 A PPENDIX MELSEC Q Parameter registration data link startup M300 48 GP RLPASET uo 00 D10 D50 D60 D70 M301 Dedicated instruction RLPASET Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M301 181 RST M300 Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal SET SB3 1 completion of the RLPASET instruction SET M310 1 Instruct to start the control program at normal completion M302 Performs abnormal of the RLPASET instruction completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter Aoin SBGE EAE E 5 2 Instruct to stop data link SB45 _ 219 RST 5 2 1 Turn the data link stop i instruction off RST B3 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45 0 222M SET M303 1 Instruct to change parameters
183. 0 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Ver 2compatible ME X150F to X1500 Dd 1 RXOF to RX00 X151F to X1510 TE RXIFtoRX10 X152F to X1520 o X153F to X1530_ Y150F to Y1500 RYOF to RYOO Y151F to Y1510 m RY1F to RY10 Y152F to Y1520 8 Y153Fto Y1530 i 10 52 10 52 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Remote device station station number 1 Remote device station station number 4 PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1compatible for write W100 RWw0 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw1 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting RWws Average processing specification RWw4 CH 1 average time number of times setting RWWwS5 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting 5 average time number of times setting RWWwS9 CH 6 average time number of times setting RWwA CH 7 average time number of times setting RWwB CH 8 average time number of times setting Ver icompatible for read WO000 W001 RWrO RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 RWr5 CH 1 digi CH 2 digi CH 3 digi CH 4 digi CH 5 digi CH 6 digi 7 digi CH 8 digi Error code
184. 0 8 27 8 4 8 3 30 3 X 4 8 230 365 84 u s 0 37 ms PROCESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 Transmission Delay Time This section explains the transmission delay time the time until data is transmitted 5 2 1 Master station lt gt remote I O station 1 Master station RX remote I O station input This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote I O station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3X1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS x 2 Remote I O station resp
185. 004 to SW0007 An error was detected ina remote Check that he remote station B304 Ling test error staton detected station intelligent device station or intelligent device station or standby standby master station when a line test master station is operational and was performed that the cable is not disconnected A station number other than the head Specify a head station when B306 Specified station number station number was specified during temporary error invalid setting error temporary error invalid request temporary request temporary error invalid error invalid cancel request cancel request is requested All stations were in data link error status when one of the following requests was Request again after the data link B307 All stations data link error made becomes normal e SB0000 data link restart SB0002 data link stop B308 Station number setting error The station number of the slave station is Sel tne sation number or me save installation status outside of the range between 1 and 64 and 64 9 The station number of the connected module was duplicated including B309 Station number overlap error number of occupied stations Check the module station number However this excludes the duplicate head station number 13 10 13 10 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN A MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 2 6 Eror code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectabil
186. 1 station Station number 4 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations Station number 7 M Nu This station does not become a data link faulty station Station number 4 Station number 7 Local Local Master station station station Station number 1 Station number 3 occupies Station number 5 occupies Remote station Remote station 1 station Remote station 4 stations occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations 1 10 17 Scan synchronous function This function synchronizes the link scan to the sequence scan see Section 4 4 8 18 Temporary error invalid station setting function With this function the module specified by the GX Developer will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master or local station while in online The module can be replaced without detecting an error in online see Section 4 4 9 19 Data link stop restart The data link can be stopped and restarted while it is being used see Section 4 4 10 20 Station number overlap checking function This function checks the status of the connected stations to see if the number of occupied stations is overlapping or if there is more than one station with the station number setting of 0 in the system see Section 4
187. 11N with the smallest head I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically e Donot use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in module setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer f Automatic refresh is not performed The devices should be refreshed via the FROM TO instruction or the G device g ltis not possible to set input status from a data link faulty station Inputs from a data link faulty station are cleared h The standby master function is not available i In order to change the parameter setting method turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU The following table shows how the PLC CPU operates when changing the parameter setting method without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Parameter setting method Parameter setting method NT E Error notification method Continuity of data link before change after change Parameter
188. 142 48 47 46 45 SWO0143 SW0143 74 743r Numters 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the CC Link version matching status of the parameters and slave stations 0 Normal 1 Matching error SW0144 Example of matching error 7444 Installation Parameter 51 0145 Ver 2compatible remote Ver icompatible remote 7454 CC Link ver device station device station installation parameter Ver 1compatible remote Ver 2compatible remote SW0146 matching status 7 device station device station 7461 b15 bi4 bi2 to b3 b2 SW0147 SWO0144 16 7471 SWO0145 32 15 14 swo14e 48 47 46 Indicates in which mode the system is operating SW0148 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 748n 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode Indicates in which mode the host is operating 510149 Host parameter mode 0 Remote net ver 1 mode 7494 1 Remote net additional mode 2 Remote net ver 2 mode 7 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q The timing when the data in a link special register SW is updated differs depending on the link register number Table 8 7 lists the update timings of link special registers Table 8 7 Update timing of the link special registers Link special register Data update timing
189. 18 awcru 0 0 8 QO2HCPU Q0GHCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 98 0 06 Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Example When the PLC CPU type is the QO6HCPU the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master station and 2048 points of RX 2048 points of RY 256 points of RWw 256 points of RWr 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file register RX RY SB 16 2048 2048 512 16 KM1 KM2 x RWw RWr SW 0 16 0 00043 x 0 16 0 00043 x 1312 0 72416 0 72 ms 256 256 512 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 2 Remote net additional mode Expression KM1 KM2 x RX RX2 RY RY2 5 Ryw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW E ms 16 KM3x RX RX2 RY RY2 SB RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW RX RX2 RY RY2 RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SB SW aE KM1 1 2 Points of the remote input RX refreshed by the master local station Points of the ver 2 remote input RX refreshed by the master local station Points of the remote output RY refreshed by the master local station Points of the ver 2 remote output RY refreshed by the master local station Points of the remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station Points of the ver 2 remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station Points of the remote register RWr refreshed by the master local stat
190. 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 5 Mbps LA E 110 m 360 9 ft 59 cm 23 23 in 60 cm 23 62 in or more 2 m 6 56 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to Remy ce 50 m 164 1 ft 59 cm 23 23 in 60 cm 23 62 in to 99 cm 38 98 in 3 1 m 3 28 ft or more 100 m 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 7 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate x1 x2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 80 m 262 5 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to PANT 5 Mbps 59 23 23 in 2 m 6 56 ft or more 360 9 60 23 62 in or more 150 m 492 15 ft 70 cm 27 56 in to 50 m 164 1 ft 99 cm 38 98 1 m 3 28 ft or more The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired the maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 2 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 10 The relation of the transmission speed and maximum overall cable distance when configuring the entire system with Version 1 10 modules and cable is shown below Local station or Local station or 7 Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station intelligent device intelligent device or
191. 1BT11 A1SJ61BT11 AJ61QBTI 1 and A1SJ61QBT11 when they are used as local stations Remote module Generic term for AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65SBTB1 16D AJ65BT 64AD AJ65BT 64DAV AJ65BT 64DAI and A852GOT Intelligent device module Module that can perform transient transmission such as the AJ65BT R2 including local module Remote I O net mode Dedicated mode for sending and receiving data to and from the remote I O station at high speed Remote net mode Mode that can communicate with all stations used for CC Link remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station The remote net mode has three different modes remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode and remote net additional mode Remote net ver 1 mode Mode in which complete compatibility with the conventional module QJ61BT1 1 is achieved Select this mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product Remote net ver 2 mode Select this mode when increasing the number of cyclic points and configuring a new system Remote net additional mode Select this mode when adding a ver 2 compatible station to the existing system to increase the number of cyclic points Ver 1 compatible slave station Slave station compatible with the remote net ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible slave
192. 1compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 32 11 32 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master and local stations Settings of the master station switches are shown below QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MST S MST SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO Station number setting switch x 10 Masterstaion 0 o Local station 0 1 x 1 M Transmission rate mode setting switch MODE 0 156 kbps online NC 1 NC DA 2 SLD 3 DB 3 ire CC gt DG 9 7 11 33 11 33 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 4 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data ho
193. 2 101 100 SF1H 11F 11E 11D 11C 11B 11 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 5 2 12 12 12D 12 12B 12 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 5 13F 13E 18D 13C 13B 13A 139 138 137 136 135 184 133 132 131 130 5F4u 14F 14E 14D 14C 14B 14A 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 5F5H 15F 15E 15D 15C 15B 15A 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 16F 16 16D 16C 16B 16A 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 5F7u 17F 17E 17D 17C 17B 17A 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 8 18F 18E 18D 18C 18B 18A 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 5F9H 19F 19E 19D 19C 19B 19 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 5 1AF 1AE 1AD 1AC 1AB 1AA 1A9 1A8 1A7 1A6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1A2 1A1 1A0 5FBu 1BF 1 1BD 1BC 1BB 1BA 1B9 1B8 1B7 1B6 1B5 1B4 1B3 1B2 1B1 1BO 5FCH 1CF 1CE 1CD 1CC 1CB 1CA 1C9 1C8 1C7 106 105 1C4 1C3 1C2 1C1 1CO 5FDH 1DF 1DE 1DD 1DC 1DB 1DA 1D9 1D8 107 106 1D5 1D4 1D3 1D2 101 1DO 5 1EF 1 1ED 1EC 1EB 1EA 1E9 1E8 1E7 1 6 1E5 1E4
194. 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 Ver 2 mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations Occupies 1 station Ver 2 Station number 1 pompatible remote Station number 2 output RY Station number 3 i Station number 6 Station number 6 i Station number 7 Station number 7 Remote output RY quadruple MEE double POINT 1 In the remote net ver 2 mode the remote registers of the remote I O station are set to 0 points 2 When the ver 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted the refresh devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added or deleted slave station Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4 8 Setting method Using GX Developer set the network parameters For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTIONS Master station additional mode 2 Remote net additional mode This mode is designed for use when slave stations including a ver 2 compatible station is added to the existing ver 1 system The program of the existing system can be used as is Remote I O station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Remote device station Ver 1 compatible Station number 2 Occupies 2 stations Local station additional mode Station number 4 Occupies 4 stations MELSEC Q Remote d
195. 2 3 1 1 5 42 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 X1 3X3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the data for the CPU device is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple m 8 2a 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m Remote device station processing time ms
196. 2 5 Performing the data nennen nennen nennen nennen 10 36 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 10 36 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program sse 10 37 10 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used sese 10 38 10 31 Gonfig ring a System 2 uni iae deer tae cte ed caidas 10 38 1 Setting the master Station cccccccecceceeseseeceeceeeeeecaeceeeeeeeaesaeceeeeeesaecaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseataesaeeeeeeateats 10 39 2 Setting the remote device station sss nennen enne nnns 10 40 10 3 2 Setting the master station parameters sse nnne 10 42 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 10 42 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 10 44 10 3 3 Initial setting of the remote device station ssssseeneenennenenn 10 45 1 Setting the target station number sssssssssssssssseeeeenee ennt 10 45 2 Setting the regist procedure registration csccecceceesesseceeceeeseeeeceeeeeeeaesaeceseaesaesaeseeseaesaeeaeeeeeeaneats 10 45 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings 10 49 10 3 4
197. 20 3 1 3 1 5 30 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple p ww o opc uso pose cp ee dise cs 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2X3 1 5 39 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS m SM valu
198. 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 21 MELSEC Q Module Display format Module QJ61BT11N Product information 050320000000000 B HEX C DEC LED Information HAW SW Information Item Value Item Value Iten Value Item Value RUN 0001 156 0001 STNo x10 0000 STNo 0000 ERR 0000 625 0000 STNo xl 0000 3 STNo 0000 MST 0001 2 5 0000 MODE 0000 RATE 0000 5 MST 0000 5H 0000 MODE 0000 LOCAL 0000 10M 0000 CONFIG 0000 Su 0000 MS 0000 TEST 0000 0000 50 0000 TIME 0000 0000 LINE 0000 32 0000 Start monite Stop monitor Close c H W LED Information The H W LED Information displays the following data link information 0 At watchdog timer error PR e between 0 1 There is a faulty station tSettothemastrsttin Set to the master station 1 A transmission speed of 156 kbps is selected ppa e st e 000000000 B2 otus ooo d H W SW Information The H W SW Information displays the following information S MSTNo Station number of the standby master station set by parameter 0 No standby master station specification B RATE Setting of transmission speed MODE Mode setting status CONFIG SW62 module operation status 13 21 App APPENDIX MELSEC Q APPENDIX Appendix 1 External Dimensions Diagram This section describes the external dimensions of the QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11
199. 384H to 387H 43 388H to 38Bu 44 38CH to 38FH 45 390H to 393H 46 394H to 397H 47 398H to 39BH 48 39CH to 39FH 49 3A0H to 3A3H 50 4 to 3A7H 51 3A8H to 52 to 3AFH Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory address BOH to 3B3H 4 to 3B7H 3B8H to 3BBH to 3C0H to 3C3H 4 to 3C7H 3C8H to 3CCH to 3DOu to 3D3H D4u to 3D7H H to 3DBH H to A 09 3D Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address 214uto 217 218H to 21B 21Cu to 21F 220 to 223 224u to 227 228 to 22B 22 to 22F 230 to 233 234 to 237 238 to 23B 23Cu to 23F 240 to 243 244 to 247 number Station Buffer memory address H to 24 H to 24FH H to 253H H to 257H H to 25BH H to 25FH H to 263H H to 267H 268 to 26 H to 26FH H to 273H H to 277H number H to 27BH Station Buffer memory address 27CH to 27FH 280 to 283H 284 to 287H 288 to 28B 28 to 28F 290 to 293H 294 to 297H 298 to 29 29 29 2 0 to 2A3 2 4 to 2A7H 2A8H to 2AB 2AC to 2AF Station number Buffer memory address 2BOnu to 2B3u 4 to 2B7H 2B8u to 2BBH 2 to 2BFH COH to 2C3H C4u to 2C7H 2 8 to 2CBH to 2CFH DOH to 2D3H D4u to 2D7H 208
200. 4 Device memory Device init All connect count Remote Remote output RY Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote 2 Remote reaister R wi Ver 2 Remote register E Www Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No Stop m Asynchronous s x PLC down select Delay infomation setti 0 Scan mode Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt setting Initial settings Interrupt settings 4 No setting Already set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Indispensable settings p Ready Q02tH Host station 11 35 Ovrwrte SCRL 11 35 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters
201. 4 11 1 10 1 OVERVIEW 1 11 MELSEC Q 21 Transient transmission With this method of transmission the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is performed at an arbitrary timing see Section 4 5 Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RWT Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RRD Buffer memory Device memory Send buffer 1 11 1 OVERVIEW 1 12 MELSEC Q 22 Compatibility with conventional module The QJ61BT11N achieves complete compatibility with the conventional module QJ61BT11 in the remote net ver 1 mode Select the remote net ver 1 mode when the number of cyclic points need not be increased or when the QJ61BT11N is used to replace the conventional module as a maintenance product 23 Cyclic points increase Selection of the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode allows RX RY to be increased to up to 8192 points and RWr RWw to up to 2048 words per network by making expanded cyclic setting single double quadruple octuple Also RX RY can be increased to up to 224 points and RWr RWw to up to 32 words per station See Section 4 4 14 24 Remote I O station points setting Set the number of I O points of a remote I O station This setting minimizes CPU device assignment and reduce
202. 4 FUNCTION ei MELSEC Q 5 Interrupt condition Set the conditions under which events are issued Setting range When RX SB or RY is selected ON OFF When RWr or SW is selected Equal Unequal 6 Word device Set the conditions under which events are issued when RWw or SW is selected Setting range 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal 7 Interrupt SI No Set the intelligent function module interrupt pointer number Sl is an interrupt pointer for an intelligent function module and not a device used in an actual program Setting range 0 to 15 Interrupt settings Unit 1 Input format DEC Doves coda Device Detection Interrupt Word Board Interrupt No method condition device E No SI No Aw DO004 Level detect v Unequal M 50 EE X v End setup Cancel 16 POINT Only one event issuance condition can be set for each interrupt program b Set the PLC parameter PLC system Intelligent function module setting Interrupt pointer settings 1 Interrupt pointer start on the PLC side Set the interrupt pointer start number for the CPU Setting range 50 to 255 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of event issuance conditions specified in the Interrupt settings of the Network parameters Setting range 1 to 16 3 Start I O No on the Intelli unit side Set the start input output number for the
203. 4 RWr size 0000 PR RAMMIN MAUS MELSEC Q Example When the local station where expanded cyclic setting has been made and the remote I O stations where remote I O station points setting has been made are connected Local station Station number 1 Occupies 2 stations Expanded cyclic setting Master station octuple Remote I O station Remote station Station number 3 Station number 4 Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Remote I O station point Remote I O station point setting 8 point setting setting 8 point setting Description Station No 1 RX offset 4000 Head buffer memory address of RX of station No 1 Station No 1 RX size 24 18 384 number of RX points 16 24 words Station No 2 RX offset 40001 As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 2 RX size 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 3 RX offset 4018 Head buffer memory address of RX of station No 3 Station No 3 RX size 1 4 Though lower 8 bits of the putter memory address 401 8 are the corresponding size of RX of station No 3 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Head buffer memory address of RX of station No 4 Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 40184 are the corresponding size of RX of station No 4 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RX size Station No 1 RY offset He
204. 40A Station J 408 foe a Big number 2 4 PED aa oe xn 4408 4COFu RWwF 440 4 10 Sra ae 4 11 44114 4 12 Rww12 44124 3 RWwi13 4413n to 4 53FCu RWw 7FC 4BFCu S3FD p RWw7FD ie 53FE4 RWr FEOF E RWw7FE RWw7FF ERE 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW The data link status can be checked with bit data link special relays SB and word data link special registers SW The SB and SW represent the information in the buffer memory of the master local module which is used by reading to the device specified in an automatic refresh parameter Link special relays SB Buffer memory addresses 5E0H to 5FFH Link special registers SW Buffer memory addresses 600H to 7FFH 8 4 1 Link special relays SB Link special relays SB0000 to SB001F are turned ON OFF by the sequence program and SB0020 to SBO1FF are automatically turned ON OFF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory address When the standby master station is controlling the data link the availability of the link s special relays is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station the availability of the link s special relays is identical to that of a local station F
205. 5BT R2 Type RS 232C Interface Module User s Manual 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 10 Ver 2 compatible remote input RX and Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station lt remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored When 1 station is occupied 2 4 or 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 2 to 8 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RYEE and RYEF cannot be used Remote I O station Example Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Local station Remote I O station point setting Station number 2 Occupies 4 stations Master station 16 point setting Expanded cyclic setting
206. 6 27 6 5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net additional mode 6 29 6 5 1 Master station network parameter settings 6 29 6 5 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings snee 6 34 6 5 3 Local station network parameter settings ssssssseeeseeeenenee nennen 6 37 6 5 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 6 40 6 6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote I O net 6 43 6 6 1 Master station network parameter settings sssssssseneenennennne nennen 6 43 6 6 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter 6 46 6 7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction sene 6 48 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link nennen nnne nnne 7 1 1 2 Iristallatlor t Eh eer ete re eed ree Ae eere eed ee ee ee b Fe teres 7 8 7 2 1 Handling precautions tente enne 7 3 7 2 2 Installation environment cecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceaeeeesneeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeceaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaaesseaeeseaeeeseeeseenees 7 4 7 3 Part Identification Nomenclature and Settings sese 7 4 7 4 Ch
207. 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings lg Project Edit Find Replace View Onine Diagno sols Window 1 altata cf Mlele tn aea Aaaa Dies lea a Helela elel Ble ziala s ul els 5 2 5 2 az ot 3 1 Progam zf za me al epe een e Aloe amp 212 22 No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting 1 2 3 Stat 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings Local station z 5 Remote pass Master station data link type z z IK Device memon Mode Remote netiAddtional mode v JR Device init connect count 7000 Y1000 wal wind 1500 1500 w000 W500 580 Swol T Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z Scan mode setting z E Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable setngs setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Ready 0 Host station I wwe INUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following pr
208. 61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module hereinafter referred to as the QJ61BT11N which is used with the MELSEC Q series PLC CPUs When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems The CC Link system connects distributed modules such as an I O module an intelligent function module and a special function module using dedicated cables so that these modules can be controlled by the PLC CPU 1 By distributing each module to an equipment device such as a conveyor line and a machine device the wiring efficiency of the entire system can be accomplished 2 On off information of input output and numeric data that are handled by modules can easily be sent and received at high speed 3 By connecting multiple PLC CPUS a simple distributed system can be configured 4 By connecting various devices made by Mitsubishi s partner manufacturers the System can provide flexible solutions to meet a wide range of user needs Master station PLC CPU Remote I O station REESE orn 9190 Device manufactured by one of our Remote device station Local station Intelligent device station PLC CPU CoA Master station The station that controls the data link
209. 8 1 Index 3 R Random access 8 20 Refresh instruction acknowledgment status at standby master switching 8 27 Refresh instruction at standby master SWILChiFIg ierit riri eot 8 26 Refresh instruction at standby master switching result eese 8 31 Refresh instruction complete status at standby master switching 8 27 Refresh instruction when changing parameters by the dedicated instruction 8 26 Remote device station A 14 1 1 Remote device station communication 1 3 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function 1 9 4 45 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction 8 27 Remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction result 8 33 Remote I O net mode A 14 Remote I O A 14 1 1 Remote I O station communication 1 2 Remote 1 0 station points setting 1 12 4 65 Remote input RX 8 10 Remote A 14 Remote net mode A 14 4 54 Remote net additional mode A 14 2 1 4 69 Remote net ver
210. 8 to SW007B Indicates whether there is a temporary error invalid station setting OFF No setting ON Setting exists information is stored in SW007C to SW007F Indicates the parameter receive status from the master station OFF Reception complete ON Reception not complete Detects changes to the host setting switch during data linking OFF No changes detected ON Changes detected Indicates whether the Type setting of the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station MELSEC Q Offline 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 5 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description Online Master station Local station Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master Host master standby SB007B station 7 b11 master operation status OFF Operates as the master station controlling data link ON Operates as the standby master station standby Slave station Indicates the parameter set slave station refresh compulsory clear refresh compulsory SB007C clear setting status in setting status in case of PLC CPU STOP 7 b12 9 OFF Refresh case of PLC CPU STOP ON Clears compulsorily Indicates the communication status between remote loc
211. 9 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the LED display on the corresponding local station s data read from the correct address of remote register RWr buffer memory of the local station Is the corresponding local station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match Is the corresponding local station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 register RWw buffer memory of the local station je Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is data read from the correct address of remote e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting register RWr buffer memory of the master station 13 6 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 51 0072 Is the corresponding station set as areserved Check the reserved station specified status Unable to communicate from a local station remote station 51 0074 to SW0077 register RWw to the master station remote register RWn e Check the station num
212. A 15 Standby master function 1 7 4 31 Standby master station A 14 Standby master station information 8 29 Standby master station number 8 34 Station information setting checklist App 44 Station number overlap checking T FUNGON us caedit veu eras 1 10 4 63 Station number overlap status 8 37 Station number setting 7 18 Station number setting switches 7 5 Station status at error occurrence 5 44 Seni t nete teta rd tete A 15 Switch setting esses 7 13 Switch setting status 8 29 8 34 System 2 1 System down prevention 1 6 T Branch connection 7 11 Temporary error invalid acceptance status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling acknowledgment status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status 8 27 Temporary error invalid canceling request 8 26 Temporary error invalid complete status 8 27 Temporary error invalid request 8 26 Temporary error invalid station setting function esesseeesseeeeeeeeennne 1 10 4 61 Temporary er
213. Address 2 0 For station 2 1 number 1 2E24 2 gt 2 4 For station 2 5 number 2 2 2 7 gt 2 8 For station J 2 9 number 3 2 2 gt 2 For station 2 0 number 4 2 2EFu gt 2 0 For station 2 1 number 5 2F24 2 M to 3DCu For station 3DD number 64 3DEu 3DFu MELSEC Q b Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored Four words are used per station 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received Four words are used per station Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw Address 1E0u 1 1 For station 1E2 number 1 1 1 4 5 For station 1E6 number 2 1 7 1 8 1E9 For station 1 Number 3 1 1 1EDs For station 1EE number 4 1 1F0u 1 1 For station 1F2 number 5 1F3u Ed to 2DCu 2DD For station 2 number 64 2DFu
214. Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SWO077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap statu
215. D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q j Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 lm Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Window 218 x allta c alie t D EE DRE S open 85 stil lel ziale j Progam zI A of Sl m xl z Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program t IV Device comment et i 2 3 Ei uf Parameter Stat 120 No 10000 PLC paramete Operational s
216. Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Off line Remote I O net mode Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 2 modules Remote input RX Devicename Seletfrom X M L B D W RorZR Cis Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W RorZR Device name ect from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR S Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Raz m M L B T C ST D W RWr RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR IEEE Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR PO Remote output RY Remote register RWw 10 42 10 42 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 Retry count 3 times Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified No Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select blau Sio Stop continue Asynchron nchron Scan mode setting syncnronous s
217. ELSEC Q 5 2 2 Master station remote device station Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX lt remote device station RX This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the CPU device tums ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number ROCESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X1 1 5 21 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the se
218. ET H Special Index Constant Set data Fx gm user File rer function RR di register module 20 Instruction Execution symbol condition d RIFR GRIFR Un m 2 m ES Command RIFR GP RIFR Un ni n2 D n3 Set data Setting range Data type Un number of the module to FEH Intelligent device station number 1 to 64 Random access buffer specification Binary 16 bits The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent Between 0 and parameter setting value device station specified by the master station or the random access buffer 7 Within the range of the D Start number of the device to which read data is to be stored US Device specified device Number of points to read 0 to 4096 Binary 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to 0 App 23 App 23 APPENDIX Master station MELSEC Q 1 Functions DN PLC CPU Command G RIFR Device memory a Operation chart for the RIFR instruction Specified station Master module Intelligent device station Communication commences Buffer memory when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic update buffer App 24
219. F RWw00 to RWwFF SB0000 to SBO1FF SW0000 to SWO1FF Content of default network parameter settings Mode setting Remote net ver 1 mode Total number of connected z 64 stations stations Number of retries 3 times Number of automatic return 1 module modules Asynchronous 4 FUNCTION aes MELSEC Q Content of buffer memory size specification for intelligent device station Send buffer Receive buffer Automatic update buffer 128 words 1 Perform an automatic CC Link startup in the remote net ver 1 mode 2 When the automatic CC Link startup is executed on a local station the local station operates occupying 1 station 3 Make sure to perform line tests for all stations if an automatic CC Link startup is performed and changes such as replacement of a module etc are made to the system during data link operation Stations whose data link has already been established only stations whose station numbers overlap may also go down if stations with overlapping head station numbers return to the system If an automatic CC Link startup was performed a temporary error invalid station cannot be used In case of a multiple PLC system where each CPU controls several QJ61BT11N modules the automatic CC Link startup is performed on the QJ61BT11N that has the smallest head I O number 6 In the Q00J Q00 Q01 CPU automatic refresh is performed for stations No 1 to 32 only Because automatic refresh is not performed
220. F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 X107D to X1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 Y107D to Y1070 11 10 MELSEC Q This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Master station RXOOF to RX000 RX01F to RX010 RX02F to RX020 RXOSF to RX030 RX04F to RX040 RXO5F to RX050 RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 RYOOF to RYOOO RYO1F to RYO10 RYO2F to RY020 RYOSF to RY030 RYO4F to RY040 RYO5F to RY050 RYO6F to RY060 RYO7F to RYO70 Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Local station PLC CPU RYOOF to Rvooo Y100F to Y1000 RYO1F to RYo10 Y1O1F to Y1010 RYo2F to 020 Y102F to v1020 RYOSF to RY030 Y108F to Y1030 RYo4F to RYo4o vio4F to v1040 RYOSF to Rvoso Y105F to Y1050 RvoeF to Y106F to Y1060 RYO7F to RY070 L 1070 to v1070 RXOOF to RX000 1 to x1000 RXO1F to RX010
221. HE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D1500 CH1 CH Digital output value CH Digital output value value D1501 CH2 Digital output value Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPUIQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU Remote device station 5 number 1 er 3 stations 10 17 10 17 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used 10 2 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system where one ver 1 compatible remote device station and one ver 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 18 10 18 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master
222. IME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw local station RWr This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 1 3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 1 1 10 30 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a
223. J65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change Initial setting change i 152 0 1014 wove 1015 SET 11079 X1078 179 Y1079 AJeSVBTCU 68DAVNdigitalvalueseting 00000000000 X107B 181 RX MOVP K500 W100 Digital value setting MOVP K1000 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN analog output enable disable setting X107B 207 4 11060 Analog output enable 1061 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing X107A 2361 BMOVP WOC D510 K2 MVP wi4 D518 Error reset SET YIO7A Y107A X107A _ 2651 ME RST Y107A 268 MCR NO 269 END The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 35 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 i Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CH 1 digital value setting RWw0 500 CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 1000 Turns on CH 1 analog output enable disable flag RY00 Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable flag RY01 Read CH O check code RWr0 RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 35 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 5 Perfor
224. L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc PARAMETER SETTIN Ecc MELSEC Q 6 7 Example of Parameter Setting with Dedicated Instruction This section explains the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operational Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 1 Master ps Station number 2 Station number 3 station occupies Remote I O station Remote VO station to 1F Error invalid station Reserved station T etation occupies 1 station occupies 1 station 1 L Do not use GX Developer for setting the network parameters if the network parameters of all the modules are set by the RLPASET instruction Change the No of boards in module setting to blank if the network parameters have been already set by GX Developer Moreover in case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction sh
225. LED display shows the following status o O Ot Module is normal QJeIBTTIN The data link is being performed normally L RUN SD Sending data ERR 11 14 RUN MST O SMST no O LEPR 11 14 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station turns on 2 When X21 of the local station is turned on Y40 of the master station turns on Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QJ61BTf1 1 FTT P Terminal resistor Local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 AN Terminal resistor 11 15 11 15 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 When Remote Net Ver 2 Mode is Used 11 3 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with two connected local station is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPU QU6e1BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Ver 1compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Q25HCPUQQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 occupies 2 stations double A
226. Link special register Data update timing Updated independently regardless SW0041 510071 Updated independently regardless of SB of SB Update after each station is SW0045 SW0072 stabilized SWO0060 When SB0060 changes SW0074 to SW0077 When SB0074 changes SW0061 When SB0061 changes SW0078 to SWO07B When SB0075 changes SW0062 SW0080 SW0083 When SB0080 changes Updated independently regardless SW0067 SWO0088 to SWO08B n P 58 SW0068 SW0090 When SB0090 changes SW0069 Updated independently regardless SW0098 to SW009B SWO006A of SB SWO009C to SWOO9F Updated independently regardless SW006D SWOOBA to SWO0B7 of SB SWO006E SWO00B8 SWO006F SWOOB9 SWOO7O 8 PROGRAMMING 8 5 Mode Selection Method MELSEC Q Four different modes are available for CC Link to be applicable to various systems The following flowchart explains the points of mode selection Do you use CC Link for the first time Does the system completely utilize the previous system Is the previous system in the remote I O net Select the remote net Select the remote I O ver 1 mode net mode Is a ver 2 compatible station added to the previous system Are the sequence programs for ver 1 stations utilized Are modules to be connected only remote I O stations Are modules to be connected only local stations Are the numbers of points used per station 32
227. MMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below GX Developer Unset proj t parameters Setting the CC Link list MELSEC Q Bes SU sl je e ee Unset project 5 Program Device comment Parameter 1a PLC paramete Network 12 Remote pass Device memory Device init 11 38 No of boards in module 1 Blank no setting 1 0000 Start 1 0 No Operational settings Operational settin Type Local station Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count Remote input R Remote output Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote 2 Remote register Rw Ver 2 Remote reaister AWw Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt settings Interrupt setting Set if itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Already set pi RUM SCRL Ovrwite 002 Host station
228. Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X24 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 2 1 5 27 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr lt remote device station RWr This indicates the
229. N RUN STATION NO X10 90 3 54 27 4 1 08 gt Terminal block diagram with the cover open Unit mm inch App 1 App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Dedicated Instruction List Transient transmission can be performed for the local stations and intelligent device stations using dedicated instructions The following table lists the dedicated instructions that can be used for each of these stations Target station Reference page Reads data from the buffer memory or the m 2 1 Master station PLC CPU device of the specified station Local station Writes data into the buffer memory or the PLC RIWT NW Appendix 2 2 CPU device of the specified station Reads data from the buffer memory of the T Appendix 2 1 specified station Writes data into the buffer memory of the RIWT A Appendix 2 2 specified station Automatically performs handshaking with the specified station and reads data from the buffer memory of that station Appendix 2 3 Available for modules that have handshake Automatically performs handshaking with the specified station and writes data into the buffer RISEND memory of that station Available for modules that have handshake signals e g AJ65BT R2 Reads data in the automatic update buffer of the specified station App
230. ND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 3 Creating a program This section shows the program used to control the remote I O stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the PLC CPU and the inputs outputs of remote I O stations The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used hele a hapa a ae ed ahh x Remote l O station station number 1 AJ65BTB1 16D Station X100F to X1000 XOF to X00 numer 1 X101F to X1010 Station X102F to X1020 X103F to 1030 Station X104F to X1048 Remote I O station station number 2 PIS X105F to X1050 AJ65BTB1 16T YOF to YOO Sion Y100F to Y1000 number 17 Y101F to 1010 Remote O station station number 3 Station Y102F to Y1020 m number 2 Y103F to Y1030 Station YiO4Fto Y1048 Y1047toYi040 H YOF to 8 X07 to X00 numbers Y105F to Y1050 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS Processing upon occurrence of faulty station Confirmation of data link 4 status Control program 4 6 P10 P20 P30 22 23 26 27 30 31 36 37 X1000 X20 X1040 RET 1020 RET Y1048 Y41 RET IN IN MELSEC Q Read data link status of each station Station number 1 is faulty Station number 2 is faulty Station
231. No PLC down select Stop Scan mode settin Asynchronous Delay infomation setti Station information Station information Remote device station initial l 3c nterrupt setting Interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready Q02H Host station Ove 11 6 11 6 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the local station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Case of CPU STOP Refresh clears compulsoril i stations Default Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple D Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station C Remote net Ver 1 mode gt Remote net Ver 2
232. None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 5 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net additional mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station Station Station Station number 2 number 4 number 8 number 9 Ver 2 Station Ver 1 Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 Master number 1 compatible compatible remote device compatible remote device local
233. OS MST SD RD ERR L ERR STATION NO x 10 Station number setting switch 0 x10 0 x1 Master station must be set to 00 x 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online MODE NC NC DA 2 SLD DB ire CL DG 9 7 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the remote I O stations Settings of the remote I O station switches are shown below Transmission rate mode setting switch 0 156 kbps online Station number setting switch AserBii D 0 1 aese 0 2 AusBTBideDT 0 3 S MITSUBISHI MELSEC Avesste1 160 Bw RATE 204 2 PW LRUN SD RD LERR OOO OG OO STATION NO o 0123456789 ABCDEF 28 2 j Qs a 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Setting value Input data hold clear Hold Cclear gt Default Clear Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily CRefresh gt Clea
234. Operational setine Operational settings js Network Type Master station 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start IB Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Bj Device init All connect count 2 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote register Rw w Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i i Scan mode settin Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial settinu Initial settinc em nterrupt setting 1 interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready Q02 H Host station Ovrwrte NUM 10 23 10 23 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 N Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 C
235. Parameter setting checklist sese App 43 Appendix 7 2 Station information setting checklist sss App 44 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction To conform this product to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive refer to the Section of CC Link Modules in Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module used About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation Description QJ61BT11N Abbreviation for QJ61BT11N CC Link System Master Local Module Cyclic transmission Transmission method by which to periodically communicate the contents of remote I O and remote registers Transient transmission Transmission method with which the counterpart is specified and 1 1 communication is used at an arbitrary timing Master station
236. RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Turn the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU to RUN 7 Check operation using the LED display master station When data link is normal L RUN LED is lit When the data link is faulty L ERR LED is lit e Check the connection status of each module line test see Section 7 8 e Check operation using the CC Link diagnosis see Section 13 4 Register the control program in the PLC CPU Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON System operation End 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 2 Installation The following section explains the precautions when handling the master and local modules from the time they are unpacked until they are installed For more details on the module installation see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 7 2 1 Handling precautions 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the PCB of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire burrs enter the module during wiring In the event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 The top surface of the module is covered with a protective film to prevent foreign objects such as wire burrs from entering the mod
237. RIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 21 02 486 0 Fax 49 0 21 02 4 86 11 20 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation fra mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 JAPAN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 A 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 e mail office geva at AUSTRIA TEHNIKON BELARUS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westga
238. RLPASET instruction Control data M303 2241 Mov KO D100 Clear complete status 4 Slave station setting data send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid Mov K3 D102 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Mov K9 D101 Mov K3 0103 1 Number of retries 3 times mov 0104 1 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Mov KO D105 1 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop mov KO D106 Scan mode specification Asynchronous mov KO D107 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 d 261 311 mov H2101 110 First Local station occupies P 1 station station number1 1 MOV H102 111 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOV H103 112 Third Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 3 1 Set the station number in hexadecimal Example Set 14 for station No 20 App 38 App 38 APPENDIX Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M303 278 mov mov MOV Parameter registration data link startup M303 onl H eP RLPASET 00 D100 D110 D150 D160 Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M304 339 K100 K100 KO D170 D170 D171 D172 M304 M303 SB3 M310 Lu Start of the control program N305 4 Performs abnormal completion processing
239. RWr2 RWw13 RWr13 RWw14 RWwrt4 RWw15 RWr15 RWw16 RWr16 1 1 Ji RWw1D RWrID RWwiE RWriE RWwiF RWAF 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS Local station status confirmation XO XO 1 Master station program F W80 0 9 E No mo 5180 4 0650 NO M100 Control program Control program of station number 1 SW80 0 1000 2 gt X20 1000 X Control program of station number 5 5180 4 X1080 511 0 CYM X21 11080 7 77 MGR NO 1 78 END Confirmation of data link status 2 Local station program a Ver 1 compatible local station station numb x0 0 0 No M100 Control program 4 o xh 4 ving y 32 MCR NO 1 rt 1 xi M100 wc NO b Ver 2 compatible local station station numb Confirmation of data link status x0 XOF xi a 0 NO M100 NO M100 Control program MELSEC Q Station number 1 is faulty Station number 5 is faulty Control program using data received from local station of station No 1 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 1 Control program using data received from local station of station No 5 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 5 er 1 program Local station is performing data link Control program using d
240. Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode R Off line emote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Tipps 1 modules Default 64 Device name Select fromX M L B D W Ror ZR Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR _ L B D W anii Device Select M L B T C ST DW RorZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR PE eee Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR oo O O Default 3 smes 1to 10 Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank 1 modules Stop continue Stop gt continue Default Stop Dome Asynchronous synchronous CAsynchronous P synchronous Default Asynchronous sto 11 4 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q Station Expanded Number oi Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word No Station type cyclic setting occupied points station select stations Receive Automatic i Occupies Intelligent device station 4 stations 128 points No setting b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below 5 series GX t parameters EL the CC Link list
241. Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Receive buffer PARAMETER SETTIN Ecc MELSEC Q 6 5 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tool e tme osla sla ele ele soul eal l eo ee eps e ep e Le Fe Le Program z al afz Ale SE zrl Be x B m Unset project No of boards in module 1 7j Boards Blank no setting EA Program Device comment 1 89 19 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 8 PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 27 Network T Master station 127 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start amp Device memory Remote netiAdditional mode 18 Device int All connect count 5 Remote input RX 1000 Remote outputfRY Y1000 Remote reaisterFI wr wo Remote register Ww 100 Ver 2 Remote inputfPX 1500 Ver 2 Remote output RY 71500 Ver 2 Remote register W000 Ver 2 Remote registeri E Ww W1500 Special elaySB SB Special reaisteS w SWOJ Retry count 5 Automatic reconne
242. TATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting of AJOBVBTCU 68DAVN AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN CON A con B SEL POWER 1 SET RUN 2 UP LRUN 3 DOWN LERR Station number setting switch 5 1 o Transmission speed setting switch TEST 4 o 8 40 OFF 2 20 orr 5 22 n j e OFF gt Sumera 6 J D 5 lt 156kbps m i OFF 8 EZ MODE Mode select switch 3 Ver 2 Mode Nomal mode M IP P CON R D MITSUBISHI CC1ink PA ME 10 21 10 21 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Datalink Input data hold clear Hold Cclear Default Clear Master Mater station Master statio Du
243. TATIONS From the previous page AJeSVBTCU 68DAVN initial setting change MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Initial setting change i Analog output enable 151 MOVP HOFC W1508 it disable setting RWw8 ovp H30 W1509 1 CH 1 to CH 4 output range Setting RWw9 Turns on initial data setting aoe ee res earn scene ener ee eee ST TMI request tag RY19 _ AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting processing X1518 Turns off initial data 178 RST 1518 processing completion flag RY18 d X1519 RST Y1519 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV digital output value read AJ65VBTCU 68ADV aul eo poo J Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 X1001 j M D501 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing X101A 236 1 WovP D508 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset FSET yoa 1 Turns on error reset T request flag RY1A 261 TE Mya l RST YIOIA 4 Turns off error reset k request flag RY1A AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN digital value setting X151B AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 264 MOVP 500 w500 CH digital value Digital value setting RWwO 500 setting 2 P move K1000 1501 CH 2 digital value setting RWw1 1000 output enable disable setting Turns on 1 analog 290 KX Y1500 gt output enable disable Analog output flag RYOO enable x Turns o
244. TCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 2 Set digital values to the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN and confirm that the voltages converted from digital to analog are output 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D500 D501 CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value 2 D A conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN D510 CH1 Digital value setting D511 CH2 Digital value setting Master station Y Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11 nd Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 57 10 57 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example 11 1 Secured 32 bit Data When the following conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied in the CC Link network 32 bit data in remote registers RWr RWw between a PLC CPU and a master local station can be secured 1 Access starts from a remote resister RWr RWw address of an even number PLC CPU Master station Local station PLC CPU Master station Local station E 1 1
245. TCU 68DAVN and confirm that the voltages converted from digital to analog are output 1 A D conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV D500 D501 CH1 Digital output value CH2 Digital output value 2 D A conversion of AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN D510 CH1 Digital value setting D511 CH2 Digital value setting Master station Y Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11 nd Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68DAV AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station Ver 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 37 10 37 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used 10 3 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system where one ver 1 compatible remote device station and one ver 2 compatible remote device station are connected is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 Q06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Terminal resistor AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Ver 1 compatible remote device station 2 compatible remote device station station number 1 station number 4 Occupies 3 stations Occupies 1 station 10 38 10 38 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the
246. TION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Details of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 10 9 10 9 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Pro
247. U STOP using GX Developer 2 This setting is also valid when the TO instruction is used for RY refresh 2 Setting method Set the Operational setting value in the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 6 Continuing the data link even when the master station is faulty Standby master function This function enables the data link to continue working by switching to a standby master station meaning a backup station for the master station if a system down occurs in the master station due to a malfunction in the PLC CPU or power supply The master station can return to normal mode and to system operation as the standby master station even during data link control by the standby master station thus preparing itself for a standby master station system down master station duplex function 4 FUNCTIONS Controlling Controlling the data link of the CC Link system Standby Data link control by the master station Master station Remote device station Station number 2 Controlling Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 NS MELSEC Q Standing by in case the station controlling the data link of the CC Link system becomes faulty Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby Cyclic communication
248. U is down even when the data link status at CPU down is set to Continue The standby master function overrides and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station Setting method Set the above data link status with the PLC down select value in the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 4 Retaining the device status of a data link faulty station Setting the status of input data from a data link faulty station This function sets the input receiving data from a data link faulty station 1 Applicable input receiving data Master station Remote input RX Remote I O station station number 1 Remote device station station number 2 Local station station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station numb
249. User range setting 1 the second condition Set channel 1 to Sampling processing and specify channel 2 as Average processing and set it to Number of times the third condition Set channel 2 Average number of times to 16 times the forth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the sixth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the seventh condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the eighth condition For more detailed information about the settings see the Remote Device Station User s Manual Set the input format to a Setting the first condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 10 25 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 26 MELSEC Q Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution
250. Ver 1 mode All connect count Remote input R Remote output Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote 2 Remote register Rw Ver 2 Remote reaister AWw Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt settings Interrupt setting Set if itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Already set pi RUM SCRL Ovrwite 002 Host station 11 22 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When seiting X Y B W SB
251. Ww and RWr see Section 4 2 2 Master station Remote device station Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote input Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote output output RY RY Automatic refresh memole Link scan Remote register register RWw RWw Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote register register A RWr RWr Voltmeter 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU PLC CPU 3 Local station communication Communication between the master station and the local station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 3 a Cyclic transmission Data communication between the PLC CPUs can be performed in N N mode using bit data remote input RX and remote output RY and word data remote registers RWw and RWr Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Master station Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Link scan Link scan Link scan Link scan b Transient transmission Read RIRD or write RIWT operation of the local station buffer memory and CPU device can be performed at any timing Master station Transient transmission area Transient transmission Transient transmission Transient transmission Transient transmission Local
252. Y and remote register RWw in the master station using the sequence program 2 Standby master station input Standby master station controlling Remote input RX Station number 0 Remote X00 to RXOF Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 po TU TI PEU Remote O station Station number 3 pd Number of occupied stations 1 output RY Remote station Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station is being used as input data by the master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q d When the standby master station becomes faulty and the master station controls the data link 1 Master station output Master station controlling Station number 1 gt 0 Standby master station Remote Remote Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 X00 to XOF YO00 to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Master station input Master station controlling Station number 1 0 Standby master station Remote Remo
253. able settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset Ready 1002 Host station Ove NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 x p Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations CC LinkL Exclusive station gt r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data L Case of CPU STOP setting z Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Examp
254. according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Set the refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Set the refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Set the refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list BB Project Edit Find Repl View Online Diagnostic Mind Help 18 xl I ci 727970 i zd E ZEL y Bs ES ale Program zin ERTE E ES No of boards in module hz Boards Blank no setting 9 8 Program Princ B RE Operational setine S Xu settings e eda Master station data link type EE x z E I Device init All connect count Remote input FiX 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register E wr WO Remote reaister E w w 100 Mer 2 Remote input RoX 1500 Ve
255. ad buffer memory address of RY of station No 1 Station No 1 RY size 24 184 384 number of RY points 16 24 words Station No 2 RY offset 40001 As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 2 RY size 0 default As 2 stations are occupied the area of station No 1 is checked Station No 3 RY offset 4218 Head buffer memory address of RY of station No 3 Though the lower 8 bits of the buffer memory address 4218 th i ize of Station No 3 RY size 1 1 9 ry S are the corresponding size RY of station No 3 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RY offset 4218 Head buffer memory address of RY of station No 4 Though the upper 8 bits of the buffer memory address 42184 are the corresponding size of RY of station No 4 1 is stored since less than 1 word is rounded up Station No 4 RY size 1 189 Station No 1 RWw offset 440 Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No 1 2 number of occupied stations 32 expanded cyclic setting 64 Station No 4 RWw offset 4440 Head buffer memory address of RWw of station No 4 Station No 4 RWw size 0 default Buffer memory size of RWw of station No 4 Station No 1 RWr offset 4 00 Head buffer memory address of RWr of station No 1 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 5 Link special relays SB The link special relays store the data link status using bit ON OFF data Buffer memory addresses 5E0H
256. al intelligent Other station data link device standby master stations x3 OFF All stations normal EBs bO Status ON Faulty station exists information is stored in SW0080 to SW0083 Other station Indicates the occurrence of a watchdog timer error in other stations watchdog timer error OFF No error status ON Error occurrence Indicates the fuse blown occurrence status at other stations 580082 Other station fuse SW0088 to SWO008B bE84 b2 blown status OFF No error ON Error occurrence Detects changes in setting switches of other stations during data SB0083 Other station switch linking 5 8 change status OFF No change ON Change detected Indicates the line status of the host Host line status OFF Normal ON Abnormal line disconnection Indicates whether there is a transient transmission error OFF No error ON Error occurrence Master station Indicates the transient transmission status of the master station transient transmission OFF Normal status ON Abnormal Stores the test result of Line test 1 Line test 2 OFF Normal ON Abnormal SB0081 5 8 b1 SB0090 5E9u bO 580094 Transient 5 9 b4 transmission status SB0095 5E9u b5 SBOOB4 Standby master 5EBu b4 station test result 3 The other station data link status SB0080 takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave station connected to the master local station becomes faulty The t
257. alid station if temporary error 3 Setting Cancel For current cursor station Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring Close 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 10 Checking operations for each local station Data link stop restart This function stops and restarts local data links If the data link of the master station is stopped the data link of the entire system stops Setting method Set the CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics in Diagnostics using the GX Developer a Specifying applicable module Specify the module whose data link is stopped or restarted in Module setting Specification method Module No Address b Execution of data link stop restart Perform these operations by setting Start Data Link or Stop Data Link in the network test CC Link 7 CC Link LT Diagnostics x Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Host Station Master Station Ver 2 mode el gee CC Link Data Link Status tat Data ya PE Js Module No h oz Action Status Nomad P om CyoAMes Switching Status Master Station Curent B oom CCLink Bridge Using Loop wur Statior CH 0 Line status Nomi 7 CH 1 Line status EOC o Newer Loop Type Twist Single Bus 7 Monitoring other station Start Data Link Stop Data Link 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 11 Station number overlap checking function This fun
258. ameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction Parameter area Network parameter Master station Parameter area Network parameter 6 PARAMETER SETTIN MELSEC Q 6 2 Parameter Setting Items Table 6 1 lists the items to be stored in the master station parameter memory Table 6 1 Parameter setting items 1 2 Reference Master Local Standby Setting item Description master section station station Mess Sets the input data status from the data link disorder station Data link diserdavietanoh Default value Clear Section Setting range Hold input data 4 3 4 Clear Sets whether slave stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared in case of PLC CPU STOP Section Default value Refresh 435 Setting range Refresh y Clears compulsorily Sets the number of occupied local and standby master stations Default value Occupies 1 station x Setting range Occupies 1 to 4 stations Makes the expanded cyclic setting of the local station Section Default value single 4414 x Setting range single double quadruple octuple et Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that are connected to the master station including reserved stations Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Sets the number of retries when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting r
259. ameter settings 1 Line test 2 is performed when an error is generated by line test 1 Thus if the result of line test 1 is normal there is no need to conduct line test 2 2 Network parameter setting is required to execute Line test 2 for the standby master station 1 Checking the connection status and the status of communication with remote stations local stations intelligent device stations standby master station line test 1 Perform the line test according to the following procedure Check items prior to executing line test 1 Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the station number setting switch for the master local module to 0 Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master module When test is complete The L RUN LED lights up The MST LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOBA to B7 line test 1 result H
260. an O or 1 B393 Scan mode specification error The scan mode parameter was set to a Set 0 or 1 parameter value other than O or 1 Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations s Set a value within the range B394 stations setting error parameter was set to a value other than 5 x from 1 to 10 parameter 1 to 10 B396 Station number overlap error A duplicate station number was specified Set so that station numbers are x parameter with the station information parameter not duplicated The station information parameter setting does not meet the following condition 16 X 4 54 88 X lt 2304 Setthe parameter so that it Station information setting error Lt B397 A Number of remote I O stations meets the condition shown on x parameter A B Number of remote device stations left C Number of intelligent device stations including local stations Number of occupied stations numer of peopled stationis thie Set a value within the range B398 setting error parameter station information parameter was set to from 1 to 4 x 9 a value other than 1 to 4 Number of connected modules hE nuimber of connected Tod Rs Set a value within the range B399 parameter was set to a value other than x setting error parameter 4 to 64 from 1 to 64 13 12 13 12 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Standby master station specification error loading status MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error c
261. and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX evene Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list he eel erst o nol e n ata re cc B EB un Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 89 8 Program 8 1 Device comment 1 2 3 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 ur PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Local station x M 2 Remote pass Master station data link type z El Device memory Remote net Ver 1 mode s s IBI Device init All connect count Remote input FoX X1000 Remote outputf RY Y1000 Remote register Awr WO Remote register ww w1000 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registerR wi Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select E i i Scan mode bz Y Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt setting Interuptsettinas mm ___
262. ange 1 to 7 times Sets the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Specifies the station number of the standby master station Default value Blank no standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Specifies the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Section Setting range Stop 4 3 3 Continue Specifies either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan Default value Asynchronous Section Setting range Asynchronous 4 4 8 Synchronous Delay ti ay MS Set 0 for the delay time x x setting Specifies the reserved station Default value Not specified Section y Setting range Not specified 4 4 6 specification E Specified ehe Specifies the error invalid station Error invalid v statiofi Default value Not specified Section y Setting range Not specified 4 4 7 specification Specified x Number of exclusive stations on the screen is described as Number of occupied stations in this manual Exclusive station 1 on the screen is described as Occupies 1 station in this manual Section 4 3 2 Section 4 3 6 6 3 6 3 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Table 6 1 Parameter se
263. ap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX evene Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list he eel erst o nol e n ata re cc B EB un Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 89 8 Program 8 1 Device comment 1 2 3 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 ur PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Local station M M 2 Remote pass Master station data link type z El Device memory Remote net Ver 2 mode s s IBI Device init All connect count Remote input FoX X1000 Remote outputf RY 1000 Remote wo Remote register ww w1000 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registerR wi Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select E i i Scan mode bz Y Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt setting Interuptsettinas mm ___ No setting Already s
264. as exceeded the maximum of 8192 When the standby master station was operating as the master station with the master station duplex function the network parameter setting of the faulty master station was changed The mode set in the control data of the RLPASET instruction differs from the mode RLPASET instruction and the switch Set with switch 3 of the intelligent module Switch setting Specify the standby master station asan intelligent device station Make the same setting to the master and standby master stations DE t ver 2 mode Set the station of reserved 0 points setting as a reserved station points in the remote net additional mode ver 2 mode 8 points setting and 16 points setting have been made for the x same remote l O station Make either 8 points setting or 16 points setting for the remote I O station In the remote net additional mode make network parameter setting so that the maximum station number of ver 1 compatible slave stations is less than the minimum station number of ver 2 compatible slave stations After correcting the mismatch of modes between the master and local standby master stations reset the PLC CPU Set a correct value to switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting Set all station types to the remote station Check the points for remote stations in the station information setting Return the network parameter setting of the maste
265. aster station as positioning start RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 RY2F to RY20 RY3F to RY30 RY4F to RY40 RY5F to RY50 RY6F to RY60 RY7F to RY70 RY8F to RY80 to RY7FF to RY7FO Remote output RY when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Description RYO1 to RYOF RY10 Single axis positioning start Use prohibited 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Writing to the remote register RWw 6 The transmission data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory 7 The data stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory is automatically sent to the remote register RWw of the intelligent device station Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations Remote register RWw f Numeric data such as positioning start number N Signal direction Master module AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Address Description RWwO Single axis positioning start number RWw1 Single axis override RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 to The data content to be written to the remote registers RWw0 to RWwn is predefined for each intelligent device station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote re
266. aster station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 220 3X 1X3 71 1 5 33 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS Xx m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 X1 3X3 1 5 30 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3
267. at any timing Master station Transient transmission area Intelligent device station Transient transmission Buffer memory Transient transmission 1 OVE MELSEC Q 5 Parameter setting by GX Developer or the dedicated instruction There are two parameter setting methods the parameters can either be set by GX Developer or by using a dedicated instruction see Sections 2 2 1 4 2 5 and 4 2 6 The following table lists the differences between the two setting methods Program requirement for setting refresh Automatic Number of CPUs that can be mounted Changing the parameter settings while the PLC CPU is parameters Parameter setting with Not required 4 modules x GX Developer Parameter setting with Required x 64 modules dedicated instruction 6 System down prevention Slave station cut off function Because the system employs the bus connection method even if a module system fails due to power off it will not affect the communication with other normal modules Also for a module using a 2 piece terminal block the module can be replaced during data link Replace the module after turning off the module power However if the cable is disconnected data link to all stations are disabled see Section 4 3 1 Station number 4 Station number 7
268. at the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to STOP and then perform the hardware test 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cables This section explains how to connect the master module local modules standby master module remote modules and intelligent device modules with the CC Link dedicated cables 1 CC Link cables can be connected from any station number 2 Connect the supplied terminal resistors to each module at both ends of the CC Link system Connect the terminal resistors between DA and DB There are restrictions on the case where the A 1S J61BT11 A 1S J61QBT11 is used as the master station in a T branch system configuration Refer to Section 7 6 1 for details 3 The terminal resistors to be connected vary depending on the types of cables used in the CC Link system Cable type CC Link dedicated cable 110 Q 1 2 W brown brown brown Version 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable 130 1 2 W brown orange brown 4 The master module can be connected at points other than both ends 5 Star connection is not allowed 6 The connection method is shown below Master module Remote module Local module Terminal resistor Terminal resistor SLD CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated cable IMPORTANT CC Link dedicated high per
269. ata received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station er 5 program Local station is performing data link Control program using data 18 gt received from a master station M Program to generate send 30 HR YF data to the master station 32 MCR NO p M i m 11 29 11 29 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q By configuring an interlock with remote I O RX RY cyclic data can be secured on a per station 4 word basis For details refer to Remark in Section 11 2 4 11 3 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status O ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed ep normally RUN L RUN N Controlling data link MST SMST SD 9 RD Receiving data ERR O LERR Sending data b LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status Oo O 0t The data link is being
270. ate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0u and bit 13 b13 Table 10 3 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master D Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Remote device station the initialization procedure registration SB000D CRAP While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and BEO b13 initialization procedure raniols registers stops x registration instruction OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOO5E Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure 5E5n b14 device station initialization OFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SBOO5F NOTER procedure execution f SEOs b15 initialization OFE Not complete ON Complete device stimon Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO05F LP instruction with SBOOOB f Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 3 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure
271. ation 3 Network parameters utomatic refresh A 4 utomatic refresh Ka utomatic refresh 9 utomatic refresh pete Buffer memory Remote input Remote output Remote register 2 5 Remote register RWw E Remote device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals Such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as error reset request flag and initial data processing complete flag Remote register RWw Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values detected temperature value etc 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of a remote device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master st
272. ation 0 Normal SW009 1 Matching error 690 Loading parameter Example of matching error x7 SW009C 69Cu SWoOOOE Consistency status 69 WOO9F 69Fu Remote I O station Intelligent device station Installation Parameter Remote device station Remote station Remote device station b15 b14 b12 to SW009C SW009D SWO009E SWO009F Stores the line test 1 result SWO00B4 0 Normal 6 4 1 Abnormal W00B5 b15 b13 b12 6 5 Line test 1 result 6 SWOOB4 16 18 WO00B6 SWO00B5 32 29 9 18 17 W00B7 SWO0B7 6 7 Stores the line test 1 line test 2 result swoops 6B8 Line test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 6 Bits for the number of occupied stations are turned on 7 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on In addition these registers check and store the status at link startup 8 37 8 37 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 8 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Indicates the slave stations compatible with CC Link ver 2 SWO0140 0 Ver 1compatible slave station 7404 1 Ver 2compatible slave station ono b15 bi4 b12 7414 Compatible swo140 16 15 14 18 swo142 information swo141 32 29 7444 swo
273. ation 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module 2 RW J Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIRD instruction 1 The data in the buffer memory of an intelligent device station is accessed 2 The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Intelligent device station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory 3 Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 5 Parameter setting with GX Developer Using GX Developer makes the setting of the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters easier The data link is automatically started if GX Developer is used to set the parameters Using GX Developer to set the parameters has the following advantages e It is not necessary to write a program for setting the parameters It is pos
274. ation area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in parameters a remote device station Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station 13 4 13 4 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status Unable to write data to the remote register RWw in the settings match 51 0098 to SWO009B the remote device station e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWOO09C to SWOO9F Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration bein
275. ation error in the data link e When performing the control of the PLC in operation changing data by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module or connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Before performing other controls of the PLC in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote PC from an external device troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program DESIGN PRECAUTION lt gt DANGER e Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not output the prohibited to use signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause system malfunction in the PLC e To specify the automatic refresh parameter specify Y for the remote output RY refresh device If a value other than Y for example M or L is specified
276. ation data link type z El Device memory Remote net Ver 1 mode s s IBI Device init All connect count Remote input FoX X1000 Remote outputf RY 1000 Remote wa Remote register ww 100 Ver 2 Remote input FiX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registerR wi Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB 5 0 Special registerSW SWO Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select E i i Scan mode bz Y Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial settinu Interrupt setting Interuptsettinas mm ___ No setting Already set Indispensable settings No setting Already set Setif it is needed Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwite SCRL 11 39 11 39 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsoril occupied stations Default Occupies 1 station single double quadruple octuple setting Default single Mast
277. ation occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as remote READY and initial data processing request flag Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RXOF to RX00 d 4 Handshaking signals RX1F to RX10 2 RX1F to RX10 such as remote READY RX2F to RX20 i and initial data EE 8 4 ocessing request fla 3 to RX30 p E co dis RX5F to RX50 2 RX1F to RX10 RX6F to RX60 REN RX7F RX70 TN RXOF to RX00 Remote input RX when the AJ65BT 64AD is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT 64AD Master module Device No Signal name RX00 CH1 A D conversion completed flag RX01 CH2 A D conversion completed flag RX02 CH3 A D conversion completed flag RX03 CH4 A D conversion completed flag RX04 to Not used RX17 RX18 RX19 RX1A RX1B RX1C to Not used RX1F 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 Remote output RY is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations CY ER TEE mette E E e ee
278. ation using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station r Data link disorder station setting 1 r Expanded cyclic setting single x r of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name r Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 m Data link disorder station setting Expanded cyclic setting T Hold input data L Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Set the number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operational settings module 1 r Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations r Data link
279. ax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail consys autocont cz email info beijer no louis poulsen DENMARK MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 43 95 95 95 Fax 45 0 43 95 95 91 email IpiaGlpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 email infoGbeijer fi PROVENDOR OY Teljankatu 8 A 3 FIN 28130 Pori Phone 358 0 2 522 3300 Fax 358 0 2 522 3322 e mail FINLAND UTECO 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 mail uteco uteco gr GREECE Meltrade Automatika Kft HUNGARY 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu ul Sliczna 36 PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakow mopl pl Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Bd Lacul Tei nr 1 B RO 72301 Bucuresti 2 Phone 40 0 21 201 7147 Fax 40 0 21 201 7148 e mail sirius_t_s fx ro ACP Autocomp a s SLOVAKIA Chalupkova 7 SK 81109 Bratislava Phone 421 02 5292 22 54 55 Fax 421 02 5292 22 48 email info acp a
280. ber 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 300u Automatic update buffer memory When is turned ON the following example program reads 10 word data to DO or succeeding addresses from the automatic update buffer offset value of 100 4004 of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO XQ SW80 0 0 F e RIFR 4 K1 H100 DO K10 App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 6 RITO instruction The RITO instruction writes data to the automatic update buffer of the specified station Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data System user File res function module g Instruction Execution symbol condition Commana RITO eno Command RITO _ eno n m e m Set data Un number of the module 0 to FEH Intelligent device station number 1 to 64 Random access buffer specification Binary 16 bits The offset value of the automatic update buffer of the intelligent Between 0 and parameter setting value device station specified by the master station or the random access buffer Within the range of the D Start number of the de
281. ber setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWOO9B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO09C to SWOO9F Unable to operate the local station at the specified s the QJ61BT11 of function version A set to occu number of stations 2 or 3 stations Set the number of occupied stations to 1 or 4 e Check the sequence program Unable to stop data link the data link stop 580002 tumed on e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the data link stop result SW0045 e Check the sequence program e Check the cable connection visually or with a line test he corresponding station disconnected e Check the parameters for local station e Check the operation status of the PLC CPU in the corresponding station Are there any overlap station numbers Unable to restart data link Do the parameters for the number of modules and The remote station local station intelligent device station information match the settings of the Check the parameters station standby master station does not start up modules that do not start up Are there any overlap station numbers Check the station number setting Check that the station number of the local station Check the station number setting switches and including the
282. by E 7PROM parameter Do not use Yn6 and Yn8 for the Q series because the data link startup is automatically performed 8 PROGRAMMING 8 2 2 Details of the I O signals The following explains the on off timings and conditions of the I O signals shown in Table 8 1 1 Module error XnO This signal indicates whether the module is normal or faulty OFF Module normal ON Module error Module error Xn0 Module ready XnF 2 Host data link status Xn1 This signal indicates the data link status of the host station OFF Data link is stopped ON Data linking in progress 3 Other station data link status Xn3 This signal indicates the data link status of other stations remote local intelligent device and standby master stations The SB0080 signal has the same contents OFF All stations normal ON There is a faulty station the faulty station status is stored in SWO0080 to SW0083 The other station data link status Xn3 takes up to 6 seconds to turn on after a slave station connected to the master local station becomes faulty The time to turn ON differs according to the system configuration faulty status or other conditions 4 Module ready XnF This signal indicates whether the module is ready to operate a When the module reaches ready to operate status this signal turns ON automatically This signal turns OFF when either of the following conditions occurs 1 When an error i
283. cal station station number 1 11 37 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number eae LR De ette dee Nan I e EUR PO Ee a e Edu 11 39 3 Setting the network parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 11 40 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station numberib oa rr it E eee dte tutes 11 42 11 44 Greatirig ai Program ie 11 43 1 Master station 11 45 2 Local station program 11 45 11 4 5 Performing the data link secies iani iiia EAEN E Ri 11 46 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 11 46 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program ssseeeeeeeneeeenenns 11 47 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS 12 1to 12 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 1 to 13 21 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence 13 1 13 2 Troubleshooting Procedures When the ERR LED of the Master Station is Flashing or When Normal Data cannot be Sent Received During Data 13 8 13 3 Error Godes 1 anas Haec i e idee be Hi a ee ee dg
284. ccupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 Number of occupied stations 1 b X00 to XOF ul CIA E X00 to XOF YO00 to YOF Data sent from the master station to the remote input RX and remote register RWr in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station using the sequence program 2 Master station input Standby master station standby Station number 1 Station number 2 _ Number ofoccupied stations 1 Remote I O station Station number 3 o9 Number of occupied stations 1 Master station controlling Number of occupied stations 1 Remote Remote I Remote Remote I input RX output RY input RX output RY Remote station RYOO to RYOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station is used as input data by the standby master station when local stations are operating thus it does not need to be saved in another device 4 34 4 34 4 FUNCTION lS MELSEC Q b When the master station is faulty and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master statio
285. ce Transmission Maximum length etween T remote I O stations or remote in li intelligen i ion and between T branches and length of branches Idevied stations inte bs t denice Statio Lar cable between stations the adjacent station s 625kbps 100 m 328 1 ft 1 28 ft or 3 P No limit 30 cm 11 8 in or longer m 9 28 orlonger lo 156 kbps 500 m 1640 5 ft 2 m 6 56 ft or longer 3 The cable length of 1m 3 28 ft or longer is for a system configured only with remote I O stations and remote device stations 4 The cable length of 2m 6 56 ft or longer is for a system configuration that contains local stations and intelligent device stations Connection cable Terminal Terminal resistor Maximum length of main line not including the branch line length Distance between T branches 2 resistor 2 2 Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter R R R Indicates a remote I O station or a remote device station f Indicates a local station or an intelligent device station Length of branch line 8m 26 25 ft or shorter 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 7 Switch Settings This section explains how to set the module switches 7 7 1 Station number setting The following explains how to set the station numbers for the master station local station standby master station remo
286. ce for special relay SB to SBO O Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX Desire Unset Ioco parameters Setting the CC Link list Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting Ep Program HF Device comment 1 B Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 si PLC paramete Operational settinc Operational settings Type Master station Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start g El Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Device init All connect count 2 Remote input R 1000 Remote output R Y 1000 Remote reqister Awr wa Remote register ww w1000 Ver 2 Remote input FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRY Ver 2 Remote register R wr Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode settin Asynchronous Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial nterrupt setting 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setif itis needed
287. cedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX Y Execute perational Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write vw o 18 Execute Same asprevset AX gt 18 ame asprev set w R R 1 5 18 Same as prev set v 18 Same asprev set v z 3 10 10 10 10 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0u and bit 13 b13 Table 10 1 List of link special relays related to remote device station initial settings Availability Available X Not available Number Name Description Master D Offline Local station station Starts initial processing using the information registered during Remote device station the initialization procedure registration SB000D CRAP While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and BEO b13 initialization procedure raniols registers stops x registration instruction OFF No instruction ON Instructed SBOO5E Execution status of remote Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure 5E5n b14 device station i
288. cel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station Intelligent device sta Send buffer First module station Intelligent device sta Receive buffer number 4 tion number 4 ion Send buffer Intelligent device sta Receive buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device stati Second module station number 9 ion First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tool e tme osla sla ele ele soul eal l co es eps e e e pe c d S Jalal Program zl l le SLE eleg zl ml x B m Unset project No of boards in module 1 7 Boards Blank no setting 89 88 Program Device comment 1 E af Parameter Stattl 0 No
289. chronous method Encoding method NRZI method Varies according to the transmission rate See Section 3 1 1 3 1 2 ransmission path Bus RS 485 ransmission format Conforms to HDLC Error control system CRC X9 X X 1 CC Link dedicated cable CC Link dedicated high performance cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable Connection cable Automatic return function RAS function Slave station cut off function Error detection by the link special relay register Number of I O occupied points 32 points I O assignment Intelligent 32 points V DC internal current consumption 0 46A Weight 0 12 kg 1 Indicates the number of link points for remote net ver 1 mode For number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Refer to the table 3 2 x2 CC Link dedicated high performance cables cannot be used with other cables such as CC Link dedicated cables or Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables Also attach the terminating resister which matches the kind of the cable Refer to section 7 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Table 3 2 Number of link points for remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode Remote I O RX RY 8192 points Remote register RWw 2048 points master station remote device station local station intelligent device Maximum No of link points per system station standby master station Remote register RWr 2048 points remote device station local station
290. cknowledgment OFF Not executed status ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station temporary error invalid cancel instruction OFF Not executed ON Temporary error invalid station cancellation complete Indicates the line test request acknowledgment status OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only SBO000C Forced master 5E0u 6012 switching 2 B0020 5E2u b0 580040 Data link restart bE44 b0 acceptance 580044 Data link stop 4 b4 acceptance N Temporary error invalid acceptance status SB0048 BE4 b8 SB0049 BE4 b9 Temporary error invalid canceling complete status SB004B 5 4 b11 SB004C Line test acceptance 4 b12 status 8 27 8 27 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 3 5 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description ETE ome Master station Local station he lin mpletion status 580040 Line test complete dieses e de Test completi BE4 b13 status OFF Not executed Test complete Indicates the parameter information read request acknowledgment Parameter information SBAME read acknowledgment Satus GE4s b14 9 OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the compl
291. complete response to the master station 4 The devices specified with the RIWT instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module RMT Send buffer Device memory Buffer memory 4 Reading data from the buffer memory in a local station using the RIRD instruction 1 The data in the buffer memory of the local station is accessed 2 The data read is stored in the receive buffer of the master station 3 The data is stored in the device memory of the PLC CPU and the devices specified with the RIRD instruction are turned on Master station Local station PLC CPU Master module Device memory Buffer memory 3 Receive buffer Before performing data communication using transient transmission the sizes of the send and receive buffers must be set up in the buffer memory of the master station For more details on setting the sizes of the send and receive buffers see Section 6 2 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 4 Communication with the intelligent device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and intelligent device stations 1 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations by cyclic transmission Handshaking signals with intelligent device stations positioning complete positioning start etc are communicated usi
292. corresponding buffer memory addresses Master station Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number address 14 17 to 17BH 15 17Cu to 17DH 16 17 17FH 17 180 181 18 182 183 19 184 185 20 186 187 21 188 to 189 22 18 18 23 18 180 24 18 18 25 190 191 26 192 193 Local station Station Buffer memory number address 27 194 to 195 28 196H to 197 29 198H to 199H 30 19 to 19Bu 31 19CH to 19DH 32 19 to 19 33 1A0u to 1A1H 34 1 2 to 1A3H 35 1 4 to 1A5H 36 1A6H to 1A7H 37 1 8 to 1A9H 38 1 to 1ABH 39 1 to 1ADu Station Buffer memory number address 40 1AEn to 1AFH 41 1BOu to 1B1H 42 1 2 to 1B3H 43 1 4 to 1 5 44 1B6x to 1B7H 45 1 8 to 1B9H 46 1 to 1BBH 47 _ 1BCHto 1BDH 48 1 1BFH 49 1 0 1C1H 50 1C2uto 1C3H 51 1 4 to 1 5 52 1C6uto 1C7H Station number 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Buffer memory address 1 8 to 1 9 1CAu to 1 1 to 1CDu 1 to 1 1D0xH 1D1H 102 to 1D3H 104 to 105 106 107 108 109 10 to 10 10 1DDu 10 to 1 Table of station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory address FAH to FBH
293. cted at power on Master station overlapping error Hardware error detection A hardware error was detected Transient request overload error There are too many transient requests to BFFB the corresponding station BFFE C000 to CFFF Errors detected by the Ethernet module Error detected by the MELSECENTAH MELSECNET 10 network System 13 15 Review the attribute definition Check the designation of the target station number as well as the function version and software version of the target local station Set the range to within 1 to 100 when writing and 1 to 160 when reading Set the address to a multiple of 16 when accessing the bit device Set so that the number of processing points does not exceed the device range File register capacity setting The file register capacity was not Specify the file register error specified capacity Set to the intelli mode R i folio The mode setting of the remote control Check the mode specification emote control mode error Was incorect Secure a communication buffer area with a parameter Set the communication buffer size of the corresponding station within the range Make the communication buffer size of the corresponding station greater than the transient data length Check the cable and the corresponding station All stations stopped communications All stations error HERR PP Check the cables x during line test 1 Check the station
294. ction investigates the status of connected stations and checks for the overlapping numbers of number of occupied stations and whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is O exists in the system 1 Number of occupied station number overlap checking Checks whether or not occupied station numbers duplicate Example Local station station number 1 Station Station Station Station number of occupied stations 4 number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 Duplicate lt gt Remote device station station number 4 number of occupied stations 2 Station Statiori number 4 number 5 1 When there is an duplicate the ERR LED flashes and the duplicate status is stored SW0098 to SW009B Station number overlap status 2 Even if an overlap exists the data link continues with the remaining normally functioning stations 3 By correcting the switch setting to normal and resetting the PLC CPU of the master station the ERR LED is turned off and the data in SW0098 to SW009B can be cleared However if the starting station number overlaps it is excluded from the overlap checking Example Local station station number 1 number of occupied stations 4 Station Station Station Station Station Station number 1 number 2 number 3 number 4 number 5 number 6 Duplicate 4 5 Remote device station station number 1 number of occupied s
295. ction station count 2 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop E E Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Station information Remote device station initial settir Initial gs Interrupt setting gt Indispensable settings No setting Aleady set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set 2 Project 4 1 S Ready 02 Host station Ovewrte NUM 2 Set the automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Set the remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name
296. d the error code is stored in SDO me the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used 4100 When the instruction contains the data that cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 3 Program example When M6 turns ON 1 word data are written to D10 from the buffer memory address 111H of the intelligent device station No 63 AJ65BT R2 which is connected to the master module installed in the position of I O No X YOO to X YAF The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY4 completion device RX4 error code storage device RWr1 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO M11 is the RISEND instruction executing flag M6 M11 SW83 E MOV K63 D1 MOV H4 D2 MOV H111 D3 MOV Ki D4 MOV H4 D5 MOV H104 D6 MOV H1 D7 MOV K11 D10 GP RI SEND UO DO D10 D5 M40 App 22 App 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 5 RIFR instruction The RIFR instruction reads the data from the automatic update buffer of the specified station Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 Usable devices Internal device MELSECN
297. d data is to be stored E specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of p Within the range of the reading x Bit specified device D2 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Control data Set data ud the status when the instruction is complete 0 Completion status No error normal completion System othe than 0 code ne device station E fs 0 Access code n User Attribute code i See 1 and 2 Access code Attribute code Buff ee Specify the buffer memory start address or device start xd address or device j User number number 2 Number of points 1 to 480 Peet Specify the read data count in word units 11032 User App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q k 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station from which data will be read When the random access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be read Specify the buffer memory size of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter x3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A
298. d or not The following table indicates whether send receive of cyclic data is enabled or not Receive station QJ61BT11N Master station Ver 2 mode Additional mode Ver 2 i Ver 1 Ver 2 i Ver 1 Ver 2 i Ver 1 compatible compatible compatible i compatible compatible compatible area E area area i area area E area Ver 2 i boxes uel Master Additional 22 compatible area rn E as ba aman fannie atas ette E E eR muet station 1 compatible area mode Ver 1 compatible area Ver 2 compatible area Ver 1 compatible area Local Ver 2 compatible area i E station mode Ver 1 compatible area r 2 compatible area ch s made r 1 compatible area ER ee QJ61BT11 Local i E 77 Intligent device station device station Ver 1 compatible pf x od o 2 Ver 2 i x Remote device station compatidie Ver compatible ae ze Remote I O station Ver 1 compatible i Send station 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q QJ61BT11N QJ61BT11 Remote Local station station station 1 station station station Ver 2 i Ver 1 Ver 2 i Ver 1 compatible compatible compatibl compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible compatible area area area i x x
299. d the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate 1 2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m 1968 6 ft 2 5 Mbps 200 m 656 2 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 436 REDDE m 9 ft 5 Mbps 59 23 23 60 cm 23 62 in or more 1 m 3 28 ft or more 150 m 492 15 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 50 m 164 1 ft 59 cm 23 23 10 Mbps 60 cm 23 62 in to 80 262 5 ft 99 38 98 1 3 28 ft or more 100 328 1 ft CC Link dedicated high performance cable uses terminal resistor 130 ae Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate 1 2 i 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 900 m 2952 9 ft 2 5 Mbps Seni tri kar Mare 400 m 1312 4 ft 5 Mbps 160 m 524 96 ft Number of connected stations 1 to 32 100 m 328 1 ft Number of connected SU OT BI tO 1 m 3 28 ft or more 80 m 262 5 ft 39 15 35 stations 33 to 48 40 cm 15 75 in or more 100 m 328 1 ft 30 cm 11 81 in to 15 Number of connected 10 Mbps 20 m 65 52 ft 40 cm 15 75 in to 69 cm 27 17 in 30 m 98 43 ft 70 cm 27 56 in or more The cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations is within this range and if even one location is wired th
300. dditional mode is selected x3 Used when the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is selected Ver 2 compatible remote register 8 PROGRAMMING 8 3 2 Buffer memory details MELSEC Q The following explains the details of items shown in Table 8 2 Buffer Memory List in Section 8 3 1 1 Parameter information area Stores the parameter settings Do not perform write to the parameter information area Doing so may cause an error Table 8 3 Parameter Information Area List 1 3 Item Description Number of connected modules Number of retries Number of automatic return modules Standby master station specification Operation specification when CPU is down Scan mode specification Delay time setting Reserved station specification Error invalid station specification Stores the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that are connected to the master station including reserved stations Default value 64 modules Storage area 1 to 64 modules Stores the number of retries when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Storage area 1 to 7 times Stores the total number of remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station that can be returned to system operation by a single link scan Default value 1 module Storage area 1 to 10 modules Stores the station number
301. ding module malfunction x2 Incomplete match Occupies 2 stations or more Station number n 1 Station number n Turn on the ower again turn on the reset switch Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Occupies 1 station or more Station number n Or Station Station number n 1 station or more 3 Complete match Occupies 1 station or more Station Station number n n 1 Station Station number m m 1 Occupies 1 station or more 13 9 Station Station ae number m 1 number 1 Occupies 1 Occupies 2 stations or more 13 9 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN a A MELSEC Q 13 3 Error Codes Table 13 1 lists the error codes that are stored in the link special registers SW When the standby master station is operating as the master station the detectability is identical to that of the master station When the standby master is operating as a local station the detectability is identical to that of the local station Table 13 1 Error code list 1 6 Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectabilit hexadecimal Master station Local station Handle by referring to the 4000 to Errors detected by the PLC troubleshooting section of CPU 4FFF CPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Handle by referring to the 7000 to Errors detected by serial troubleshoot
302. double Address Remote input RX 4000 MK d to xo _ RY F to RYO 42004 1 40014 RX1F to RX 10 RY1F to RY10 42019 40024 RX2F to 20 RY2F to RY20 42029 40034 RX3F to RX 30 RY to RY30 4203 40044 RX 4F to RX 40 RY to RY 40 4204s 4005 RX SF to RX 50 RY 5F to RY50 4205 4006 Station _ 4007 4206 4207 Station RX 6F to RX 60 RX 7F to RX 70 RY 6F to RY 60 RY 7F to RY 70 M Station number 2 4008 8 to RX 80 RY 8F to RY80 42084 number 2 40091 RX9F to RX 90 RY 9F to RY90 4209 400A4 RX AF to RX AO RY AF to RYAO 420A 400B RX BF to RX BO RY BF to RYBO 420 400 RXCF to RX CO i i RY CF to RY CO 420C 400D4 RX DF to RX DO RY DF to RY DO 42009 wo FY Aveo 4206 to to to to 41FCu RX1FCF to RX1FCO RY1FCF to RY1FCO 4 41FDu RX1FDF to RX1FDO RY1FDF to RY1FDO 43FD 41 RX1FEF to RX1FEO RY1FEF to RY1FEO 4 41 RX1FFF to RXTFFO RY1FFF to RY1FFO 43FFu 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The output status to the remote I O station remote device station RY and all local stations RX is stored When 1 station is occupied
303. ds are used per station Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote device station Station number 1 occupies 1 station Master station Address Remote register RWw Remote register RWr Address 1 0 RWw 0 RWr 0 2 0 For station 1Etw RWri For station number 1 1 2 RWw 2 RWr 2 2 2 number 1 E RWw3 Rww38 7 2 1 4 RWw 4 RWr 4 2E4 For station 1E5 RWw 5 Wr 5 2E54 For station number2 1E6 RWw 6 RWr 6 2E6y number 2 I RWw 7 RW 7 2 7 1 8 RWw 8 RWr 8 2 8 Forstation TEA RWw9 RWr9 0 2E9 For station number3 1EA RWw A Tf ro ooa ar P d RWrA 2 f number 3 1EB F RWB ee a tiu RW B 2EBu 1 RWw RWr 2ECu For station 1808 RWwD RWrD 2Eb orstation jnumber4 EE RWw E RWr E 2 number 4 1 RWwF 7 2 1 0 RWw 10 RWr 10 2F0 For station 1 1 RWwit Writ 2Ft For station inumber5 F2 RWw 12 RWr 12 2F2 number 5 1839 Rwa c d RWr13 2F3 to to to to 20 RWw RWr Forstation 2DD amp RWwFD RWrFD 1300 For station number 64 2 RWw FE RWr FE number 64 2DFu _ RWwFF bo a RWrFF 8DF 8 14 8 14 8 PROGRAMMING Master station
304. e The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Quadruple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 1 station which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 2 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 3 stations which are set to Octuple The number of ver 2 compatible stations that occupy 4 stations which are set to Octuple A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 T B Number of remote device stations lt 42 Condition 4 16 X A 54 x 88 x C x 2304 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 1 module for each system 26 1 B 1 Master station Local station Local station Local station QJ61BT11N A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 1 QJ61BT11 AJ61QBT11 AJ61BT11 ED a CC Link dedicated cable QJ61BT11N Terminal resistor required E DAL Eu PEE Terminal resistor required CC Linkdedicated cable i i a i 26 42 64 A A N SN Intelligent device sta
305. e see Sections 7 3 and 7 7 Station number setting see Section 7 7 1 Transmission rate mode setting see Section 7 7 2 Turn the power ON To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page When performing When performing parameter setting with parameter setting with GX Developer dedicated instruction Set the parameters with the GX Developer see Section 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 1 When remote net ver 1 mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 3 1 and 6 3 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 3 2 and 6 3 4 2 When remote net ver 2 mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 4 1 and 6 4 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 4 2 and 6 4 4 3 When remote net additional mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 5 1 and 6 5 3 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 5 2 and 6 5 4 4 When remote I O net mode is used a Network parameters see Sections 6 6 1 b Automatic refresh parameters see Sections 6 6 2 Register the parameters to the PLC CPU Register PLC parameter program to the PLC CPU AA Set the PLC CPU RESET switch from RESET to Middle position or turn the power from OFF to ON Set the PLC parameter with the GX Developer see Section 6 7 Create a program in which the RLPASET instruction is used see Section 6 7 Set the PLC CPU
306. e see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 5 Master station lt local station Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX lt local station RY This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON OFF until the master station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple pou ae ie 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan
307. e Condition to ON Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 00 and the Write Data to 0003 Setting the second condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 8 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STA
308. e RLPASET instruction according to the procedure below 1 Clear the settings of the network parameters and The RLPASET instruction was executed bad parameters one for a module whose parameters have ule using been set by GX Developer per 2 Set the type of I O The parameter setting was changed assignment setting in GX without turning the power supply to the 9 g Developer to intelli Hee aa ff and back on or resetting 3 Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer to 01004 4 Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU Station number switch setting The station number switch was outside of Set the station number switch error the setting range within the setting range m cred n Set the transmission rate Transmission rate setting The transmission rate setting switch is xe B383 switch setting error set outside the range setting Switch to within the setting range 13 11 13 11 Network startup setting mode error B381 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 3 6 Error cod Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability Master station Local station The station number including the Station number setting error number of occupied stations of the Set within the range of 1 to parameter station information parameters was set to 404
309. e maximum overall cable distance will be as indicated above stations 49 to 64 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Example When the transmission rate is 10 Mbps and 43 remote I O stations and remote device stations are connected using the CC Link dedicated high performance cable because the cable connecting the second and third stations is 35 cm 13 78 in the maximum overall cable distance will be 80 cm 31 5 First Second Third 4th 43th M i i Remote I O station Remote device Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote device station station 1 m 3 28 ft 50 cm 19 69 in 35 cm 13 78 in 50 cm 19 69 in 2 Fora system consisting of remote I O stations remote device stations local stations and intelligent device stations Local station Local station or intelligent or intelligent device station device station Master station Remote I O station Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station 2 2 2 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations x2 Cable length between the master station or the local or intelligent device station and the adjacent stations CC Link dedicated cable uses terminal resistor 110 Station to station cable length Maximum overall cable Transmission rate 1 2 156 kbps 1200 m 3937 2 ft 625 kbps 30 cm 11 81 in or more 600 m
310. e points to within the setting range Change the station number to within the setting range Check the sequence program Change the setting of the interlock signal storage device to within the setting range Check the contents of the request as well as the target station number Wait a while and then send the requests transient overload status Wait a while and then send the requests transient overload status Wait a while and then retransmit Wai retransmit a while and then Wait a while and then retransmit transient overloaded status Check if the target station is an intelligent device station Check the requested module and cables Set to the remote net mode Check the transmission destination station number or change to host connection Wait a while and then retransmit An access code that does not exist was Access code error d Use the correct access code used non existing access code attribute was Set a correct access Access code setting error set code attribute The number of data points were out of Set the number of data points Data points error vae range to within 1 to 960 bytes 13 14 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 6 6 Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station The attribute definition was invalid Alternatively transient tra
311. e procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Set the refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 6 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When seiting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below MELSOFT series GX Dovoloner Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list ce inc Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program Device comment 9 B Parameter Start 1 0 No 19 PLC paramete Operational settinc Operational settings 2 Network parar Type Master station 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start T EL Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode X Device init All connect count 2 Remote input FiX 1000 Remote output R Y 1000 Remote reqister Awr wa Remote register ww W100 Ver 2 Remote input FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRY Ver 2 Remote register R wr Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station
312. e station number turns on 1 Used in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode x2 When the setting is 8 points 8 points reserved the station numbers are stored into both the 8 point remote I O station setting and 16 point remote I O station setting 2 Remote input RX and remote output RY Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net additional mode is selected a Master station remote I O station remote device station local station 1 Master station The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and local station RY is stored Two words are used per station 2 Local station Data to be sent to the master station is stored in the remote output RY of the address corresponding to the host station number The input status from the remote I O station remote device station RX and other local station is stored Two words are used per station The last two bits cannot be used for communication between the master station and the local station In the example below RY9E and RY9F cannot be used Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Remote I O station Master station Station number 1 occupies 1 station 1 1 1 1 I 1 T 1 1 1 i Address Remote input RX P og MEE Remote output RY Address 1 1 I For station 0 RX FtoRXO E Jo X00 160
313. e when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw remote device station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the CPU device until the data for the remote device station is changed Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 3 1 1 5 33 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LSXm SM value when fractions following
314. ea el eg Bla S 218 ale 2151 elel Ele cs xke soul wll fepe e ss s be e La Program E rS fra Sel spe een 8 x HE Unser prec No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 2 Program i6 E Device comment E af Parameter Stattl 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 27 Network Master station si E Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start v z 2 Device memory Mode Remote nellVer 2 mode z 18 Device int connect count 5 Remote Remote output AY Remote reaister AW Remote registeR Ww 2 Remote 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote register R Wil Ver 2 Remote reaiste RWw Special relay SB Special registe SW Retry count 5 Automatic reconnection station count 2 Stand by master station No down select Stop z z z Scan mode setting Asynchronous E Delay infomation setting 0 Station information setting Remote device station initial setti Interrupt setting TI o ej Indispensable settings No setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set aa Ready 002 H Host station Ovewrte NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Modules for the
315. ecking the Module Status Hardware Test cccceceeseseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseesaeeeeesaesaeseseaeeaesaeeneseeneates 7 7 7 5 Connecting the Modules Using the CC Link Dedicated Cables sse 7 9 TON Wiring CHECK dac 7 10 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable sse 7 11 7 6 1 T Branch system configuration ssesssssssssesseeseeeeenee 7 11 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list seen 7 12 A 8 A 8 FoF Switch Settings ee nene ettet tete e T iaa aa anaa DR re Pete enda 7 13 A Station number setting euet aaa ceti 7 13 7 7 2 Transmission rate and mode settings 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeseeseeseeteaeteeeseneeeeeeaaes 7 14 7 8 Checking the Connection Status Line Test 7 15 8 1 Precautions on Programming naknir nir Ai REENA a A eA nennen trennen retener trennen nnns 8 1 8 2 0 Signals for the PEG CPU i roc ELI t 8 2 9 2 4 O sigrial ten eet ro eee Oen Ere EI rra f ae 8 2 8 2 2 Details of the l O sigrials a aie n EGRE 8 4 823 Butter iate ento que pL d t ep MO ever ATL e enean 8 5 8 3 1 Buffer mem
316. ect from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 1to7 Retry count Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1 to 10 count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank Stop conti PLC down select Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting M L B D W Y i M L B T C ST D W RWr i L B D W i L B T C ST D W ister RWr i L B D ister RWw L B T C ST D W L B D W R SW L B D W R ANA Standby master station No Scan mode setting 11 24 11 24 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below ME SNE GX Developer Unset proj t parameters Setting the CC Link list MELSEC Q SU sl Unset project 5 Program Device comment Parameter 1a PLC paramete Network 12 Remote pass Device memory Device init 11 25 No of boards in module 1 Blank no setting 1 0000 Start 1 0 No Operational settings Operational settin Type Local station Master station data link type Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count Remote input R
317. ection 5 1 Constant iT tee gps seh SL x1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME Example 2 Local sta This indica station unti MELSEC Q When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 72 x 1 13 0 5 5 12 1 X 1 13 66 15 66 2 ms tion master station tes the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the local a response from the master station is received Expression Maximum a RIRD value instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 72 1 1 13 SM ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time LS BC QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant a e 8 SM Master station sequence program scan time xq Example b RIWT 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 72 1x 1 13 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 72 E 1 13 20545X 1 1X 1
318. ed station 0 points setting has been Change the mode to the remote net Re j i i made in the remote net additional mode Reserved station 0 points setting has been made for the station that is not a reserved station 8 16 points setting has been made for the station other than the remote I O station Make 8 16 points setting for the same remote station In the remote net additional mode the maximum station number of ver 1 compatible slave stations is greater than the minimum station number of ver 2 compatible slave stations in the network parameter setting Model illegal has occurred between the master and local standby master stations e The mode differs between the master and standby master stations e The local station is set to the remote net additional mode and the master station is set to other than the remote net additional mode The local station is in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode and the master station is in the remote net ver 1 mode At the time of parameter setting with dedicated instruction an illegal value has been set to switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting At the time of parameter setting with dedicated instruction the station type of other than the remote I O station has been set in the remote I O net mode In the remote net Ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode total points for remote stations set in the station information h
319. eed thus shortening the link scan time The table below lists the link scan times for both the remote I O net mode and the remote net mode Table 4 7 Number of stations Remote I O net mode Remote net mode 0 61 ms 1 2 ms 1 61 ms 2 3 ms 2 94 ms 3 8 ms Transmission rate at 10 Mbps Setting method Set the remote I O net mode in Mode of the network parameters using GX Developer For more details on the setting see Section 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 6 Creating a program that contains modules to be added in the future Reserved station function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and a standby master station that are not actually connected but to be connected in the future from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations When the master station is placed in the remote net ver 2 mode points for reserved stations can be set to 0 Use GX Developer to set 0 points for reserved stations Although dedicated instructions are not usable for this setting if reading from or writing to reserved stations is disabled when refreshing cyclic data with FROM TO instructions the same result is obtained Station that will be connected in the future Reserved station Station number 4 1 1 i Local station i i ien occupies Reserved station Station number 1 Station number3 4stations Station number8 Station nu
320. eign objects such as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation e Use a dedicated cable as specified by the manufacturer for the CC Link system If a cable other than the one specified by the manufacturer is used the performance of the CC Link system cannot be guaranteed Also follow the specifications listed in Chapter 3 for the overall cable distance and the station to station cable length If wiring is done other than as specified accurate transmission of data cannot be guaranteed e Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e Do not install the control lines together with the communication cables or bring them close to each other Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise e Be sure to fix the wires or cables by ducts or clamps when connecting them to the module When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is stil
321. emote I O net mode 6 43 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net additional MOOG i ier 6 29 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 mode 6 5 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 mode 6 17 Example of parameter setting with dedicated 6 48 Execution status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 28 External dimensions diagram App 1 Index 1 F Faulty stations are generated depending on transmission 13 7 Faulty stations cannot be detected 19 7 Forced master switching 8 27 Forced master switching instruction result 8 33 Forced master switching request acknowledgement 8 28 Forced master switching request complete 8 28 1 L information 13 20 Handling precautions 7 3 Hardware test 7 7 Host line 8 30 Host mater standby master operation eco e cte ais 8 30 Host mode sees 8 28 Host monitoring sees 13 16 Host station
322. endix 2 5 Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 Writes data into the automatic update buffer of Intelligent device station Appendix 2 4 the specified station Available for modules that have the automatic update buffer e g AJ65BT R2 Appendix 2 6 Sets the network parameters for the master Master station RLPASET Appendix 2 7 station and starts up the data link Execute the dedicated instructions while the data link is being performed If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 1 RIRD instruction The RIRD instruction reads the data for the specified points from the buffer memory or the PLC CPU device of the specified station Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Ed gre user File Direct JO O function register register Other module Bit Word K H S Instruction Execution diti symbol condition Carmen RIRD G RIRD Un S D1 D2 Command ABD m Set data Un Start number of the module 0 to FEH Binary 16 bits Avid Within the range of the S Start number of the device in which control data is stored A specified device f EO Device name Within the range of the D1 Start number of the device to which rea
323. ent device module to be used 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 Processing Time for Dedicated Instructions This indicates the dedicated instruction processing time the time from the moment an instruction is issued until a response is received 5 3 1 Master station lt local station 1 Master station local station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master station until a response from the local station is received Expression Maximum value a RIRD instruction OT LS X BC read points 16 16 ei 1 067 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see Section 5 1 Constant ie jue puse 1 poe SL x1 Local station sequence program scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 x 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 X 12 3 x 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms RIWTi nstruction OT 15 BC write points 16 72 1 x 1 13 SL ms OT LS BC QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU_ 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms Link scan time see S
324. ent even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECT
325. er RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR MLB T ST Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote register RW Ver 2 Remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW 1to7 R etry count Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to10 count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank PLC down select p eo Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting oneu Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Seto Wl Standby master station No 11 21 11 21 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below ME SNE GX Developer Unset proj t parameters Setting the CC Link list MELSEC Q SU sl Unset project 5 Program Device comment Parameter 1a PLC paramete Network 12 Remote pass Device memory Device init 11 22 No of boards in module 1 Blank no setting 1 0000 Start 1 0 No Operational settings Operational settin Type Local station Master station data link type Mode Remote net
326. er 4 The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas Local station station number 4 Remote output RY Station number 11 4 1 Input Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Remote input RX Station number 2 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 Station number 4 Remote output RY Remote input RX Remote input RX Station number 1 Output Station number 1 Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Remote register RWw Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 MELSEC Q Target areas for clear hold Areas retained regardless of the setting The remote input RX in the master station and the remote input RX and remote output RY in local stations either clear or retain data from faulty stations according to the setting The remote register RWr in the master station and the remote register RWw and remote register RWr in local stations retain data from faulty stations regardless of the setting When the data link faulty station is set as an error invalid station input data remote input RX from that station is retained regardless of the setting 2 Setting method Set the Operational setting value in the network parameters using
327. er not specified in the parameter was set with the invalid Set the Head station number of Invalid station specified error station specification parameter the module B38D parameter lt Example of other than head station Do not specify any of the number gt stations not specified with the A bit other than that for station number 5 parameter was ON for a module occupies 4 stations station numbers 5 to 8 Communication buffer The total size of the communication Set the total size of the B38E buffers in the station information communication buffers to 4 k assignment error parameter parameter exceeded 4 k words words or less Automatic update butter The total size of the automatic update Set the total size of the B38F P buffer in the station information automatic update buffer to 4 k assignment error parameter 9 p parameter exceeded 4 k words words or less Standby master station The standby master station parameter Specify thg standby master B390 station to a value within the specification error parameter set to a value other than 1 to 64 H range from 1 to 64 Retry count setting error The retry count parameter was set to a Set a value within the range B391 i i parameter value other than 1 to 7 from 1 to 7 The operation when the CPU is down Operation when CPU is down Nati B392 specified error parameter specification parameter was set to a Set or 1 P value other th
328. er on Turn on the power Set the station number Switches properly Turn on the power again turn on the reset switch Is there a POWER LED on the module Corresponding module malfunction Is the supplied power within the specified range Set the supplied voltage to within the specified range Is the RD LED lit Is the communication cable wired properly Correct the communication cable wiring Corresponding module malfunction gt v v v To next page To next page To next page x1 Check for short circuits reversed connection disconnection terminal resistors FG connection overall distance and distance between stations 13 8 13 8 13 TROUBLESHOOTING From previous page umber switches set properly Are there any station numbers station number switch From previous page Is the SD LED lit flashing Is the transmission rate setting correct MELSEC Q From previous page yY Set the correct transmission rate v Is the communication cable wired properly 1 Y Wire the communication cable properly Corresponding module malfunction baud rate switch Are the station that are completely matched 3 Set the correct Y station numbers The master station already exists Reset the module to operate as the standby master station Correspon
329. er station Master station Master station Duplex function Master station Duplex function Type Local station s Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count medu Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorzR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorzR i O Remote register RW Device name Select fom M L B D W RorZR Jo o o ooo Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorzR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorzR i O Ver 2 Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W RorZR J o o oo Ver 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorzR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SBorZR_ Special register SW Device name Select fom M L B D W R SWorzR i O 1to7 Retry count Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to 10 count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master
330. et Indispensable settings No setting Already set Setif it is needed Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwite SCRL 11 26 11 26 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 4 Creating a program This section shows the program to be used for communication between the master and local stations The following diagram shows the relationship between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Master station Master station PLC CPU Ver 2 compatible buffer memory o Y1000 o Y1010 RYOOF to RY000 RYO1F to RY010 o Y1020 o Y1030 RYO2F to RY020 RYOSF to RYOSO o Y1040 o Y1050 o Y1060 RYOAF to RYO40 RYOSF to RY050 RYO6F to RYO60 to Y1070 o Y1080 RYO7F to RYO70 RYO8F to RYO80 o Y1090 o Y10A0 RYO9F to RYO90 RYOAF to RYOAO Y10BF to Y10BO RYOBF to RYOBO Y10CF to Y10CO 1000 te 11 27 RYOCF to RYOCO RYODF to RYODO Ver 1compatible local station station number 1 occupies 4 stations RYOOF to RYOOO Local station PLC CPU Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 RYO1F to RYO10 RYO2F to RYO20 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to
331. etion status of the parameter information read Parameter information SEDE read completion request 4 b15 P OFF Not executed status ON Test complete Indicates the offline test execution status Offline test status OFF Not executed ON In progress Indicates the acknowledgment status of the standby master station when it has received a master switching request from the line OFF Not acknowledged ON Request acknowledged Indicates whether or not the switching from the standby master SB005B Master switching station to master station is complete 5 5 b11 request complete OFF Not complete ON Complete Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request has been Forced master SB005C Switching request acknowledged 5 b12 sd OFF Not acknowledged 9 ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether or not a forced master switching request is Forced master SB005D complete SES b13 P ae 3 OFF Not complete ON Complete 580050 5 5 Master switching request acknowledgment SB005A 5 b10 Execution status of Indicates the execution status of the initialization procedure remote device station OFF Not executed SB005E 5 5 014 i initialization procedure ON Being executed Indicates the completion status of the initialization procedure Completion status of remote device station PRU Peo bt initialization procedure OFF No
332. etting Operational settings 15 Network Type Local station E E 5 Remote pass Master station data link type i z 18 Device memory Mode Remote net Addtional mode 18 Device init All connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEix 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote register w Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special registei SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset E Ready 1002 Host station Ove NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in Boards for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the Para
333. eveloper or the dedicated instruction Data link restart SB0000 was executed Fxecute Data link restart Data link restart error for the station that was performing a data Ed E ne link as stopped a data link wit Data link stop SB0002 Data link stop SB0002 was executed Execute Data link stop B311 Data link stop error for the station that had stopped a data SB0002 for the station that is link performing a data link Forced master to standby master f switching 5 000 was executed in the See eee system where no standby master station Forced master to standb exists or in the system where the standby m ster Switchin SBO00C master station had become faulty 9 i Forced master to standby master After starting the data link of the switching SBOO0C was executed in the standby master station execute System where all stations had become Forced master to standby faulty master switching SBOO0C Execute Forced master to standby master switching SBO000C for the master station Standby master station absence error All station fault error Forced master to standby master Switching target error switching SBOO0C was executed for any station other than the master station Forced master switching SB000C was Forced master station switching instructed again while the master station Check ON OFF of Forced error was being switched to the standby master switching SBOOO0C master station Use th
334. evice station Ver 2 compatible Station number 8 Occupies 1 station Remote input RX gt Station number 1 Station number 2 R RY L emote output i Station number 3 1 Station number 1 5 Output compatible Station number 2 i remote Gon nimber 2 output RY lation number 4 Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Remote output RY POINT 1 Set the station numbers of the slave stations to be added after the last station number used in the existing system In the above example the slave stations are added to and after station No 4 since the existing system uses up to station No 3 2 When the ver 2 compatible slave station is added or deleted the refresh devices of the PLC CPU will vary by the number of points set to the added or deleted slave station in the slave stations of the station numbers after the added or deleted slave station Confirm the varying number of points in Table 4 8 3 In the remote net additional mode the ver 2 compatible slave station must be placed in the latter half as described in 1 When there is a possibility that ver 1 compatible slave stations will be added in the future in the remote net additional mode set multiple reserved stations after the ver 1 compatible slave station to ensure ease of expanding the system 4
335. evice using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W1000 e Set the special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO f Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the
336. f station numbers and corresponding buffer memory addresses Station Buffer memory number 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 address FAH to FBu to FDH FEH to FFH 100H to 101H 102 to 103H 104 to 105 106 107 108 109 10 to 10BH 10 to 100 10 to10FH 110 111 112 113 Local station Station Buffer memory number address 17 to 17B 17 to 17D 17 17F 180 181 182 to 183 184 to 185 186 to 187 188 189 18 18 18 180 18 18 190 191 192 to 193 Station Buffer memory number 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 address 114 115 116 117 118 119 11 11 11 110 11 11 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 12 12 12 120 Station Buffer memory number address H to 195H H to 197H H to 199H H to 19BH H to 19DH H to 19FH H to 1A1H H to 1A3H H to 1A5H H to 1A7H H to 1A9H H to 1ABH H to 1ADH Station Buffer memory number 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Station Buffer memory address 12 to 12FH 130H to 131H 132H to 133H 134 to 135H 136 to 137H 138H to 139H 1 to 13BH 13CH to 13DH 13EH to 13FH 140 141H 142
337. f stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Unable to receive data to the remote register RWr in Check the parameters Is the corresponding station set as a reserved a remote device station station Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO09B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Are there any overlap station numbers Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written from the correct address of remote register RWw buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter inform
338. f the master station turns on Terminal resistor Ver oy e local station station number 1 Occupies 4 stations Q61P A1 Ver 2compatible local station station number 5 Occupies 2 stations double Q61P A1 Q25HCPU QU61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor 11 47 11 47 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS The communication method between the master station and intelligent device stations is different for each intelligent device station For more details on the communication between the master station and intelligent device stations see the manual for each intelligent device station 12 12 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 13 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the details of the problems that may occur in the CC Link System and lists the check items and procedures for each of the possible problems 13 1 Verification upon Problem Occurrence The following lists the details of the check items and procedures for each problem occurrence Description of problem Check item Check procedure e Check the cable connection visually or with a line 1 3 Are there any disconnected cables test e Check the line status SW0090 Connect the suppl
339. f the master local station 1 Remote net ver 1 mode remote net ver 2 mode Expression 1 KM2 x BA SB RWr SW ms gE KM3 x PX RWw RWr SW RX Points of the remote input RX refreshed by the master local station RY Points of the remote output RY refreshed by the master local station RWw Points of the remote register RWw refreshed by the master local station RWr Points of the remote register RWr refreshed by the master local station SB Points of the link special relay SB refreshed by the master local station SW Points of the link special register SW refreshed by the master local station aE File register R ZR transfer time on memory card only when file register is used KM1 Constant 1 Master station Q00JCPU QU0CPU lgucPU ts QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU 0 16 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU 2 Local station Q00JCPU Q00CPU QO1CPU QO2CPU QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU 0 23 Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q KM2 KM3 Constant 1 When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit KM2 KM3 10 x10 aseru Cio acru Cid Css acru Cig Q02CPU 0 48 0 32 QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 43 0 14 Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU 2 When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit 2 KM3 x10 x10 ascu Cd
340. ffer memory capacity of the local station or the intelligent device station Also specify the send buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter 3 When the counterpart PLC CPU is other than QCPU mode QCPU A mode QnACPU AnUCPU and writes the PLC CPU device the setting range will be 1 to 10 words 1 Buffer memory in the CC Link Buffer Memory contents Buffer in the intelligent device station Buffers in master station and local Remote output 22H station Remote register 24H Link special relay 6n Link special register gan 2 Device memory in the PLC CPU Device contents Name m EU Unit Access code Attribute code or m Output relay Y Hexadedmal _ 02 Decima 83 Hexadecimal 23 Decima Dema oas Timer present value Lo poems 0 Retentive timer contac sT Dema 89 Retentive timer coil sr Decimal 8 Retentive timer present value Sr LS poems so Decimal t Counter coil Decimal 12 Counter present value O Decimal im Data register Decimal o4 ESO 38 O Decimal Speca Hemden gt Special ink register Sw __ Special relay o j bema 4 Specialregister so o pema sm Devices other than shown above cannot be accessed When accessing a bit dev
341. formance cables cannot be used with other cables such as CC Link dedicated cables or Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables If used together correct data transmission will not be guaranteed Connect the shielded wire of the CC Link dedicated cable to SLD of each module and ground both ends of the shielded wire using D type grounding via FG The SLD and FG are connected within the module 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK 7 5 1 Wiring check MELSEC Q The following explains how to check the wiring status between the remote I O and external devices Example of wiring check Specify the Remote input RX for the master station to X1000 and the Remote output RY to Y1000 with the GX Developer Master station Remote I O station Remote station Station number 1 number Station number 2 number of occupied stations 1 of occupied stations 1 AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTB1 16T Input module Output module a Checking the wiring between the input module and an external device 1 Turn ON the switch corresponding to the external device which is connected to the input module of station number 1 2 Using GX Developer set X1000 in the Device field by choosing Online Monitor Device batch and then click on Start monitor 3 If X1000 is ON the connection between the input module and external device has been properly performed b Checking the wiring between
342. g executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data written to the correct address of remote e Check the sequence program output RY buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is data read from the correct address of remote input RX buffer memory of the local station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 e Check the station number setting e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B e Check the loading status SW0069 e Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match 51 0098 to SWO09B e Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F e Check the LED display on the corresponding local Is the corresponding local station performing data station link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 I
343. gal Reserved RI Invalid HERE Eee Loop test Target station All stations 1 54 C Selected stationNo When conducting a loop test do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0n 608H 13 19 13 19 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 4 H W Information This function displays the operation and setting statuses of the master module local modules and standby master module a Operating procedure Diagnostics System monitor 1 Select the QJ61BT11N 2 Click the button 3 Click the button Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QJB1BT11N Product information 050320000000000 B 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base Slot Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status r Error Display Display format wo Error Present Error No Error ene HEX Eror History DEC The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under HAW Information art monitor f Close b Product information The function version and serial No are displayed as follows 050320000000000 B Function Version B Serial No first 5 digits 13 20 13 20 1
344. ghts or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS seite rn to se i ora tata misdaad eee ieee eee A 1 REVISIONS 1 aaae ae ate fe tea ina dte ti di utut dva itat ene A 5 INTRODUCTIONS x ertt mre TI eot a Du det ote teda e n a A 6 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction c ceccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaees A 13 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations c ceccecesececeeseeseeseceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeeeeaneaes A 14 Product Components c cceccececeseeceeceeeeeeeaeceeceeeeaecaeceesaeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaesaeeaesaecaeseaesaesaesaeseaesaseeseaeeaeeeseaeeateas A 16 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 12 INEO EAE AEE 1 1 1 2 Compatibility with CC Link eese
345. gister RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of the intelligent device station stored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station occupies 4 stations a Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Address Description RWr0 RWr1 RWr2 RWr3 RWr4 Single axis valid M code RWr5 Single axis error number Single axis present feed value Single axis feed speed RWr6 Single axis warning number RWr7 Single axis operating status t 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Communication between the master and intelligent device stations by transient transmission Transient transmission sends and receives data in 1 1 mode by specifying the opposite party at an arbitrary timing Writing data to the buffer memory in the intelligent device station using the RIWT instruction 1 Data to be written to the buffer memory in an intelligent device station is stored in the send buffer in the master module 2 The data is written to the buffer memory in the intelligent device 3 The intelligent device returns a writing complete response to the master st
346. hat cannot be used When the number of data set to be used exceeds the allowable range 4101 Or when the storage data or constants of the device specified with the instruction exceeds the allowable range 3 Program example When M1 turns 11 word data in the buffer memory address 400 and later of the intelligent device station No 63 AJ65BT R2 which is connected to the master module installed in the position of I O No X YOO to X Y1F are read out to the area starting from D40 The settings of the interlock signal storage device are as follows request device RY2 completion device RX2 error code storage device RWr2 and completion mode 1 Also set the link special register SW refresh device to SWO M10 is the RIRCV instruction executing flag Mi M10 SW83 E Mov K63 D11 MOV H4 p12 MOV H400 D13 MOV K11 D14 MOV H2 D15 MOV H202 D16 MOV H1 D17 GP RIRCV uo D10 D40 015 M20 App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 4 RISEND instruction The RISEND instruction automatically performs handshaking with an intelligent device station and writes data to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent device station Available for modules that have handshake signals e g AJ65BT R2 Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data E user File E function register Other SER i dally Instruction Execution bol diti symbol condition RISEND I
347. have not been set or the ae settings are not as indicated in the following B6 RES table the RLPASET instruction is completed 8 89 10 3 3 with an error 11 100 10 ae In this case the QJ61BT11N with the smallest SD start I O number seen from the PLC CPU starts CC Link automatically Do not make any settings for other than switches 3 4 Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if settings other than for switch 4 are made Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Remote net ver 2 mode ow 0100 a End Cancel Remote net additional mode a is 0100 0100 Remote net ver 1 mode e 0000 or blank 0100 MEE 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 2 Program example Refresh of SB SW SM400 4 SB0040 to SB01FF are read 0 FROM HO H5E4 K4SB40 K28 E to 580040 to SBO1FF FRON uo H640 swao Kade SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Parameter setting M402 SB6E H s ET M300 Instruct to set parameters RLPASET instruction Control data 4300 H 35 mov KO 0 Clear complete status Mov K15 1 All setting data Valid mov K3 D2 7 Number of connected modules involved in communication mov K3 D3 Number of retries 3 times wov KI D4 4 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Operation specification when wv 0 D CPU is down stop mov D6 4 Scan mode specification
348. he master module 4 The master module turns the remote output RY specified in S2 0 ON When the remote input specified in S 1 turns OFF from ON the remote output specified in S2 0 turns OFF 5 Data read out from the specified station are stored in the device specified in D1 and subsequent devices and a device specified in D2 turns ON App 15 App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b The RIRCV instruction can be executed to multiple intelligent device stations simultaneously Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other instructions for transient transmission refer to Appendix 2 is not allowed to the same intelligent device station Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is completed c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIRCV instruction the completion device D2 and the status display device at completion D2 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRCV instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRCV instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program
349. hen replaced in its original position without turning the power off when the master station is controlling the data link both the master and standby master stations operate as master stations An error occurs since the data link control has been transferred to the standby master station ERR LED lights up h When the master station becomes faulty and the data link control is transferred to the standby master station the ERR LED of the standby master station flashes This is because the station number of the standby master station will change from the one set with a parameter to 0 and the standby station becomes nonexistent Data link itself is performed normally To avoid this situation set the standby master station to be an error invalid station i The number and range of devices that will be saved by the sequence program among the data sent from the station operating as the master station to the station operating as the standby station may differ according to the system used 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Link special relays registers SB and SW relating to the standby master function The following explains the link special relays and registers relating to the standby master function These are stored in the buffer memory When the standby master station is controlling the data link its applicability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station
350. hey do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 2 mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station Station Station number 2 number 4 number 9 Ver 2 Ver 2 Station Ver 1 Station compatible compatible compatible Master number 1 i number pna local station _ HUME 8 intelligent Sano Remote Couples 2 occupies 4 Reserved device station X YOO to 1F station stations stations station occupies 4 occupies quadruple double i occupies stations 1 station station 6 4 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list lg Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostic Window elp 181 x ac eil MOH r
351. i Interrupt setting Interrupt settings Ep gs Project Ready 002 H Host station Owwte NUM Indispensable settings setting Aleadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 x p Parameter name A CC LinkM xclusive staton 1 L r Data link disorder station setting T Hold input data L Case of CPU STOP setting i Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Se
352. ible remote output 8 22 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWTr 8 24 Ver 2 compatible remote register RWw 8 24 IW tuu da tes 3 1 When a dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on 13 7 Wiring check eeeeeene 7 10 Index 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed
353. ice specify it with 0 or a multiple of 16 App 9 App 9 APPENDIX 3 Functions a Operation chart for the RIWT instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Local module PLC CPU Command 2 G RIWT 1 Send buffer Buffer memory Device memory Device memory 3 4 1 Stores the data to be written to the specified station in the send buffer of the master module 2 Writes the data specified by S2 to the buffer memory specified by S1 2 and S1 83 of the station specified by S1 1 or to the PLC CPU device 3 The specified station returns the write complete response to the master station 4 The device specified by D turns ON b The RIWT instruction can be executed to multiple local stations or intelligent device stations simultaneously Note that concurrent execution of multiple instructions including other instructions for transient transmission refer to Appendix 2 is not allowed to the same local station or intelligent device station Create a program in which a flag remains on until the instruction is completed App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c There are two types of interlock signals for the RIWT instruction the completion device D and the status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIWT instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next
354. ied terminal resistors to the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system Are terminal resistors connected to the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system Connect the appropriate terminal resistors that match the cable type used for the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system See Section 7 5 Has an error occurred at the master station s PLC Check the error code of the PLC CPU and take CPU corrective action Are the CC Link parameters set in the PLC CPU of Check the contents of the parameters for the PLC Unable to perform data link for the entire system the master station CPU of the master station Does the sequence scan time exceed the tolerance for each transmission rate when using the synchronous mode 50ms Switch to the asynchronous mode or reduce the 50ms transmission rate 100 ms 400 ms 800 ms Are correct terminal resistors connected e Check the host parameter status SW0068 e Check the switch setting status SWO0064A Has an error occurred at the master station e Check the Loading status SW0069 e Check to see if the ERR LED on the master station is flashing See Section 13 2 e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote I O station performing remote station data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 input RX buffer memory e Check the automatic refre
355. ime for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 1 5 24 5 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X1 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 2 3 Master station e remote device station Ver 2 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX lt remote device station RX This indicates the time from the moment the signal is input to the remote device station until the CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value
356. ime to turn ON differs according to the system configuration faulty status or other conditions 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 4 2 Link special registers SW Data is stored in the link special registers SW000 to SW001F by the sequence program and data is automatically stored in SW0020 to SWO1FF The values in parentheses in the number column indicate the buffer memory addresses When the standby master station is controlling the data link availability is basically identical to that of the master station When the standby master station is operating as a local station availability is identical to that of a local station Table 8 6 Link special register list 1 8 Availability Available x Not available Number Description Onli nlin me Offline Master station Select whether multiple temporary error invalid stations are specified Multiple temporary 00 Specifies multiple stations indicated by SW0004 to 90003 error invalid station FAOD 6034 specification 01 to 64 Specifies a single station from 1 to 64 The specified number indicates the station number of a temporary error invalid station Specifies a temporary error invalid station 0 Not specified as a temporary error invalid station 1 Specified as a temporary error invalid station SW0004 6044 SW0005 b15 014 6013 b12 b3 b2 6054 Temporary error swoo04 invalid station SW0005 SWO0006 specification 3 606 swoo06 SW0007 SWO0007 6074
357. infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispensable settings setting Already set Setifitismeeded Nosetting Alreadyset Ready 1002 Host station Ove NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Boards Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the local station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 c Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Local station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 x p Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations ICC LinkL Exclusive station 1 bul L 1 r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting T Hold input data L Case of CPU STOP setting 7 Clears compulsorily e Set the input status for the data link error st
358. ing in the network parameters 4 FUNCTIONS Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote input RX Remote output RY Master station standby Station number 0 1 Number of occupied stations Remote input RX Remote output RY MELSEC Q c When the master station has returned to system operation and the standby master station is controlling the data link 1 Standby master station output Standby master station controlling Remote Station number 0 Remote input RX RY10 to RY1F RY30 to RYSF output RY Remote station Ryo0to Rvor Station number 2 pee Number of occupied stations 1 ceteros 4 Remote I O station Station number 3 pee ee M I ee Number of occupied stations 1 Yi0to YAE 4 RY20 to 2 RY40 to RY4F Y10 to Y1F p X00 to XOF Y00 to YOF i Data sent from the standby master station to the remote input RX remote register RWr in the standby master station shown by the shaded areas in the figure above is used as output data when the master station becomes faulty it should be saved in another device using the sequence program When the standby master station becomes faulty the saved data is transferred to the remote output R
359. ing section of the Serial TFFF communication module etc Communication Module User s manual Transient data can not be received ne B112 Transient data length error A line error has occurred Check the line l Oo A line error has occurred or an Check the line or check the supply B113 Transient data ID error instantaneous power failure has occurred power and power supply module of at the send station the send station B115 Link error A line error has occurred Check the line B116 Packet error A line error has occurred Check the line In the remote device station initialize Pane Forced termination of the procedure registration function the E Bose ied the B120 remote device station initialize specification of the remote device station ine error has occurred Check the li E ihid rocedure registration off until all procedure registration function initialize procedure registration was turned p off before all procedures were completed procedures completed Error at a station on which the The specification of the remote device Tum on the remote device station B124 remote device station initialize station initialize procedure registration initialization procedure registration procedure registration function function was turned on at a station other instruction on the master station was executed than the master station station No 0 The specification of the remote device Tum on the specification
360. intelligent device station standby master station master station 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 30 points 30 points 62 points 126 points for local for local for local for local Station Station station station 16 points 32 points 32 points 32 points 64 points 128 points Occupies 4 points 8 points 16 points 32 points 1 station c 64 points 96 points 192 points 384 points oints oints oints 2 stations p p P il CN 96 points 160 points 320 points 640 points Occupies 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points 3 stations AE 12 points 24 points 48 points 96 points 128 points 224 points 448 points 896 points RX RY Occupies R t ouk 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points 4 stations register RWw f 16 points 32 points 64 points 128 points register RWr 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 1 Maximum overall cable distance for Ver 1 00 The relationship between the transmission speed and the maximum overall cable distance is described below 1 For a system consisting of only remote I O stations and remote device stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Remote I O station Master station Remote I O station or remote or remote device station device station or remote device station or remote device station 2 2 1 1 5 Maximum overall cable distance 1 Cable length between remote I O stations or remote device stations 2 Cable length between the master station an
361. intelligent function module for which the interrupt setting was performed Setting range 0 to OFFO 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Start SI No on the intelli unit side Set the smallest number for intelligent function module interrupt pointers specified in Interrupt SI No of the Interrupt settings in the Network parameters Setting range 0 to 15 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting PLC side m Intelli unit side Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer Start No No of units Start 1 0 No Start 51 No 0 TITTTITTITTTITT End setup Cancel 3 Simulation of the interrupt program When the event issuance conditions are established in the master station using the GX Developer the interrupt program is executed even when the corresponding modules are not connected and then the interrupt program can be simulated Example A case where an event is issued when RX01 turns on and then an interrupt program is executed Remote device station Station number 1 PLC CPU Master station number of occupied stations 2 See ese eo 3 2 The event issuance 3 The interrupt conditions are program is established 1 Turns on RX01 executed using the GX Developer 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 3 Enabling the data link simply by powering on Automatic CC Link startup When the QJ61BT11N is used in a system configuration including not only remote I O stations but a
362. ion 5Fu 64th module 95 64th module Ver Ver Ver Ver Ver Ver Ver 4 Occupies 4 stations 1 compatible remote I O station 1 compatible remote device station 1 compatible intelligent device station 2 compatible single remote device station 2 compatible single intelligent device station 2 compatible double remote device station 2 compatible double intelligent device station BH Ver 2 compatible quadruple remote device station Ver 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device station EH Ver 2 compatible octuple remote device station Ver 2 compatible octuple intelligent device station 80H Send buffer 81H Receive buffer 82u Automatic update buffer 191 eu L to buffer CCu Receive buffer CDx Automatic update buffer eu 1U96I 9 U 128 Send buffer 129 Receive buffer 130 Automatic update buffer to 203 Send buffer 204 Receive buffer 205 Automatic update buffer 151 eu L Uigc SUL Stores the buffer memory assignment status at transient transmission to the local intelligent device and standby master stations Default value Send buffer size 40 64 word Receive buffer size 40 64 word Automatic update buffer size 804 128 word Storage area Communication buffer Allocation of communication buffer and
363. ion Points of the ver 2 remote register RWr refreshed by the master local station Points of the link special relay SB refreshed by the master local station Points of the link special register SW refreshed by the master local station File register R ZR transfer time on memory card only when file register is used Constant Master station Eu Q00JCPU Local station Pi RE ET Q00JCPU DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2 MELSEC Q KM2 KM3 Constant 1 When QJ61BT11N is mounted on main base unit KM2 KM3 10 x10 aseru Cit o9 Cis acru Ci or QO2CPU 0 48 0 32 QO2HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 2 When QJ61BT11N is mounted on extension base unit rage Rea tt Q02HCPU QOGHCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU oos Example When the PLC CPU type is the QOGHCPU the QJ61BT11N is mounted on the main base and used as the master station and 1024 points of RX 896 points of RX2 1024 points of RY 896 points of RY2 128 points of RWw 128 points of RWw2 128 points of RWr 128 points of RWr2 512 points of SB and 512 points of SW are refreshed besides the file register KM1 KM2x RX RX2 RY2 SB RWw RWw2 RWr RWr2 SW 0 22 0 00043 x 1024 896 1022 896 512 128 128 128 128 512 0 22 0 00043 1296 0 77728 0 78 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME 2
364. ion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RISEND instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Sequence program ee eee EUR Execution completion of ON the RISEND uu MEINE RISEND instruction etae eee ON OFF completion i Normal device at cor Die BE completion device at completion a 1 scan Completion device SSS ON Abnormal Send completion X RYn OFF Request device RXn Completion device OFF Receive completion d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RISEND instruction is 10 steps f The send buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 21 App 21 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the following cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON an
365. ion 4 4 12 AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs Allows the I O points of the remote I O stations to be selected Remote I O station points setting from among 8 points 16 points and 32 points reducing the Section 4 4 13 number of reserved points Allows the number of cyclic points per module to be increased from 128 points for RX RY and 16 points for RWr RWw in the ver 1 mode to up to 896 points for RX RY and 128 points for RWr RWw in the ver 2 mode Cyclic points increase Section 4 4 14 4 Table 4 4 lists the functions for transient transmission Table 4 4 List of the functions for transient transmission Specifies a counterpart and communicates at an arbitrary timing Section 4 5 1 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Basic Functions This section explains the basic functions of the QJ61BT11N 4 2 1 Communication with the remote I O stations Two types of communication modes are available for the CC Link system remote net mode and remote I O net mode 1 Remote net mode In this mode it is possible to communicate with all stations remote I O station remote device station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Thus various systems can be configured according to their applications 2 Remote I O net mode In this mode a high speed cyclic transmission is performed for a system consisting only of the master station and remote I O stations Because of this the link scan time can be shortened
366. ion SW0078 SWO07A specified status 9 SW0079 67 SW007A SW007B SWO007B 67Bx Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers 3 Only the bit for the first station number is turned on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 5 8 Availability Available x Not available Online Master station Local station Number Description Indicates the temporary error invalid status 0 Normal status 1 Temporary error invalid status SW007C 67Cu SW007 015 6014 6012 670 Temporary error 16 13 SW007E _ invalid status x6 32 29 67 48 45 WO007F 64 61 67 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the data link status of each station 0 Normal 1 Data link error occurrence SWO0080 6804 SW0081 b15 b14 613 b12 to b3 b2 b1 bO 6814 Other station data link 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 25 sume sos suos 6834 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Indicates the watchdog timer error occurrence status 0 No watchdog timer error 1 Watchdog timer error occurrence SWO084 6844 SWO0085 b15 bi4 b12 Other station 685 pe watchdog timer error SW00841 16 SWO086 occurrence status SW0085 32 6864 SWO0086 SW0087 SW0087 6874 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers
367. ion exists in a single data link system b The total number of stations is 64 including the standby master station The number of stations that can be occupied by the standby master station is one or four c If an error is detected at the master station in the initial status before parameter communication starts switching to the standby master station will not be executed d When the master station becomes faulty the data link control will automatically be transferred to the standby master station but the refresh instruction of the cyclic data will not be issued Specify the cyclic data refresh using the sequence program Once specified the information prior to the error detection at the master station will be output to each station e When the data link is being controlled by the standby master station the master station s parameters cannot be updated f An error error code B39A occurs at the standby master station if there is a difference between the station number setting of the station number setting switches of the standby master station and the station number setting of the network parameter standby master station number of the master station If an error has occurred change the parameter setting of the master station or the station number setting switch setting of the standby master station and then reset the PLC CPU of the standby master station 9 If the terminal block of the master station is removed and t
368. ion or the device memory of the CPU 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the receive buffer for the first module Master station Local station first module CPU CPU 2 Buffer memory gt j 1 Send buffer L H gt for the first memory module 2 gt 1 Stores the data to be written in the buffer memory of the local station or to the device memory of the CPU in the send buffer for the first module 2 Accesses the buffer memory of the local station or the device memory of the CPU 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 Automatic update buffer The automatic update buffer stores automatic update data when performing transient transmission communication using the automatic update buffer with the AJ65BT R2 The automatic update buffer size of the AJ65BT R2 is specified by a network parameter For more details on the automatic update buffer size settings see Section 6 2 Communication example using the automatic update buffer Master station AJ65BT R2 first module CPU Buffer memory 4 1 a Automatic RIFR Automatic Automatic update update 2 update buffer p buffer for memory the first module 1 Accesses the automatic update buffer for the first module 2 Stores the data specified by the control data in the CPU device For details on the automatic update timing see AJ6
369. ional mode v Bj Device init All connect count 2 Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register R wir Remote register Rw w Ver 2 Remote inputf Rx Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registerfE Wr Ver 2 Remote registerE wW w Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop 4 44 KEKI Scan mode settin Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial settinu Initial settinc em nterrupt setting 1 interrupt settings 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Already set Ready Q02 H Host station Ovrwrte NUM SCRL 10 43 10 43 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 44 MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Setthe refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Set
370. is faulty Control program using data received from local station of station No 1 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 1 Control program using data received from local station of station No 5 Program to generate transmission data to local station of station No 5 a Ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 program Confirmation of data link status Xo XOF o Hr wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1000 18 Hf rn X21 d Z 2 Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station b Ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 program Confirmation of data link status Xo XOF o Hr wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program X1500 18 X21 11 45 2 2 Local station is performing data link Control program using data received from a master station Program to generate send data to the master station 11 45 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q By configuring an interlock with remote I O RX RY cyclic data can be secured on a per station 4 word basis For details refer to Remark in Section 11 2 4 11 4 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the opera
371. its applicability is identical to that of the local station a Link special relays SB The link special relays SB relating to the standby master function are as follows The figures in parentheses the number column indicate buffer memory addresses and bit locations Example When the buffer memory address is 5EOH and the bit location is 0 5E0n 60 Table 4 5 List of link special relays relating to the standby master function 1 2 Number SB0001 5 0 b1 SB000C 5 0 b12 SB0042 E44 b2 SB0043 4 b3 SB0046 4 b6 SB005A 5 5 b10 SB005B 5E5H b11 SB005C 4 b12 Applicability Applicable x Not applicable Description Master Local station Offline station Gives refresh instruction for cyclic data after the data link control Refresh instruction at is transferred to the standby master station standby master switching 0 No instruction 1 Instructed Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that controls the data link to the master station that stands Forced master switching by in case the standby master station becomes faulty 0 No request 1 Requested Refresh instruction Indicates whether the refresh instruction at standby master acknowledgement status switching has been acknowledged or at standby master 0 Not acknowledged switching 1 Instruction acknowledged Indicates whether the refresh
372. ity hexadecimal Master station Local station The station types of the module are different from parameter settings Example Connected Parameter module setting Loading parameter compatibility error Remote Remote l O Set the correct parameters device Remote I O Intelligent device Remote device Set the contents of the B30B Loading parameter The contents of the installation status installation statusand network Oo compatibility error and network parameters do not match parameters to match Standby master station Master station switching was instructed Specify the station number that B30C specification error toa station other than the standby corresponds to the standby master station master station Temporary error invalid station Issue the requests afier the B30D Initial status specification and line test requests were Ie red data link is started issued before starting the link In the function started by SB SW an attempt was made to execute the Execute the corresponding Unsupported error function which is function from the master supported by only the master station at station the local station Specify a temporary error A temporary error invalid station was invalid station while the data Temporary error invalid station specified while the data link is being link is performed with specification error performed upon automatic CC Link parameters set using GX startup D
373. ize to be sent or received For the automatic update buffer size specify the size required for each intelligent device station 2 The network parameters other than operational settings and mode setting are also made valid when the PLC CPU is switched from STOP to RUN Table 6 2 indicates the reference sections for the detailed explanation of the parameter setting methods Table 6 2 Reference Mode section Remote net ver 1 mode Section 6 3 Parameter setting with Remote net ver 2 mode Section 6 4 GX Developer Remote net additional mode Section 6 5 Remote I O net mode Section 6 6 Remote net ver 1 mode Parameter setting with Remote net ver 2 mode Section 6 7 Remote net additional mode dedicated instruction 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote net ver 1 mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station number 4 Station Station Station Station number 9 Master number 1 number 2 Local station number 8 Intelligent station Remote Remote occupies Reserved device station X Y00 to 1F 1 0 station device station 4 stations station occupies occupies occupies occupies 4 station 1 station 2 station 1 station
374. k parameters Stations set as error invalid stations Station number 4 Station number 7 Master Local station Local station occupies occupies station 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Remote station Remote station occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations Remote station occupies 2 stations V The station does not become data link faulty Station number 4 Station number 7 Local station Local station Master occupies occupies station 1 station 4 stations Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote station occupies 1 station R If a remote station a local station an intelligent device station or the standby master station that is set as an error invalid station is specified as a reserved station the reserved station function overrides the error invalid station setting function If errors are generated at all the stations when they are set as error invalid stations the ERR LED will light Setting method Set the error invalid station setting function in Station information setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 8 Synchronizing the link scan with the sequence scan Scan synchrono
375. l connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable STARTING AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module e Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Do not mount remove the module onto from the base unit more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bott
376. l relay SB Special registeS Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop Scan mode setting Asynchronous Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial settir Interrupt setting aml kp n i Indispensable settings No setting Akeady set Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Project 4 Ready 1024 Host station Oviwte NUM 2 Set the network parameters using the following procedure a Set the No of boards in module for which the network parameters are to be set Default value None Setting range 0 to 4 Modules for the parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 r Parameter ECLinkM E alion 1 Y Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting 9 z Clears compulsorily Cancel
377. l relay SB Special register S Ww Retry count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Automatic reconnection station count x1000 1000 wo amp ij s 2 S S 5 wojo 4 Asynchronous Station information Remote device station initial setting Initial settings Interrupt setting Interrupt settings b Setting the standby master station Set in the network parameters to Standby master station Set the mode according to the mode setting of the master station Start 1 0 No Operational setting Type Master station data link type Mode All connect count Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register E wr Remote register E ww Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output Ri Y Ver 2 Remote register E wr Ver 2 Remote register E Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt setting Automatic reconnection station count Remote device station initial setting Jperational settings tand by master station en o 4 4 Remote net Ver 1 mode X100 1000 5 0 5 a e ojo Interrupt settings 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Precautions on using the standby master function a Only one standby master stat
378. ld clear Hold C clear Operational station setting Default Clear acm settings Case of CPU Refresh clears compulsorily CRefresh gt Clears compulsoril STOP setting Default Refresh y Master station Mater station Master station Duplex Master station Duplex function Type Local station Kocalstation Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Sanaa Ver Remote net Adaitional mode Remote net Additional mode Remote VO net mode Remote I O net mode Off line Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All connect count 2 modules Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR 1 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorzR i O Remote register RW Device name Select Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorzR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR 1 Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorzR i y O Retry count wo 3 times y Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to 10 1 modules count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Standby master station No y P Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select top gt continue Default Stop
379. le Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station r Data link disorder station setting Naas M Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting z Clears compulsorily Cancel f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 Parameter name 1 Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 hd r Data link disorder station setting Expands Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting E Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q g Set the number of occupied local stations using Number of occupied stations Default value Occupies 1 station Setting range Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Example Set to Occupies 4 stations Operational settings module 1 p Parameter name m p Data link disorder station setting I Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting Clears compulsorily Number of exclusive stations Cancel h Set the CC Link mode using Mode Defau
380. le When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 1 1 10 30 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS 2 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 X 2X3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting m 1 3 7 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM Xn 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING T
381. le for the QJ61BT11N is listed below Manual name Model name Remarks Required MELSEC PLC programming GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW E software n in the model name is 4 or greater 8 The product of Version 8 03D or later is required for use in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode Usable slave stations Any of ver 1 compatible slave stations and ver 2 compatible slave stations is usable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 2 Notes on the system configuration The system should be designed with the following considerations to prevent mis input from the remote I O modules 1 When powering on and off Start the data link after turning on the power to the remote I O modules Turn off the power to the remote I O modules after stopping the data link Data link start Data link stop During operation Master module data link status During stop ON Remote I O module a power status OFF 2 During momentary power failure of the remote I O modules When a momentary power failure occurs in the power 24 V DC being supplied to the remote I O modules mis input may occur a Cause for mis input due to a momentary power failure The remote I O module hardware uses the power by internally converting the module power 24 V DC to 5 V DC When a momentary power failure occurs in a remote I O module the following condition occurs Time for the 5 V DC power in the remote I O module to turn
382. ligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter Interlock signal storage devices Set data b15 to b8b7 to bo RY Request device 0 to 127 S2 0 0 RY Set the upper 8 bits to 0 0 Use Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to 08 07 to wal RW RX Error code storage device 0 to 15 User If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn b15 to 1 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and completion mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device App 14 App 14 APPENDIX 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RIRCV instruction Specified station Master station DN PLC CPU Master module Lp 1 Command G RIRCV TUS RY MELSEC Q Intelligent device station Device memory Recieve buffer Buffer memory 1 Instructs the master module to read data from the buffer memory specified in S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified in S1 1 2 The master module monitors the remote input RX specified in S2 1 3 When the remote input RX specified in S2 1 turns ON from OFF the master module reads data from the buffer memory of the specified station Read data are stored in the receive buffer of t
383. lowing dedicated instructions for AJ61QBT11 cannot be used in QJ61BT11N CCL CCLEND Performs mail box registration for intelligent device and remote device instructions SPCCLR Performs interrupt command to intelligent device instruction SPCBUSY Reads remote station status Sends data message to designated transmission destination station QnACPU RECV Reads data message that has been sent by SEND instruction READ SREAD Designated station QnACPU word device data read by local station data ME Sends and executes transient such as remote RUN STOP requests to other stations 2 The conditions setting switches for AJ61QBT11 shown below cannot be used on QJ61BT11N Use the GX Developer and set the CC Link network parameters Setting Description SW1 Station type Input status of data link error station Number of occupied stations Appendix 5 Precautions when Changing from QJ61BT11 to QJ61BT11N 1 When the remote net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used use the remote net ver 1 mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing 2 When the remote I O net mode of the QJ61BT11 is used use the remote I O net mode of the QJ61BT11N for changing 3 When the remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode is set to the master station of the QJ61BT11 an error error code B399 B983 B984 occurs Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectabilit hexadecimal Master station Local stati
384. lso remote device stations and intelligent device stations the CC Link startup and data refresh are performed only by powering up the system and without creating sequence programs Use this function to make an operation check when constructing a system When performing control always set the network parameters 1 Power ON Reset 5 STOP RUN PCL CPU Master station PLC CPU Master station 2 Identifies QJ61BT11N __ Remote I O station first module Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q25PHCPU side X1000 to X17FF Y1000 to Y17FF W1E00 to W1EFF W1F00 to W1FFF SB0600 to SBO7FF SW0600 to SWO7FF 3 CC Link startup 4 CPU refresh processing Remote I O station 64th module Remote I O station first module Remote I O station 64th module 1 Contents of default parameter settings at automatic CC Link startup The following lists the contents of the default automatic refresh parameter settings and network parameter settings when the automatic CC Link starts up Content of default automatic refresh parameter settings Master station local station side Master station Direction local station side ecto Direction Q00J Q00 Q01CPU side X400 to X7FF Y400 to Y7FF W600 to W67F W700 to W77F SB200 to SB3FF SW200 to SW3FF RX000 to RX3FF RY000 to RY3FF RWr00 to RWr7F RWw00 to RWw7F SB0000 to SBO1FF SW0000 to SWO1FF RX0000 to RXO7FF RY0000 to RYO7FF RWr00 to RWrF
385. lsoril settings Number of Occupies 1 to 4 stations a o E setting Default single Master station Master station Master station Duplex function Master station Duplex function Type Local station Local station Standby master stati n Standby master station Default Master station Y Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote I O net mode UB Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 modules Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR ee OE Remote output R Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or zl Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR ister y S er 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR er 2 Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W Ror ZR MW pecial relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR 66565050 pO de M L B D W Y M L B T C ST D W Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorZR 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W RorZR 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W RorZR i L B D W i L B T C ST D W
386. lt value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 1 mode 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 3 4 Local station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings oject Edit Find Replace Online 20 ci 1 Dii S m e eae ele Ble ziala s ul els Progam TI zj Sh Sl sepe ale zal Bale a mj x F3 No of boards inmodule Boards Blank no setting Start 1 0 No 0000 Operational setting Operational settings T Local station E Master station data link type Remote 1 mode T 4 KIKI 4 2 indispensable settings setting Akeadyset Setiftisneeded Nosetting Abeady set z Project d Ready 0 Host station I wwe INUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has
387. lue setting CH 6 digital value setting 7 digital value setting W1018 RWWwC Reserved W1019 RWwD Reserved W101A RWweE Reserved W101B RWWwF Reserved For read W0000 RWO CH 1 digital output value woo001 RWr1 CH 2 digital output value RWr2 CH 3 digital output value CH 4 digital output value RWr4 CH 5 digital output value RWr5 CH 6 digital output value RWr6 CH 7 digital output value RWr7 CH 8 digital output value RWTr8 Error code RWr9 Reserved Reserved RWrB Reserved RWrO RWr1 Rwr2 RWr3 RWr4 RWr5 RWr6 RWr7 RWr8 RWr9 Reserved RWrA Reserved RWrB Reserved RWrC Reserved RWrD Reserved RWrE Reserved RWrF Reserved CH 1 check code CH 2 check code check code CH 4 check code 5 check code CH 6 check code CH 7 check code 8 check code Error code 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Xo XOF Xi 9080 0 0 0 E E wc NO M100 NO M100 Initialization procedure registration SB5F 38 RST SBOD XI01B XI078 H X1018 56 SET SBOD 1078 AJeSVBTCU 68ADV initial setting change Initial setting cha
388. mber 10 a Remote station Remote station Remote station Remote station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations occupies 1 station If connected remote station local station intelligent device station or standby master station is specified as a reserved station data link with the specified station becomes disabled Setting method Set the reserved function in Station information setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer Make reserved station setting by choosing Station information setting Reserve invalid station select Make 0 points setting for the reserved station by choosing Station information setting Remote station points For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 4 FUNCTION ae MELSEC Q 4 4 7 Powering off a station in operation without error detection Error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations anda standby master station that are powered off in the system configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by the master station and local stations using the network parameter settings Note that if a station is set as an error invalid station problems occurring in that station can no longer be detected In addition the error invalid station settings cannot be changed while online because they are set with the networ
389. meter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkL Operational settings module 1 x p Parameter name m Number of exclusive stations ICC LinkL Exclusive station 1 bul L 1 r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting T Hold input data L Case of CPU STOP setting fe x Clears compulsorily e Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name 1 m Number of exclusive stations Exclusive station 1 bl r Data link disorder station setting r Expanded cyclic setting cum Am T Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting nds Cancel Clears compulsorily f Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1
390. ming the data link Turn on the power to the remote device station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote device station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status o O Otf Module is normal QJeIBTTIN The data link is being performed normally RUN L RUN Controlling data link MST S MST Sending data ERR O LERR e am NA e oe s 4 b LED display of the remote device station For both the AJ6E5VBTCU 68ADV and AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN confirm that the LED display status is as shown below AJ65VBTCU 68ADV 24 V DC is being supplied D Module is normal s e The data link is being performed normally a 5 D 10 36 10 36 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 Change the voltage input to the AJ65VBTCU 68ADV and confirm that the A D converted digital value also changes 2 Set digital values to the AJ65VB
391. mission sss A 14 Index 1 D E Data link processing time 5 1 Data link 8 26 Data link restart acceptance 8 27 Data link restart complete 8 27 Data link restart 8 31 Data link Stop trente 8 26 Data link stop acceptance 8 27 Data link stop complete 8 27 Data link stop 8 32 Data link stop restart 1 10 4 62 Data link status setting when the master station PLC CPU has an error 1 7 4 27 Dedicated instruction 4 75 Dedicated instruction list App 2 Delay timer information 8 33 Detailed LED display status 8 32 Details of the I O signals 8 4 Differences between the new and previous App 40 EMC directive A 13 Error invalid station setting function 1 10 4 56 Error invalid station specified status 8 29 8 34 Event issuance for the interrupt prOQTFalTIs iiid cte teet eterne 1 9 4 49 Example of parameter settings with GX Developer R
392. mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All connect count Default 64 Remote register RW Remote register RW Ver 2 Remote register RW Ver 2 Remote register RWw Special relay SB Special register SW 1to7 R etry count Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to 10 count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank PLC down select Stop continue Default Stop 3 Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting oneu Default Asynchronous Delay information setting ee Standby master station No ll W 11 7 11 7 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below t parameters Setting the CC Link list MELSO En series GX Developer Unset proj SU sl Unset project No of boards in module 1 x Blank no setting 1 8 Program Device comment Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 PLC paramete Operational setine 2 Network parat Type 15 Remote pass Master station data link type Device memory Mode Device init All connect count Remote input R Remote output Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote
393. mory Network parameters When the PLC system is powered ON or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the data link is automatically started GX Developer PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters CC Link system parameter area parameters parameters Master station Parameter memory Network parameters 6 1 3 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with dedicated instruction Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup GX Developer is used to create the PLC parameters I O assignment setting and a sequence program containing the RLPASET instruction which are then written to the PLC CPU Turn the power supply to the PLC system on or reset the PLC CPU Stop and then run the PLC CPU to execute the sequence program The network parameters are set and the data link is started by the RLPASET instruction The RLPASET instruction is completed after the data GX Developer PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction GX Developer PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction link is started PLC CPU Program memory Master station PLC parameter Sequence program RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Program memory PLC par
394. mory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as positioning complete PLC CPU Master station Remote input RX RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RXOF to RX00 RX1F to RX10 RX2F to RX20 RX3F to RX30 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX4F to RX40 RX5F to RX50 RX6F to RX60 RX7F to RX70 RX8F to RX80 to RX7FF to RX7FO Remote input RX when the AJ65BT D75P2 S3 is set to station number 1 Signal direction AJ65BT D75P2 S3 Master module Device No Signal name RX00 RX01 RX02 RX03 RX04 RX05 RX06 RX07 RX08 D75P2 ready complete Single axis start complete Dual axis start complete Use prohibited Single axis BUSY Dual axis BUSY Use prohibited Single axis positioning complete Dual axis positioning complete 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Remote output 4 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory 5 Remote output RY of the intelligent device station is automatically set to on off for each link scan according to the output status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory Intelligent device station Station number 1 occupies 4 stations Remote output RY signals such PLC CPU M
395. mpletion App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Slave station setting data Setting range Setby The type of slave station number of occupied slave stations and station number are set as follows b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to bO E Station number Number of occupied slave stations gt Type of slave station The default parameter settings are 01014 to 0140 station number 1 to 64 number of occupied slave stations 1 type of slave station remote I O station Setting of the station number 1 to 40H 110 64 BIN setting Setting of the number of occupied slave stations slave stations Station 1 1 to 4H saol station 2 wy Setting for 1 to 64 Station 3 User modules _ 52 63 Station 4 Setting of the type of slave station T Type of slave station Setting Ver 1compatible remote I O station Ver 1compatible remote device station 1H Ver 1compatible intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible single remote device station Ver 2 compatible single intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible double remote device station 6H i i Ver 2 compatible double intelligent device station Ver 2 compatible quadruple remote device Bu station Ver 2 compatible quadruple intelligent device Cu station 0 to Fu station station 3 Perform the settings for as many connected modules involved in communication as has been specified by the control data 4 Setting a value o
396. n x Error occurred t Error did not occur Expanded cyclic setting Displays the expanded cyclic setting Remote station points Displays the numbers of remote input and output RX RY points of the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations Not displayed in the remote net ver 1 mode When making temporary error invalid station setting do not perform write to buffer memory addresses 5E0n 603H to 607H 13 18 13 18 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Loop test Checks the operating status of the connected remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and standby master station Normal stations are displayed blue abnormal stations red reserved stations green error invalid stations yellow and unused stations gray a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 Select CC Link for Module Setting 2 Specify the target master module of loop test for Module No or I O Address 3 Click the button 4 Click the Loop Test button 5 When checking the communication status of all stations Select All stations for Target station and click the Execute Test button 6 When checking the communication status of specific modules Select Selected station No for Target station specify the station number and click the Execute Test button Loop test xi r Operation state of all stations Normal a Ille
397. n M302 Performs abnormal of the RLPASET instruction completion processing Parameter setting change Parameter SBGE SB2 Instruct to stop data link SB45 219 9 RST 82 J Turn the data link stop instruction off RST 583 Instruct to stop refreshing SB45 222M SET M303 J Instruct to change parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M303 i 224 Mov KO D100 Clear complete status 4 Slave station setting data send Ka receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Valid Mov K3 D102 Number of connected modules involved in communication 3 Moy K3 D103 Number of retries 3 times mov Ki D104 1 Number of automatic return modules 1 module Mov KO D105 7 Operation specification when CPU is down Stop Mov KO D106 7 Scan mode specification Asynchronous mov KO D107 Delay time setting 0 Slave station setting data M303 261 311 mov H2101 110 First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 MOV H102 111 Second Remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 2 MOV H103 112 Third Remote l O station occupies 1 station station number 3 1 Set the station number hexadecimal Example Set 14H for station No 20 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data M303 278 mov mov MOV Parameter regis
398. n CH 2 analog y1501 7 output enable disable AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing Tag AYO X151A 319 BNOVP 1000 0510 K2 J Pead eheckcode RWr0 RWr1 MOVP W1008 D518 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset E 3 Turns on error reset SET Y151A request flag RY1A YI51A XI51A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A RST Y151A MCR No 1 RE im 1 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings changed 10 51 10 51 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 4 Creating a program This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY Remote device station Remote device station T PLOCPU station number 1 station number 4 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Ver 1compatible EE X100F to X1000 RXOF to RX00 X101F to X1010 RX1F to RX10 E X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 Y100F to Y1000 RYOF to RYOO Y101F to Y1010 RY1F to RY10 Y102F to Y102
399. n Performs on off data communication with remote I O station Section 4 2 1 Communication with remote device Performs on off data and numeric data communication with 4 ection 4 2 station remote device station 721 Performs on off data and numeric data communication with local Communication with local station m Section 4 2 3 ation Communication with intelligent Performs communication with intelligent device station cyclic ection 4 2 device station transmission and transient transmission Parameter setting with GX Sets the network parameter automatic refresh parameter with Section 4 2 5 ection 4 2 Developer the GX Developer Parameter setting with dedicated instruct Sets the network parameter with the RLPASET instruction Section 4 2 6 instruction 2 Table 4 2 lists the functions for improving system reliability Table 4 2 List of the functions for improving system reliability Disconnects the module that cannot continue the data link Slave station cut off function because of power off and continues the data link with only the Section 4 3 1 normal modules When a module which has been disconnected from the data link Automatic return function because of power off returns to the normal status it Section 4 3 2 automatically joins the data link Data link status setting when the Sets the data link status when an error that stops the operation master station PLC CPU has an
400. n interlock of the FROM TO instructions on the local station CPU side When operating in the synchronous mode the L RUN LED may be lit dimly 2 Asynchronous mode Performs data linking without synchronizing with the sequence program 3 Setting method Set the scan synchronous function in Scan mode setting of the network parameters using the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Data flows in synchronous and asynchronous modes The data flows in both the synchronous and asynchronous modes are explained using examples of communications between the master station and remote I O stations a Data flow in the asynchronous mode Sequence scan Remote input RX j LLLI LLLI Link scan HEHE HEH HH Response time of the first station Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station 1 Responses from remote H H H H H H I O stations i i rd Ee Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 I Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q b Data flow in the sy
401. n output Standby master station controlling Master station Station number 1 0 Remote Remote input RX output RY IRXOO to RXOF Remote Remote Remote I O station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Remote I O station RX10 to RX1F E Station number 3 MERE Number of occupied stations 1 IRX30 to RX3F IRX40 to RX4F RYAOto RY4F 100 X00 to XOF YOO to YOF Data sent to the remote output RY and remote register RWw in the standby master station by the sequence program is sent to other stations as output data 2 Standby master station input Standby master station controlling Master station Station number 1 gt 0 Remote Remote Remote Remote R te I O stati input output RY emotes sraton Station number 2 RX00 to RXOF RY00 to RYOF Boone Number of occupied stations 1 Remote station 10 1 RY10to RY1F E _ 1 1 Station number 3 RX20 to RX2F RY20to RY2F X00 to XOF YootoYoF T LDis ncw DM4le i2 2 od UN eed Number of occupied stations 1 Xt0toXtF MP DE 1 Li tS ae th sO Se St ee Oe al RY40 to RY4F Data in the shaded areas in the standby master station is either input or retained according to the Data link faulty station sett
402. n the END processing of the scan where the RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing When all the stations are normal END END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing processing Sequence program FE pA FE E LE Refresh stop Data link stop O C Data link start RLPASET instruction completion Host data link status IC X01 oo Refresh instruction 5 Data link stop i 802 Data link stop complete SB45 RLPASET instruction Refresh start Direction device ON Complete device a Status display device E Abnormal completion at completion es 3 z 1 scan When all the stations are faulty END END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing processing Sequence program pR 9 9 Refresh stop Data link stop gt Refresh start Data link Btart Return to system processing RLPASET instruction completion Host data link status C NA Refresh instruction SBO3 f Data link stop I SB02 E 2 Data link stop complete Nf Sx SB45 SRM T NER RLPASET instruction Ng Direction device ON Complete device 2 A a i ON Abn
403. nable disable Analog output flag RYOO enable Turns on CH 2 analog output enable disable AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN error occurrence processing flag RY01 X107A Read CH O check code 319 BMOVP 0510 K2 RWr0 RWr1 MOVP 14 D518 Reads error code RWr8 Error reset T T SET YA 3 urns on error reset request flag RY1A Y107A X107A RST Y107A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A MCR NO y The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 31 10 31 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS 10 2 4 Creating a program MELSEC Q This section shows a program used to control remote device stations The following diagrams show the relationships of the remote input output and remote registers between the PLC CPU devices and the remote device station The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used For detailed information about each remote device station see the User s Manual for each module Remote input RX and remote output RY PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X107F to X1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 RYOF to RYOO RY1F to RY10 Remote device station Remote device station station number 1 station n
404. nchronous mode 1 Sequence scan gt Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan H H H Remote input RX 7 r1 qo DER b Link goan HH HHHH HHHH 555995 Response time of the first station _ Response time of the corresponding station Response time of the final station i Responses from remote H i H i stations E 7 Input 1 i Input 2 gt li T Ill Transmission delay time l Delay time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Sequence scan lt Link scan PLC CPU Sequence scan Jut n HA Master station buffer memory Remote input RX Link scan HHHH HHHH HHHH Response time of the first station __ E T 1 1 1 f J 1 f f 1 i Response time of the corresponding station i Response time of the final station i i f Responses from remote H H 1 f stations j i i 1 E ad i 1 1 Input 1 Input 2 i 0 0 D0 i i i I rie I V 1 4 Transmission delay time l Dela
405. net Additional mode h Setthe total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules i Setthe number of retries using Retry count when a communication error occurs Default value 3 times Setting range 1 to 7 times Example Set to 5 times j Set the number of modules that can return to system operation by a single link scan using Automatic reconnection station count Default value 1 module Setting range 1 to 10 modules Example Set to 2 modules k Set the station number for the standby master station using Standby master station No Default value Blank No standby master station specified Setting range Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Example Set to blank No standby master station specified I Set the data link status using PLC down select when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value Stop Setting range Stop Continue Example Set to Stop m Set whether the link scan for the sequence scan is synchronous or asynchronous using Scan mode setting Default value Asynchronous Setting range Asynchronous Synchronous Example Set to Asynchronous 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS n Set 0 for the delay time MELSEC Q Set the station data using Station information settings Default value Ver
406. ng processing X1018 88 MT RST 1018 X1019 121 4 RST 1019 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting X1518 124 MovP HoFC W1508 wovP H31 1509 MOVP HO W1508 SET Y1518 SET Y1519 The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed To the next page 10 50 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV J AJESVBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWwO CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw1 specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Average processing Turns on initial data Turns off initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Analog output enable disable setting RWw8 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWw9 HOLD CLEAR setting RWwB Turns on initial data processing completion flag RY18 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 10 50 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE S
407. ng remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Master station Network 1 parameters Automatic refresh parameters 3 lt Automatic refresh 4 Automatic refresh 6 Automatic refresh 9 Automatic refresh Network parameters Buffer memory Remote input s noma cup EE RY Remote register RWw Remote register tink sean RWr Intelligent device station Remote input RX Handshaking signals such as initial data processing request and positioning complete Remote output RY Handshaking signals such as initial data processing complete and positioning start Remote register RWw Numeric data such as positioning start number and speed change value Remote register RWr Numeric data such as present feed value and send speed 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system automatically starts up Remote input 2 The remote input RX of an intelligent device station is stored automatically for each link scan in the master station s remote input RX buffer memory 3 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer me
408. nge 959 344 MOVE 1000 H30 1001 MOVP H200 11003 1 MOVP K16 1005 SET Y1019 X1019 90 RST Y1019 AJeSVBTCU 68ADV digital output value read X101B X1000 92 0500 1 X1001 0501 1 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV error occurrence processing 101 124 8 D508 J Error reset SET YIOIA e Y101A X101A 3 149 ME RST YIOIA The program enclosed by the dotted line is necessary only when the initial settings are changed 10 34 MELSEC Q AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link normal AJ65VBTCU 68ADV data link abnormal AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN data link abnormal Turns off initialization procedure registration directive Turns on initialization procedure registration directive AJ65VBTCU 68ADV A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw0 CH 1 to CH 4 input i range setting RWw1 Average processing specification RWw3 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw5 Turns on initial data setting request flag RY19 i Turns off initial data setting request flag RY19 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV Reads CH 1 digital output value RWr0 Reads CH 2 digital output value RWr1 Reads error code RWr8 Turns on error reset request flag RY1A Turns off error reset request flag RY1A 10 34 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS A
409. nitialization OFF Not executed x x procedure ON Being executed Indicates completion status of the execution of the initialization Complete status of remote SBOO5F NOTER procedure execution f SEOs b15 initialization OFE Not complete ON Complete device stimon Stores the execution result of initialization procedure registration SWO05F LP instruction with SBOOOB f Other than 0 Store the error code see Section 13 3 Cannot be used for the standby master station that is controlling the data link For details on how to create a program see Section 10 1 4 1 When remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SB0000 is turned off after the initial processing completion all of the RY signals that has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 11 10 11 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN
410. nk scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3 X3 10 39 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20X1 X3 10 70 ms 2 Master station RY local station RX This indicates the time from the moment the master station CPU device turns ON OFF until the local station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Sec
411. nous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 X2 10 36 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 3 SL ms 20 3 3 10 39 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal p
412. nsmission was performed even though the target station does not support transient transmission Attribute definition error Transient transmission unsupported station specification error Data points error The number of data was out of range The address was not a multiple of 16 Address definition error when the bit device was accessed The specified combination addresses and points exceeded the valid processing range B80D Setting range error B814 A transient transmission was executed when the target station was set to the I O mode B815 Module mode setting error B823 A transient request was issued to a station that has not secured a communication buffer area The communication buffer size of the corresponding station was out of range when a dedicated instruction was executed When the dedicated instruction is executed the transient data length is greater than the communication buffer size of the corresponding station The corresponding station that is being tested stopped communication during line test 1 B903 Transient request error Communication buffer size setting error Transient data length error BA19 Corresponding station error BA1B The station number setting switch setting of the module is other than 0 to 64 Alternatively the last station number is greater than 64 Station number setting error Multiple master stations exist on the same line Alternatively line noise was dete
413. nt only when remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode is used 50 total in the following table Number of occupied i _ Occupies Occupies Occupies Occupies 1 station 2 stations 3 stations 4 stations Expanded cyclic setting single a denti 70x Number of 80 x Number of 90 x Number of 100 Number ouble stations stations stations of stations 90x Number of 110 x Number 130 x Number 150 X Number quadruple stations of stations of stations of stations 110 x Number 160 Number 210 x Number 260 Number of stations of stations of stations of stations octuple F Return processing time only when there is a faulty station including error invalid and temporary error invalid stations Number of faulty stations X 118 X BT X 1 number of retries TR Transient processing time only when a transient request is made 5 When there is a transient request from the master station 180 X BT When there is a transient request from the local station 40 8 X BT X number of transient transmission stations Example Using the following system configuration when the transmission rate is 10 Mbps assuming that there is no faulty station or transient transmission Station Station Station Station number 819 Station number 1 1 number 2 2 number 4 3 number 12 1 Master Local station Remote Remote Intelligent station Remote I O station device station device station I O station
414. nt 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i Scan mode settine Asynchronous Delay infomation setti 0 Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting mm __ Indispensable settings setting Alreadyset Setif it is needed eady lost station Read Q02 H H i D NUM 10 24 10 24 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 3 Initial setting of the remote device station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 10 25 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target station numbers to 1 and 4 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Module 1 b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJE5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to conversion enable the first condition Set the Input range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to
415. nt device station to which data will be written 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the buffer memory capacities of the intelligent device station and the receive buffer area setting range to be set with a parameter Interlock signal storage devices Set data Setting range Set by 52 0 615 to 6867 to b0 RY Request device 0 to 127 Set the upper 8 bits to 0 0 User Completion device 0 to 127 b15 to 08 07 to 600 RWr 1 RX Error code storage device j to If none set to FFH 0 Complete with the contents of 1 device RXn b15 to 1 Complete with the contents of 2 devices RXn and Completion mode User RXn 1 RXn 1 turns ON at an abnormal completion x1 The same error code as that for the control data completion status is stored in the error code storage device App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RISEND instruction Master station Specified station DN PLC CPU Master module Intelligent device station 1 Command 5 Pxocutes reques RY RY Device memory 2 Send buffer Lal 7 Instructs the master module to write data to the buffer memory specified in S1 2 and S1 3 of the station specified in S1 1 2 Data to be written to the specified station are stored in the send buffer of
416. ntent of execution is different Default Execute 3 Operational condition Specify whether new settings or the previous settings are used for the initialization conditions Setting range Set new Same as prev set Default Set new When Same as prev set is selected the processing is performed as follows Example RX1 0 RY3 MOV K15 RWw2 4 Executional condition settings Condition Device Set the device to be used for the initialization condition Setting range RX SB 5 Executional condition settings Device Number Set the device number to be used for the initialization condition Setting range When RX is selected 0 to 37F H When SB is selected 0 to FF H 6 Executional condition settings Execute Condition Set the conditions under which initialization is performed Setting range ON OFF 7 Details of execution Write Device Set the device to which the contents of the initial setting are written Setting range RY RWw 8 Details of execution Device Number Set the device number to which the contents of the initial settings are written Setting range When RY is selected 0 to 37F H When RWw is selected 0 to OF H 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 Details of execution Write Data Set the contents of the initial settings Setting range When RY is selected ON OFF When RWwis selected 0 to 65535 Decimal 0 to FFFF Hexadecimal Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration unit
417. nts changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 Example Remote device station Local station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Address Remote register RWr Address 44001 RWr 0 4 00 Station 440191 RWwi1 RWrt 4001 Station number 1 44024 RWr 2 4C024 number 1 4404 Rwa RW 3 4C034 44044 RWr 4 4 04 3065 4 05 4 RWw6 j RWr6 gt 4 06 M Rwr7 4 07 4408 RWr 8 4 08 ea Rwr9 4C09 A4Au Pe bos RWrA 4 Station J 4408 amp Ww BT RWB 4COB amp Station number 2 440Cx RWr C 4 0 number 2 44D4 RWW OD oor RWD 4 00 440en RWE dg RWE 440m fio PE RWF 44104 RWr 10 4 10 RWwidd ooo a RWr1i1 sd 4 11 44420 RWw12 RWr12 4 12 Rwa fi o og RWr13 4 1 to to to 4 RWr 7FC 53FC 4BFDu RWw7FD i o obo o RWr7FD 5 E RWr7FE 53FEn RWw7FF o Eo RWr7FF 53FFu 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Master station RWr lt remote device sta
418. nue i station is set local Retains the receive occurs in a remote z station setting area from a remote device station device station with communica acommunication tion error error Clears the receive area from a local Retains the station with a When receive area The GX Developer communication communication error data link fault from a local error power off etc er y Continue Continue Continue Continue Continue station with Continue station is set local Retains the receive occurs in a local a i station setting area from a local station communica station with a tion error communication error 1 If parameter setting has been made using the dedicated instructions the data is held If parameter setting has been made using GX Developer the data is clear when the RY refresh device is set to Y the data is cleared or held when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 2 When the RY refresh device is set to Y for the local station that has stopped only the receive area is cleared from the stopped local station the receive area is retained or cleared when the RY refresh device is set to other than Y See Section 4 3 5 Operation continues for the receive areas from other stations 5 45 5 45 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter explains the parameter settings that are required to perfo
419. number 3 is faulty Station number 1 is performing the data link Station number 2 is performing the data link Station number 3 is performing the data link Control program for station number 1 Control program for station number 2 Control program for station number 3 2 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 1 4 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the remote I O stations first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the remote I O station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status O Off Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed CUORE SP normally RUN J L RUN Controlling data link MST e O SMST Ro J Sending data ERR O LERR b LED display of the remote I O station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on OO Off AJ65BTB1 16D PW LRUN SD RD LERR e de w oN oN oN oN 24 V DC is being supplied The data link is being performed normally 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence pr
420. number of occupied stations is not 65 parameter of the local station standby master or more station The local station standby master station does not Does the mode of the master station match the Check the parameters of the master station and start up and the ERR LED turns on mode of the local station standby master station local station standby master station Check that the parameter of the master station that will return to the system by the standby master Check the parameter of the master station function has not been rewritten Is the station set as an error invalid station Check the parameters Faulty deladied Is the station number overlapped elsewhere Check the station number setting Can the faulty station be identified using the other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 Check the switch settings for the faulty station Check that the cable is properly wired Check that the shield of the cable is grounded Connect the terminal resistor that matches the cable type used to the terminal stations located at each end of the CC Link system Faulty stations are generated depending on transmission rate If the transmission rate is reduced to a lower level such as 156 kbps can communication be performed without producing an error Check the error code for the PLC CPU Check the error code for the master station Has an error occurred Check the operation status of the PLC CPUs for bo
421. o RY30 i RX3F to RX30 RX3F to RX30 i RY4F to RY40 RX4F to RX40 RX4F to RX40 RY5F to RY50 7 J RX5F to RX50 RX5F to RX50 L RY6F to RY60 L RX6F to RX60 to RX60 RY7F to RY70 RX7F to RX70 RX7F to RX70 RY8F to RY80 RX8F to RX80 RX8F to RX80 to RY7FFtoRY7FO AX7FF to The last two bits cannot be used in the communication between the master and local stations 4 12 4 12 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Word data from the master station to all local stations 9 The word data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote register RWw buffer memory of the master station The remote register RWw is used as word data for writing in local station systems 10 The data in the buffer memory remote register RWw is stored automatically for each link scan in the buffer memory remote register RWr of all local stations The remote register RWr is used as word data for reading in local station systems 11 The word data stored in the buffer memory remote register RWr is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Local station Station number 1 Station number 2 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 4 stations PLC CPU 4 FUNCTION ee MELSEC Q
422. ocedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Set the remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe remote register RWr refresh device using Remote register RWr Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to WO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the remote register RWw refresh device using Remote register RWw Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to W100 e Set the ver 2 compatible remote input RX refresh device using Ver 2 remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1500 f Set the ver 2 compatible remote output RY refresh device using Ver 2
423. ode list 4 6 Error code Error details Cause of error occurrence details Corrective action Detectability hexadecimal Master station Local station The station number set with the station number setting switches of the standby master station differs from that set in the standby master station No network parameter of the master station or the station set in the standby master station No network parameter of the master station is a local station Change the parameter setting of the master station or change the station number setting of the local standby master station and then reset the PLC CPU of the local standby master station B39B Reserved station setting error All stations were set as reserved stations the reserved station settings Lo _ Standby master station setting error Reserved station 0 points setting error 8 16 point remote I O station setting error Remote net additional mode station number illegal Mode illegal between master and local standby master stations Standby master setting illegal Remote I O net mode station type illegal Assignment error Parameter mismatch Mode illegal parameter 13 13 Any other than Intelligent device station has been set to the station type for the Standby master station No specified in the master station network parameter The mode setting is different between the master and standby master stations serv
424. odule in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations The reserved station specification is given the higher priority if both error invalid station and reserved station specifications are made for the same station App 32 App 32 APPE MELSEC Q Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data Set data Setting range Set by Specify assignments of buffer memory size at transient transmission to local stations and intelligent device stations Send receive buffer 10 Receive buffer size Settings for the first module OH no setting Automatic refresh 40H to 1000H buffer size 0 word no setting 64 to 4096 words Send buffer size Setting for 1 to 26 modules Automatic refresh buffer 11 OH no setting 80H to 1000H 0 word no setting 128 to 4096 words Settings for the 26th module The default parameter settings are send buffer size 40 receive buffer size 40H automatic refresh buffer size 80H 9 Perform the settings for stations specified as local stations or intelligent device stations in the slave station setting data starting from the smallest station number 10 Keep the total size of the send and receive buffer sizes at 1000u 4096 words or less Specify the size of data to be sent and received plus 7 words for the send and receive buffer sizes respectively Setting a value
425. of the standby master station Default value 0 no standby master station specified Storage area 0 to 64 0 No standby master station specified Stores the data link status when a master station PLC CPU error occurs Default value 0 Stop Storage area 0 Stop 1 Continue Stores either the synchronous or asynchronous mode for sequence scan Default value 0 Asynchronous Storage area 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous Stores the link scan interval Unit 50 s Default value 0 0 Not specified Storage area 0 to 100 0 Not specified Stores the reserved station Default value 0 Not specified Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on Stores the error invalid station Default value 0 Not specified Storage area Bit corresponding to the station number turns on 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 3 Parameter Information Area List 2 3 Stores the setting status of the types of the connected remote local intelligent device and standby master stations Default value 01014 Ver 1compatible remote I O station Occupies 1 station Station number 1 to 0140 Ver 1compatible remote I O station Occupies 1 station Station number 64 Storage area See below b15 to b12b11 0867 to Staion type Number pt stations Station number 1 to 64 01H to 40H 1H Occupies 1 station 2H Occupies 2 stations 3H Occupies 3 stations 20h first module to 32 first module to Station informat
426. off gt Response time for input module on off Therefore mis input occurs when a refresh is performed within the time indicated by 1 in the figure below Remote I O module module power supply and input external supply power Remote I O module internal 5 V DC NN Input Xn When the input external power supply turns OFF the input Xn turns OFF after the response time for the input module to change from ON to OFF 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q b Countermeasure for mis input For the power supply module the stabilized power supply and the input external supply power of AC input wire the power cables from the same power source PLC CPU Remote I O module Module power supply Input external supply power Power supply module Master module For DC input Stabilized power supply PLC CPU Master module Remote I O module E o gt Q 2 g o n For AC input Nu J Module power supply Input external supply power Stabilized power supply When supplying power from a single power source to multiple remote I O modules select the proper type of cable and perform the wiring in consideration of the voltage decline Connections can be established if the receiving port voltage at the remote I O module is within the specified range of the remote I O module to be used
427. ogram Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 For example when X00 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16D station number 1 is turned on Y40 QY41P of the master station turns on 2 When X21 QX41 of the master station is turned 08 of the remote I O station AJ65BTB1 16DT station Number 3 turns on Master station Q61P A1 QO6HCPUQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P Terminal resistor Remote I O station station number 2 AJ65BTB1 16T Remote I O station station number 1 AJ65BTB1 16D 0000 OO Input module Output module Remote I O station station number 3 AJ65BTB1 16DT 0000 OO module 9 AN Terminal resistor 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example For more detailed information on remote device stations see the Remote Device Station User s Manual 10 1 When Remote Net Ver 1 Mode is Used 10 1 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with one connected remote I O station is used as an example Master Q61P A1 Q06HCPU IQJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QYA41P
428. oint are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n X 3 SL ms 20 1 3 10 70 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 4 Master station RWw local station RWr This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the master station CPU device until the data is stored in the local station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM X n LS X 2 SL ms 20 1 3 2 10 36 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan tim
429. ollowing cases operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Error code Description of operation error 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4002 When an attempt was made to execute an unsupported instruction When the number of devices in the instruction is incorrect 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When the setting for number of points to write n3 is outside of the setting range When the station number specified with n1 does not exist 4100 3 Program example Master module Intelligent device station PLC CPU Start number 40 Station number 1 Device memory Automatic update buffer Buffer memory 300u Automatic update buffer memory When is turned ON the following example program writes 10 word data from DO to the automatic update buffer offset value starting from 100 400 of the intelligent device station in the master module When the link special register SW refresh device is set to SWO X0 5080 0 2 4 RTO U4 KI H00 DO K10 App 28 App 28 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 7 RLPASET instruction Set the network parameter to the master station and start up the data link Usable devices Internal device MELSECNET H Special Index Constant Set data Fs zs
430. om left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number May 2003 SH NA 080394E A First edition May 2004 SH NA 080394E B Addition Appendix 6 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 3 Section 2 2 4 Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Section 4 3 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 7 2 1 Section 8 2 2 Section 8 3 1 Section 8 3 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 1 Section 13 3 Appendix 3 Dec 2004 SH NA 080394E C Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 2 2 1 Section 3 1 Section 4 4 1 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 14 Section 5 4 1 Section 7 3 Section 8 4 2 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 Appendix 2 3 Appendix 2 4 Appendix 2 5 Appendix 2 6 Appendix 2 7 Jul 2005 SH NA 080394E D Addition Section 11 1 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 4 4 3 Section 4 4 6 Section 6 2 Section 6 3 1 Section 6 3 2 Section 6 4 1 Section 6 4 2 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Section 8 4 1 Section 8 4 2 Section 9 1 2 Section 10 1 2 Section 10 2 2 Section 10 3 2 Section 11 1 2 Section 11 2 3 Section 11 2 4 Section 11 2 5 Section 11 3 2 Section 11 3 3 Section 11 3 4 Section 11 3 5 Section 11 4 2 Section 11 4 3 Section 11 4 4 Section 11 4 5 Section 13 3 Appendix 2 7 Appendix 7 1 Japanese Manual Version SH 080395 D This manual confers no industrial property ri
431. omal mode CO V J D MITSUBISHI CCtin 10 3 10 3 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 1 2 Setting the master station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist and station information setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Datalink Input data hold clear Hold Cclear Default Clear Master Mater station Master station Duplex function Dup Master station Duplex function Local station Local station Standby master station Default Master station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count oe 64 1 modules Remote input RX name Device name Select from X M L B D W 2 ect from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D aJ R or ZR Remote register RW Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W
432. on The number of connected modules Number of connected Wag set to a value other than 1 to 64 modules setting error The remote net ver 2 mode remote parameter Am Set to the remote net ver 1 net additional mode has been set to mode remote I O net mode et a value within the range from 1 to 64 the master station of the QJ61BT11 The remote net ver 2 mode remote Set to the remote net ver 1 B983 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to mode remote l O net mode the master station of the QJ61BT11 The remote net ver 2 mode remote Set to the remote net ver 1 B984 Model illegal net additional mode has been set to mode remote l O netimode x the master station of the QJ61BT11 4 When the remote net ver 2 mode remote net additional mode is set to the local station of the QJ61BT11 the local station operates in the remote net ver 1 mode App 41 App 41 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 CPU dependent Function Availability The following table indicates whether the functions are available or not depending on the CPU Q02 Q02H Q06H Functions Q12H Q25H Q12PH Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Remote I O staion Q25PHCPU Communication with remote I O station e o Communication with remote device station Communication with local station Communication with intelligent device station 22 Networkparameter Os o O Parameter setting with Automatic refresh GX Developer
433. on Stores the send data to the remote device all local T Write only intelligent device standby master stations Stores the send data to the Remote register For the local station RWw Master station For sending Local station For sending receiving 1 0 2DF master other local intelligent device standby master stations Also stores the receive data from the remote device other local intelligent device standby master stations Section 8 3 2 3 Read write enabled O Available Not available 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 2 3 Availabilty Description Read write m Reference Us aster Loca Hexadecimal Decimal possibility 3 station station For the master station Stores the receive data Remote register 2 from the remote 736 device local intelligent Master station Section to 2 device standby master Read only For receiving 8 3 2 3 991 stations Local station xt For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station 992 Stores the offset and size of RX RY RWw RWr Slave station offset e Section to per remote station local station intelligent device Read only 1503 2e size information 8 3 2 4 station standby master station 1504 Read write enabled Section to Link special relay SB Stores the data link status 8 3 2
434. on number in the control data of the dedicated instruction is outside the setting range Multiple dedicated instructions were executed for the same station The setting of the interlock signal storage device of the RIRCV or RISEND instruction is outside the setting range An unsupported request was received There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station line test was in progress obtained There i in the target station Target station CPU error Suy RAN RTOP UNO Check the target CPU There are too many transient requests to the corresponding station The target device sta station was not an intelligent ion A response was not received from the requested station A transien even though the target station was set to the I O mode The transmission destination and source stations were the same when other station connection was specified transmission was executed An error occurred in the transient storage buffer when a transient transmission of greater than 1 k was being performed Change the parameter after all transient requests are completed or before any are requested Set a longer watchdog time If an error persists check the requested module and cables Set the corresponding station to a local station or an intelligent device station Check the receive buffer size Change the number of read writ
435. on of the AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 4 The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1 2 to Analog output enable the first condition Set the output range of channel 1 to 0 5V and channel 2 to User range setting 1 the second condition Set the HOLD CLEAR setting of channels 1 2 to CLEAR the third condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to ON the forth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to ON the fifth condition Turn the Initial data processing completed flag to OFF the sixth condition Turn the Initial data setting request flag to OFF the seventh condition Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 4 Input format HEX T Execute Operational Executional condition Details of execution Flag condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data ON ww 10 28 10 28 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 3 Validating the remote device station initial settings This section explains the link special relays SB relating to the initial settings of remote device stations Numeric values in parentheses in the Number column indicate addresses and bit positions of the buffer memory Example For buffer memory address 5E0u and bit 13
436. onse time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 X2 1 5 27 5 ms DATA LINK PR ESSING TIME z MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote I O station response time ms 20 X 1 2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station RY remote I O station output This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote I O station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote I O station response time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote I O station response time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms
437. or invalid station setting information 580076 5 7 b6 580077 receive 5 7 b7 status 580078 Host station switch 5 7 68 change detection Master station return specification information SB0079 7 b9 Table 8 5 Link special relay list 4 5 Description Indicates the setting status of host occupied stations Number of occupied station Indicates the switch setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SWO06A Indicates the parameter setting status OFF Normal ON Setting error exists the error code is stored in SWO0068 Indicates the host data link operation status OFF Being executed ON Not executed Indicates the data link status OFF Data link control by the master station ON Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not a standby master station is present OFF Not present ON Present Indicates the scan mode setting information OFF Asynchronous mode ON Synchronous mode Indicates the operation specification status using a parameter when the CPU is down OFF Stop ON Continue Indicates the reserved station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW0074 to SW0077 Indicates the error invalid station specification status using a parameter OFF No specification ON Specification exists information is stored in SW007
438. or the correspondence with the buffer memory see Section 8 3 2 5 Table 8 5 Link special relay list 1 5 Availability Number Name Description nce Available x Not available Online Offline Master station Local station Restarts the data link that had been stopped by SB0002 580000 0 b0 Data link restart OFF Restart not instructed 2 ON Restart instructed Instructs to perform cyclic data refresh after the data link control is Refresh instruction at 580001 standby master transferred to the standby master station 5E0n b1 switching OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Stops the host data link However when the master station executes this the entire system Data link stop will stop OFF No stop instruction ON Stop instructed Refresh instruction Instructs to refresh cyclic data after changing parameters by the 580003 when changing RLPASET instruction 0 b3 parameters by the OFF Not instructed stop refreshing dedicated instruction ON Instructed start continue refreshing Establishes the stations specified by SW0003 to SW0007 as SB0004 Temporary error temporary error invalid stations 5E0n b4 Jinvalid request OFF Not requested ON Requested Cancels the temporary error invalid status of stations specified by invalid canceling SW000S t0 SW0007 request OFF Not requested ON Requested Executes line tests for the stations specified by SW0008 580008 SEOu b8 Line te
439. ormal Status display device E at completion 4 Return to system App 35 App 35 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 4 Operation error In the following cased an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO Description of operation error 2112 When the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module 4004 When the instruction specifies a device that cannot be used When the number of points for data used in the instruction exceeds the available range or storage data and constants of a device specified by the instruction exceeds the available range including dummy devices The number of points required for each data is shown below Control data Slave station setting data Reserved station specification data Error invalid station specification data 8 points 64 points 4 points 4 points Send receive and automatic refresh buffer assignment data 78 points Example Assume that data link registers DO to D12287 are available for the QO2CPU If the device head number of the slave station setting data is set to D12284 because there are only 4 slave stations the PLC CPU nonetheless checks the range from D12284 to D122347 for 64 stations and an error indicating that the available range is exceeded occurs App 36 App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 5 Program example This program sets the network parameters for the maste
440. ory list nnne nnne 8 5 8 3 2 Buffer memory details enren nikoj raaa a ia 8 8 8 4 Link Special Relays and Registers SB SW sse ennt tnn tnnt 8 26 8 4 1 Link special relays SB entente tnnt nnt nne tnnt innen re 8 26 8 4 2 Link special registers SW cadet tate ta dte a tea tates eati tata 8 31 8 5 Mode Selection Methodi ssnin een pde de ea endet endet edes 8 40 9 1 When Remote I O Net Mode is 9 1 Ole Gonftigutirig a Systelm soda eth alls ita nl ee ae 9 1 1 Setting the master station een eerte tree Hn Cree en Pen i EA ede LARA E og 9 2 2 Setting the remote I O stations esee tenete nennen nnne nre 9 3 9 1 2 Setting the master station parameters ccccceeececceeeeeeeceeceeeeaeseeceeseeeeaesaeseeseeeeaesaeseeseaeteseneeeaees 9 4 1 Setting the network parameters of the master station 9 4 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master Station 9 6 9 1 3 Creating a program oe eececcecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeaecaecaeseesaecaeceeseaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeteateats 9 7 9 1 4 Performirig the data links 4 un i sg REL pe A ae aed 9 9 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display
441. ote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Station _ number 4 8points 8points reserved to 8 point output module 18 output module 1324 point output module Odd numbered 8 point setting remote stations cannot be set for 8 remote station points Remote station Remote I O station Remote station Remote I O station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Master station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station 1 station Refer to Section 6 2 for parameter Se 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting method Using GX Developer make setting by choosing Station information setting Remote station points in the network parameter dialog box For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 5 1 Precautions for setting the remote I O station points The number of parameter set remote I O station points should be equal to or greater than the number of I O points of the mounted remote I O stations If it is less than the number of I O points of the mounted remote I O stations the inputs outputs after the set number of points will not operate normally 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 14 Increasing the number of cyclic points Remote net ver 2 mode This function increases the
442. ote device station initial settinu Interrupt settings Interrupt setting Set if itis needed Indispensable settings No setting Already set pi RUM SCRL Ovrwite 002 Host station 11 41 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 4 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station station number 5 a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for remote register RWr to WO 4 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W100 5 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote input RX to X1500 6 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO POINT When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not
443. other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 3 Local station network parameter settings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list 1815 lm Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Window 218 x allta c alie t D Se As EE EI DR HRA S open 85 stil ele lel ziale j Progam zI A of Sl m xl z Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program t IV Device comment i 2 3 Ei uf Parameter Stat 120 No 0000 W PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 15 Network Type Local station E E 5 Remote pass Master station data link type z i z I Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode E 18 Device init All connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf Ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEiX 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote reaister E wr Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special register S Ww Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting z Delay
444. ould not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 1 PLC parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Bootfile SFC 1 0 assignment a assignment setting screen Set the following for the slot in which the master module is mounted The type setting is required set other items as 1 0 Assignment PLC Pens Switch setting Detailed setting Intelli QJ61BT11N 32points needed Type Select intelli Enter the module model name Points Select 32 points Start XY Enter the start number for r Base mode Auto C Detail 8 Slot Default 12 Slot Default Settings should be set as same when Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data using multiple CPLI the master module b Intelligent function module switch setting Click the Switch Setting button in the I O assignment setting screen to display the screen shown to the left ime Ee Set the input format to hexadecimal and enter S amp T Tue T edis Seach 21 Sich S Sch values for switches 3 4 The switch settings are 0 PLC PLC A 1 00 Intell QJ6IBTTIN 0000 0100 indicated in the following table 2 1 1 d If switches 4
445. outside the setting range results in abnormal completion 11 Keep the total size of the automatic refresh buffer sizes at 1000H 4096 words or less Specify the necessary automatic refresh buffer size for each intelligent device station Setting a value outside the setting range results in abnormal completion App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RLPASET instruction PLC CPU Master module Command Z RLPASET Network parameter Device memory 4 Execution result 3 Data link start 1 Pass the network parameters set in S1 to S5 to the master module specified by Un 2 The master module analyzes the settings of the network parameters 3 Ifthe network parameter settings are correct the data link is started 4 The device specified by D turns on b Itis only possible to execute one RLPASET instruction at a time App 34 App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC Q C There are two types or interlock signals for the RLPASET instruction the completion device D and status display device at completion D 1 1 Completion device Turns ON in the END Processing of the scan where the RLPASET instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 2 Status display device at completion Turns On and OFF depending on the completion status of the RLPASET instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON i
446. overlap station numbers Do the settings match Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Is the corresponding remote device station performing data link e Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWOO9B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the LED display on the corresponding remote station Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check parameter information SW0067 Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Check the max communication station number 5 0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Check the parameters Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077 Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number
447. overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Check the sequence program Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Check the LED display on the corresponding remote device station Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 13 2 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure input RX buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters Check the parameters Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote device station number Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 Check the number of connected modules 5 0072 Check the parameters Is the corresponding station set as a reserved x station Check the reserved station specified status Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote SW0074 to SW0077 device station Check the station number setting Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status SW0098 to SW009B Check the loading status SW0069 Check the station number overlap status Do the settings match SW0098 to SWO009B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWO09F
448. overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 6 Example of Parameter Settings with GX Developer Remote I O net mode This section explains the parameter settings using the GX Developer For more details on the GX Developer operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual The explanations in this section are based on the following example of the system configuration Station Station Master number 1 station Remote number 2 Remote X YOO to 1F station station occupies occupies 1 station 1 station 6 6 1 Master station network parameter settings Station number 3 Remote station occupies 1 station Station Station number 4 number 5 Remote Remote station station occupies occupies 1 station 1 station 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings Project Edit Find Replace View Onine Diagnostics Tools Window Help 18 x altal 1c ei BRE LE Ye e a alle eae aula miss Program zl fe x x BI E B Unset project No of boardsin module Boards Blank no setting amp EE
449. owever since line test 1 is performed for 64 stations disregard the bit s for any unconnected stations For the standby master station the test result is stored into SBOOBA standby master station test result only When test is incomplete all stations are abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes The test results are stored in SWOOB8 line test result End MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK Start Check items prior to executing line test 2 Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP e Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the master module station number setting Switch to the station number of the module for which the test is to be performed Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master module to 5 to 9 the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR om To the next page MELSEC Q 2 Checking the status of communication with a specific remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station line test 2 Line test 2 checks whether data linking can be performed normally with a specific remote station local station
450. own Master station Standby master station Station number 0 1 Station number 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Standby Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Data link control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Problem occurrence in the standby master station Data link control by the master station Master station Station number 1 0 Remote device station Intelligent device station Station number 2 Station number 4 Data link Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic comsefiinication Standby master station returns to normal and comes back online gt Standby master station Standby master station prepares itself for master station system down Station number 1 Master station Number of occupied stations 1 Remote device station Intelligent device station Data link Station number 2 Station number 4 ata n Number of occupied stations 2 Number of occupied stations 1 Standby control in progress Cyclic communication Cyclic communication Cyclic communication 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 11 Remote device station initialization procedure registration function This function performs the initial setting for the remote device station using the GX Developer without
451. p between the devices of the master station PLC CPU and the devices of the local station PLC CPU The shaded areas indicate the devices that are actually used Remote input RX and remote output RY Ver 1compatible local station Master station Master station PLC CPU X100F to X1000 X101F to X1010 X102F to X1020 X103F to X1030 X104F to X1040 X105F to X1050 X106F to X1060 x107D to x1070 Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030 Y104F to Y1040 Y105F to Y1050 Y106F to Y1060 v107b to Y1070 X150F to X1500 X151F to X1510 X152F to X1520 X153F to X1530 X154F to X1540 X155D to x1550 Ver 1 compatible buffer memory RXOOF to RX000 RXO1F to RX010 RX02F to RX020 RXOSF to RX030 to RX040 RXOSF to RX050 RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 RYOOF to 00 RYO1F to RYO10 RYO2F to RYO20 RYOSF to RYO30 RYO4F to RY040 RYOSF to RYO50 RYO6F to RYO60 RYO7F to RY070 Ver 2 compatible buffer memor Y150F to Y1500 Y151F to Y1510 Y152F to Y1520 Y153F to Y1530 Y154F to Y1540 lv155D to 1550 11 43 RYO6F to RYO60 RYO7F to RYO7O RYOSF to RYOSO RYO9F to RYO9O RYOAF to RYOAO RYOBF to RYOBO RXO6F to RX060 RX07F to RX070 RXO08F to RX080 9 to RX090 RXOAF to RXOAO RXOBF to RXOBO station number 1 occupies 4 stations PLCCPU __ Y100F to Y1000 Y101F to Y1010 Y102F to Y1020 Y103F to Y1030
452. parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the setting for No of boards in module Example Set 1 Board b Set the Start I O No for the master station Default value None Setting range 0000 to OFEO Example Set 0000 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q c Set the Parameter name using Operational settings Even if the Parameter name is not set this will not affect the operation of the CC Link system Default value None Setting range 8 characters or less Example Set CC LinkM Operational settings module 1 r Parameter ECLinkM E alion 1 Y Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting 9 z Clears compulsorily Cancel d Set the input status for the data link error station using Operational settings Default value Clear Hold input data not checked Setting range Hold Hold input data checked Clear Hold input data not checked Example Set to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name Data link disorder station setting Hold input data Case of CPU STOP setting H Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked
453. pletion Turns ON and OFF depending on the completion status of the RIRD instruction Normal completion Stays OFF and does not change Abnormal completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the RIRD instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing END processing END processing END processing END processing Execution completion of ON the RIRD instruction 6 1ON OFF PUE EC i ON Abnormal completion UN E OFF Normal completion 1 ZU UON 1 scan d Multiple dedicated instructions cannot be executed for the same station Since it takes several scans until the processing of the dedicated instruction is completed execute the next dedicated instruction after the completion device has turned ON The next dedicated instruction executed before completion of the previously executed dedicated instruction is ignored e The basic number of steps of the RIRD instruction is 8 steps f The receive buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 4 Operation error In the following cases an operation error occurs the error flag SMO turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO auo Mm the module specified by Un is not an intelligent function module When the module specified by Un is not a special function module 4004 When the
454. plex funcion Master station Duplex function Local station i Local station Standby master station Default Master station Se a station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Off line 1 to 64 All connect count oe 64 2 modules Remote input RX Device name Device name Select from X M L B D W 2 ect from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D aJ R or ZR Remote register RW Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Roi ue M L B T C ST D W Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR RWr Remote output RY Remote register RWw Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R RWw or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 10 22 10 22 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 Retry count 3 times Default 3 Automatic reconnection 1to 10 station count
455. plicability Applicable x Not applicable Description Master Offline station Local station Indicates whether a forced master switching request acknowledgement is complete or not 0 Not complete 1 Switching complete Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for the host 0 No setting 1 Setting exists Shows the data link status 0 Data link control by the master station 1 Data link control by the standby master station Indicates whether or not there is a standby master station 0 No standby master station 1 Standby master station exists Indicates whether the Type setting in the network parameters is set to Master station or Master station Duplex function OFF Master station ON Master station Duplex function Indicates whether the host operates as the master or standby master station OFF Operates as a master station controlling data link ON Operates as a standby master station standby Link special registers SW The following describes the link special registers SW relating to the standby master function The figures in parentheses in the number column indicate buffer memory addresses Table 4 6 List of link special registers relating to the standby master function SWO0043 6434 SWO005D 650 Refresh instruction at standby master switching result Forced master switching instruction result Applicability Applicable Not
456. points for RX RY and 4 points for RWw RWr without any problem Do the modules to be connected include ver 2 compatible station Will a ver 2 compatible station be connected in the future Select the remote net ver 1 mode Select the remote net ver 2 mode 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE I O STATIONS This chapter explains the procedures from module settings to parameter settings programming and finally operation check using a system configuration example 9 1 When Remote I O Net Mode is Used The remote I O net mode is used 9 1 1 Configuring a system As shown below a system with three connected remote I O stations is used as an example Master station Q61P A1 QO06HCPU QJ61BT11N QX41 QY41P QX41 QY41P N Terminal resistor Remote I O station station number 1 Remote I O station station number 2 Remote I O station station number 3 AJ65BTB1 16D AJ65BTB1 16T AJ65BTB1 16DT 0000 0000 0000 O OO OO OO Input module Output module module Terminal resistor 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Setting the master station Settings of the master station switches are shown below 111 QJ61BT11N RUN L RUN MSTO
457. pping out of the module Securely fix the module with screws if it is subject to vibration during use e Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause damage to the module e Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installing is completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of malfunction if the terminal cover is not attached e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause short circuits or malfunction If the terminal screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module These may cause fires failure or malfunction e The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent for
458. quence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 2 Remote device station response time ms 20 3X2 1 5 27 5 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n X 2 Remote device station processing time ms 20 X 1 X2 1 5 41 5 ms 2 Master station RY remote device station RY This indicates the time from the moment the CPU device turns ON OFF until the remote device station output turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM LS X 1 Remote device station processing time ms 20 3 1 1 5 24 5 ms ROCESSING TIME 5 DATA LINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q b Synchronous mode SM X n LS Remote device station processing time ms SM
459. r 2 Remote output RY 1500 2 Remote register E wr W1000 Ver 2 Remote register Aww W1500 Special relay SB 5 0 Special register S w 5 0 Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No L ER S z Delay infomation setti Station information settin Remote device station initial Interrupt setting Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Ready Q02 H Host station Ovrwrte NUM 11 36 11 36 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 4 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Case of CPU STOP Refresh clears compulsoril stations Default Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple Em Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode 1i Master station Master station Duplex func
460. r module mounted at the numbers X Y00 to X Y1F and starts the data link Station number 1 Master Local Station number 2 Station number 3 station UE C MM station occupies Remote I O station Remote station X YOO to 1F Error invalid station Reserved station 1 station M occupies 1 station occupies 1 station 1 Refresh of SB SW M err 4 80040 to SBO1FF are read L J to SB0040 to SBO1FF FRON iig H640 m Kade SW0040 to SWO1FF are read to SW0040 to SWO1FF Parameter setting M402 SB6E M300 Instruct to set parameters RLPASET instruction Control data M300 _ 3H H mov KO 0 Clear complete status fmov 15 1 All setting data Valid mov 02 4 Number of connected modules involved in communication mov K3 D3 Number of retries 3 times mov D4 4 Number of automatic return modules 1 module 4 Operation specification when Nov m 05 CPU is down stop mov KO 56 4 Scan mode specification Asynchronous Mov KO D7 Dealay time setting 0 Slave station setting data 71 H2101 DIO First Local station occupies 1 station station number 1 1 mov H102 D11 Second Remote l O station occupies 1 station station number 2 mov H103 D12 Third Remote l O station occupies 1 station Reserved station specification data station number 3 M30
461. r station to the original value Check the control data of the 3 setting of the intelligent module switch setting BB He pe le ESES Ek pe fe GE 13 13 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Table 13 1 Error code list 5 6 hexa ERN Error details Cause of error occurrence details Detectability Master station Local station m 3 B401 Parameter change error Response error Transient applicable station error Receive buffer size error Data length outside of range Station number outside of range Request error Interlock signal data outside of range Request type error Transient request overload error Transient request overload error B603 B604 Line test in processing Transient storage buffer could B695 not be obtained B607 Transient request overload error Transient request error Response time out Module mode setting error B774 B778 Station number specification error Transient storage buffer error B801 B802 B803 13 14 Parameter change was executed during transient request A response from the requested station was not returned within the watchdog time period A transient request was made to a remote I O station or a remote device station The receive buffer size of the dedicated instruction is less than the response data size The number of read write points in the control data of the dedicated instruction is outside the setting range The stati
462. r the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent E 3 Write only Section standby master 8 3 2 10 stations 16896 Ver 2 compatible For the local station Stores the output status to remote output RY 3 the master station ee Also stores the receive Read write data from the remote other eee enabled local intelligent device standby master stations For the master station Stores the send data to the remote device all local Marc Write only intelligent device standby master stations Ver 2 compatible For the local station Stores the send data to the remote register master other 4400 17408 RWw local intelligent Master station device standby master 4BFF aes For sendin stations 9 Read write Local station Also stores the receive For sending receiving data from the remote device other Section local intelligent 8 32 11 device standby master stations For the master station Stores the receive data from the remote device local intelligent i3 4 00 RWr device standby master to Master station stations 53FFu For receiving Local station For the local station Stores the receive data For receiving from the master station 5400 21504 to Use prohibited 7FFFu os O Available Not available 1 Do not write to any area where use is prohibited This may cause errors x2 Used when the remote net ver 1 mode or remote net a
463. r to turning the power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the Middle position Set the transmission rate mode setting switch for the master local module to A to E the transmission rate should be the same as when the system is operating Power ON Operate the PLC CPU RESET switch according to the following procedure 1 Set the RESET switch to RESET RESET L CLR gt 2 Set the RESET switch to the middle position RESET L CLR MST LED is flashing test in progress To the next page 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q From the previous page The test result is displayed using the LED indicator lamps of the master local module and the CPU module When normal The PLC CPU ERR LED flashes to check the operation of the watchdog timer When abnormal The MST LED lights up and the ERR LED flashes Replace the module since there is a hardware malfunction Check once again to see that the terminal resistor that comes with the module is connected between terminals DA and DB When the RUN STOP switch of the PLC CPU is set to RUN and a hardware test is performed the system status become SP UNIT DOWN and the PLC CPU stops to check the operation of the watch dog timer function Make sure th
464. rOB WO000B RWwOC RWroC WO00C RWr0G WOO0C RWwOD RWroD WOO0D RWrOD woooD RWwOE RWroE WOO0E RWr0E WOOO0E RWwOF i i L_RWroF Woo0F J RWr0F 000 Ver 2 compatible Ver 2 compatible buffer memory buffer memory RWri0 RWw10 W1500 Rwn RWw11 W1501 Rwr2 RWw12 W1502 RWr13 RWw13 W1503 Rwr14 RWw14 W1504 RWri5 RWw15 W1505 RWr16 RWw16 W1506 Rwnz RWw17 W1507 W1008 Rwr8 RWw18 W1508 RWwH9 RWw19 W1509 RWriA RWw1A W150A RWHB RWw1B W150B Rwn C RWwiG W150C RWHD RWw1D W150D RWHE RWw1E W150E RWrHF RWw1F W150F RWw10 J RWr10 W1000 RWw11 RWr11 W1001 RWw12 RWr12 W1002 RWwi3 RWr13 W1003 RWwi4 RWr14 W1004 RWw15 RWr15 W1005 RWwie RWr16 W1006 RWwi7 RWr17 W1007 RWwi8 RWr18 W1008 RWw19 RWr19 W1009 RWwiA RWHA W100A RWwiB RWr1B W100B RWwic RWriC W100C RWwiD RWr1D W100D RWwiE RWHE W100E RWwiF jJ RWriF W100F 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS 1 Master station program Local station status confirmation Xo XOF Xi 0 E E W80 0 wc NO M100 NO M100 Control program Control program of station number 1 SW80 0 1000 27 140 X20 11000 Control program of station number 5 5180 4 X1500 57 Cnt X21 11500 MGR NO 78 END 2 Local station program MELSEC Q Station number 1 is faulty Station number 5
465. ram scan time 0 when reading buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QO6HCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the read points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC read points 16 16 1 1 067 ms 0 5 5 X 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 x 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms b RIWT instruction OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 067 SL ms OT QCPU Q mode dedicated instruction processing time QnCPU 1 ms QnHCPU 0 5 ms LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 BC Constant pose quai po SL Target station sequence program scan time 0 when writing buffer memory in the CC Link 1 Round up below the decimal point Example When the PLC CPU type is QOGHCPU the transmission rate is 10 Mbps the link scan time is 5 ms and the write points are 20 words buffer memory in the CC Link OT LS X BC write points 16 16 1 1 067 ms 0 5 5 12 20 16 16 1 x 1 067 0 5 5 12 3 1 067 76 505 76 5 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 5 3 3 Master station lt intelligent device station 1 Master station intelligent device station This indicates the time from the moment an instruction is issued by the master station and a response from an intelligent device station is received
466. ring data link control S MST On Operating as a standby master station during standby SD L RUN On Data link is being executed On Communication error host Flashing at fixed intervals The settings of switches 2 and 3 were changed while the power is on LERR Flashing at inconsistent intervals The terminal resistor is not attached The module and CC Link dedicated cable are affected by noise ID During data sending RD During data receiving Set the module station number setting at the time of shipment 0 lt Setting range gt Master station 0 Local station 1 to 64 Standby master station 1 to 64 If a number other than 0 to 64 is set the ERR LED lights up MST and S MST LED indicator lamp status and station types Operation status Type of station set Operating as a master station Operating as a standby master controlling data link station standing by Master station MST OSMST MSTO SMST Standby master station MST O SMST MSTO SMST Localstaion On O Off 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q Transmission rate mode setting Set the transmission rate and operating conditions for the module switch settings at time of shipment 0 Number Transmission rate 2 5 Mbps see Section 7 7 2 Line test see Section 7 8 6 Transmission rate 625 kbps When the station number setting switch is set to 0 Line test 1 8 Transmission rate 5 Mbp
467. rm data link with the CC Link 6 1 Procedure from Parameter Settings to Data Link Startup The following explains the procedure from setting the parameters to starting the data link 6 1 1 CPU parameter area and master module parameter memory The following explains the relationship between the CPU parameter area and the master station s parameter memory 1 CPU parameter area This area is used to set the basic values for controlling the PLC system and the network parameters that control the CC Link system 2 Master station parameter memory This area stores the network parameters for the CC Link system When the module is powered off or the PLC CPU is reset the network parameters are erased PLC CPU Master station Parameter area Parameter memory Power ON CC Link system CPU reset CC Link system network network parameter area parameter area 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 1 2 Procedure from parameter settings to data link startup with GX Developer Follow the procedure below from parameter settings to data link startup The GX Developer is used to create the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters which are then written to the PLC CPU GX Developer Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters PLC CPU Master station CC Link system parameter area Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Parameter me
468. ror invalid station setting cec cte tede 8 29 Temporary error invalid station soe tao tttm 8 31 Index 4 Temporary error invalid station specification cancel result 8 32 Temporary error invalid station specification 8 32 Temporary error invalid status 8 35 Terminal DIOCK c cceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseees 7 6 Terminal resistor A 16 The remote device station is not operating normally saa p Rp 13 7 The remote station local station intelligent device station standby master station does V not start up te emitted ena 13 7 Tightening torque range 7 3 Total number of stations 8 34 Transient transmission A 15 1 11 4 75 Transient transmission status 8 30 8 36 Transmission delay time 5 4 Transmission rate 3 1 Transmission rate mode setting switch 7 6 Transmission rate and mode settings 7 14 Transmission rate Setting 8 32 Ver 1 compatible slave station A 14 Ver 2 compatible slave station A 14 Ver 2 compatible remote input 8 22 Ver 2 compat
469. rs compulsoril STOP setting Default Refresh Master station Mater station Master ladon Duplex function Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station oca station y Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 m emote ode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode X Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode is Mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode C Remote I O net mode gt Offline Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode Al 1 to 64 Il Default 64 Device name Select from X L W R or Remote input ZR Herat iut Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST oupi D W Ror ZR Devi Select f M L B D W R Remote register RWr evice name 2s rom M L B D W Ror Device name Select from M L B T C ST D Remote register W RorZR D Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B D W R or RWr ZR i Ver 2 Remote register Device name Select from M L B T C ST D RWw W Ror ZR Device name Select from M L B D W R SB Special relay S or ZR Device name Select from L D W SW Special register or ZR nt T D a LT a Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST p S 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q Setting value 1to7 Retry count me Default 3 pue Automatic reconnection 1to 10
470. rt Monitoring button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Line Monitor Host station Module Setting Link Scan Time CC Link Data Link Status tat Data inkng Action Status Noma Mim E C yo Aud i Switching Status Master Staton Current Eon ms hn nk Bridge Using Loop Ro E Gtatior 0 status Nomal Network Test CH 1 Line status Loop Test Start Data Loop Type Twist Single Bus Monitoring other station Stop Data Link b Monitoring items 1 Host station Indicates the type master station local station standby master station of the monitored station and the mode of CC Link For a local station the station number is also displayed Not displayed in the remote net ver 1 mode Data link status Displays the data link status of the host Action status Displays the operating status of the host Switching status Displays whether the data link is controlled by the master station or standby master station Using loop Displays the line in use Line status Displays the line status Loop type Displays the line type 13 16 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q When conducting a network test do not perform write to buffer memory address 5E0u 2 Other station monitoring This function monitors the items such as the data link status of o
471. s Do the settings match 51 0098 to SWO09B Check the loading parameter consistency status SWO009C to SWOO9F Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote device station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 3 13 3 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously device station Is the remote device station initialization procedure Check if the remote device station initialization registration being executed procedure registration instruction SBOOOD is on e Check the LED display on the corresponding Is the corresponding remote device station remote device station performing data link e Check the other station data link status of the master station SW0080 to SW0083 Is data read from the correct address of remote e Check the sequence program register RWr buffer memory e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Unable to turn on off remote output RY of a remote Check the parameters Check the total number o
472. s Occupies 4 stations Remote station points When station type is ver 1 remote I O station 0 points reserve station 8 points 8points 8points reserved 16 points 32 points When station type is other than ver 1 remote station 0 points reserve station n points n Calculated automatically by GX Developer according to the number of occupied stations and expansion cyclic setting Refer to Section 3 1 for the number of points Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the system configuration specified in Section 6 4 Expanded Exclusive station Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 4 Btation Station type cyclic setting count points station select Send Receive Automatic 1 1 Ver TRemote 1 0 station single Exclusive station 1_ 32 points v No setting 2 2 Ver2Remote device station v quadruple Exclusive station 2 192 points Y No setting E 3 4 Ver2lntelligent device station double Exclusive station 4 224 points v No setting T 64 64 128 4 8 Ver 1Remate 1 0 station x single Exclusive station 1 32 points Reserve station v 5 9 Ver 1in
473. s When the station number setting Transmission rate 10 Mbps switch is set to 1 to 64 Line test 2 B Transmission rate 625 kbps BONO see Section 7 4 D Transmission rate 5 Mbps Connect the CC Link dedicated cable for data linking For the connection method see Section 7 5 Terminals SLD and FG are connected inside the module Since a 2 piece type terminal block is used the module can be replaced without disconnecting the signal line to the terminal block Replace the module after turning its power OFF The settings of the station number setting switch and the transmission rate mode setting switch become valid when the module power is turned from OFF to ON or the PLC CPU is reset Thus if the settings were changed while the module power was ON turn the module power from OFF to ON or reset the PLC CPU again 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 4 Checking the Module Status Hardware Test The hardware test checks whether or not each module works properly by itself Always perform this hardware test before configuring the system and for each module by itself without connecting the cable Otherwise the hardware test will not be executed properly Execute the hardware test using the following procedure Start Connect the terminal resistor attached to the module between the DA and DB terminals of the master local module Check items prio
474. s data written to the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory of the local station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting Unable to communicate from a local station remote Is data read from the correct address of remote output RY to the master station remote input RX input RX buffer memory of the master station e Check the automatic refresh parameter setting e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding local station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules SW0072 e Check the sequence program e Check the automatic refresh parameter settings Unable to communicate from the master station remote output RY to a local station remote input RX Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers 13 5 13 5 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure Unable to communicate from a local station remote output RY to the master station remote input RX Unable to communicate from the master station remote register RWw to a local station remote register RWr Unable to communicate from a local station remote register RWw to the master station remote register RWr 13 6 e Check the parameters e Check the reserved station specified status SW0074 to SW0077
475. s detected in the switch setting status for the module 2 When the module error signal XnO turns ON Power ON Module ready XnF Module error Xn0 MELSEC Q 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 8 3 Buffer Memory The buffer memory transfers data between the master local module and the PLC CPU The reading and writing of data are performed by parameter settings or with dedicated instructions using the GX Developer The contents of the buffer memory return to the default when the power is turned OFF or the PLC CPU is reset 8 3 1 Buffer memory list The buffer memory list is shown in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 Buffer memory list 1 3 160 1DF Availability Read write a Availabilty Reference possibility Master section station station For the master station Stores the output status to the remote local intelligent device standby master stations Stores the output status to the master station Also stores the receive data from the remote other local intelligent device standby master stations Description Decimal 0 Section Stores the parameter settings P d 8 3 2 1 For the master station Stores the input status from the remote local intelligent device standby master stations For the local station Stores the oe ee status oe ee the master station Section 8 3 2 2 gt For the local station Remote output RY Read write enabled For the master stati
476. s of execution setting Set Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to ON g Setting the seventh condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 18 and the Execute Condition to OFF 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to OFF h Setting the eighth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Set new 3 Executional condition settings Set the Condition Device to RX the Device Number to 19 and the Execute Condition to ON 4 Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 19 and the Write Data to OFF 10 47 10 47 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q i Setting results The results of settings a to h are shown below Remote device station initial setting Procedure registration module 1 Target station 1 Input format HEX m perational xecutional condition Details of execution E condition Condition Device Execute Write Device Write Device Number Condition Device Number Data
477. s set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting The GX Developer data link faulty station is set master station setting Clears the receive area from the remote I O station having a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote I O station with a communication error Clears the receive area from the remote device station with a communication error Retains the receive area from the remote device station with a communication error Clears the receive area from the local station with a communication error Retains the receive area from the local station with a communication error Undefined Continues operation of Continue areas other than the remote I O station Retains the receive area from the remote Continue Continue device station witha communication error Retains the receive area Continue Continue from no ee station with a communication error Undefined Continues operation of areas other than the remote I O station By external signals By external signals Continue Not affected by the communication status of the remote device station Continue Not affected by the communication status of the local station All points OFF All points OFF Continue Not affected by the communication status of the remote device station Continue Not affected by the communication status of the local station
478. s spb ru ELEKTROSTYLE UI Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscowskaja Oblast Phone 7 095 261 3808 Fax 7 095 261 3808 e mail ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 786 21 00 Fax 7 095 786 21 01 e mail infoGprivod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 4 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
479. s the reserved points of remote input RX and remote output RX for remote I O stations See Section 4 4 13 25 Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP Set whether output data to the remote local intelligent device and standby master stations will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared when the PLC CPU comes to STOP See Section 4 3 5 1 12 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The system configuration for the CC Link is described below 2 1 System Configuration 1 Remote net ver 1 mode 2 A total of 64 remote I O stations remote device stations local stations standby master stations or intelligent device stations can be connected to a single master station However the following conditions must all be satisfied a Number of modules occupying 1 station b Number of modules occupying 2 stations c Number of modules occupying 3 stations d Number of modules occupying 4 stations A Number of remote I O stations lt 64 B Number of remote device stations lt 42 C Number of local stations standby master stations and intelligent device stations lt 26 Condition 1 1 X a 2 X b 3 X c 4 X d x 64 Condition 2 16 A 54 B 88 x C lt 2304 Aa a aa 1 module for
480. s turned on 8 31 8 31 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 2 8 Availability Description n x Not available Stores the execution result of the data link stop instruction with SAU Data link stop result SEE 645 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of temporary error invalid station Temporary error ea SW0049 specification invalid station esr specification result 0 Norma p Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Temporary error Indicates the execution result of the temporary error invalid station SW004B invalid station specification cancellation 64 specification cancel 0 Normal result Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 swoo4D Indicates the execution result of the line test 64D Line test result 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Indicates the execution result of the parameter setting test SW004F Parameter setting test y P ng 0 Normal 64 result Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the system configuration check result when new station is Automatic CC Link f 81 0052 added to system using an automatic CC Link startup startup execution 652v 0 Normal resul Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3
481. setting E gt Ready Q02H Host station Ove SCRL 11 20 11 20 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Setting the local station parameters This section explains the settings of the network parameters and the automatic refresh parameters of the local station 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible local station station number 1 a Setting the network parameters Set the network parameters as follows using the attached parameter setting checklist Start I O No 0000 to OFEO 0000 Data link disorder Input data hold clear Case of CPU STOP Refresh clears compulsoril stations Default Occupies 1 station Expanded cyclic single double quadruple octuple ee ae Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode 1i Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode pane 1 to 64 mets All connect count Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T ST D W R or ZR Remote regist
482. sh parameter setting Is the correct master station parameter information Unable to receive input from a remote I O station area being used CPU built in parameters default Check parameter information SW0067 parameters e Check the parameters e Check the total number of stations SW0070 Is the corresponding remote I O station number e Check the max communication station number recognized by the master station SW0071 e Check the number of connected modules SW0072 13 1 13 1 13 TROUBLESHOOTIN lee MELSEC Q Description of problem Check item Check procedure 13 Unable to receive input from a remote I O station Unable to output data from a remote I O station Unable to receive remote input RX of a remote device station 13 2 Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any overlap station numbers Do the settings match Are the refresh set with the automatic refresh parameters and the refresh executed with the FROM TO instructions performed simultaneously Is the corresponding remote I O station performing data link Is data written to the correct address of remote output RY buffer memory Is the master station parameter information area being used CPU built in internal parameters default parameters correct Is the corresponding remote I O station number recognized by the master station Is the corresponding station set as a reserved station Are there any
483. sh parameters of the ver 2 compatible local station Station MUMBOr5 Geek 11 26 11 3 4 Creating a program a a a aaa aaa aaa aa a t ae aaa a ai Daaa aa an 11 27 1 Master station DrOgralm oia co E co ad toe t ed 11 29 2 bocal statiori program iii mec i mme ELI e te o Ene id 11 29 11 3 5 Performing the data link n e i Lee ae Lee e len eee eis 11 30 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display sse 11 30 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program seen 11 31 11 4 When Remote Net Additional Mode is Used ssseeeeeeeeneenen enne 11 32 11 4 1 Configuring a system sssssssssssssssssssee enne nennt nnn 11 32 1 Setting the master and local stations sessssssssssssssssseeeeeenee nennen 11 33 11 4 2 Setting the master station parameters ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeneenne nennen nnne 11 34 1 Setting the network parameters of the master 11 34 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station 11 36 11 4 3 Setting the local station parameters ssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeenne nennen 11 37 1 Setting the network parameters of the ver 1 compatible lo
484. sible to perform automatic refresh in the system In case a system includes both a module for which the network parameters are set by GX Developer and a module for which the network parameters are set by the dedicated instruction RLPASET the module for which the network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction should not be included in the No of boards in module setting of GX Developer Network parameter Automatic refresh parameter Write to PLC Master station Remote I O station Remote device station o0000 95 95 Data link start Local station SLT cm Setting method For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 6 Parameter setting with dedicated instruction It is possible to use the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters of the master station and start the data link Using the RLPASET instruction to set the parameters has the following advantages e It is possible to mount five or more QJ61BT11N modules see Section 2 2 1 for details about the number of CPUs that can be mounted e It is possible to change the network parameter settings while the PLC CPU is running It is recommended to use GX Developer to set the parameters when the number of QJ61BT11N mounted is 4 or less Parameter setting direction Control _ data set RLPASET _ instruction RLPASET instr
485. st request OFF Not requested ON Requested Reads the parameter setting information for the actual system SB0009 Parameter information configuration 0 b9 read request OFF Normal ON Abnormal 580002 5 0 b2 80005 Temporary error 5 0 b5 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 5 Link special relay list 2 5 Availability Available Not available Number Name Description Online Offline Master station Local station Forcefully transfers the data link control from the standby master station that is controlling the data link to the standby master station in case the standby master station becomes faulty OFF Not requested ON Requested Starts the initial processing using the information registered during the Remote device station initialization procedure registration SBOO0D While SBOOOD is on the refresh of the remote input output and initialization procedure 5E0n b13 registration instruction remote registers stops OFF Not instructed ON Instructed Indicates the module access module operation status Module status OFF Normal Module is operating normally ON Abnormal Module error has occurred Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Startup instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link restart instruction acknowledgment completion SB0041 Data link restart status 5 4 b1 complete OFF Not comple
486. station Remote register RWr Remote register RWw Local station Transient transmission area Buffer memory Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Automatic refresh MELSEC Q PLC CPU Ew PLC CPU 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU 4 Intelligent device station communication Communication between the master station and the intelligent device station uses two types of transmission methods cyclic transmission and transient transmission see Section 4 2 4 a Cyclic transmission Signals for handshaking with the intelligent device station positioning start positioning complete etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY Numeric data positioning start number present feed value etc is communicated using remote registers RWw and RWr Automatic refresh Master station Automatic refresh Automatic refresh Intelligent device station MELSEC Q Servo amplifier Automatic refresh Remote Link scan Remote input input RX RX Remote Linie Scan Remote 7 7 output output RY RY f Remote Link scan Remote register register RWw RWw LU Remote Link scan Remote register register RWr RWr b Transient transmission Read RIRD or written RIWT operation of the intelligent device station PLC CPU buffer memory can be performed
487. station Duplex funetign Master station Duplex function Type Local station Standby master station Standby master station Default Master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Mode net cone mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Hemote I O net moda Off line Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 All connect count 2 modules Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Ei Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR i eee EE EMEN Pp _ Ver 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W RorZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SBorZR_ Special register SW Device name Select fom M L B D W R SWorzR Retry count aed 3 times y Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to 10 1 modules count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Standby master station No y P Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select C Stop D continue
488. station and standby master station Expanded cyclic setting cannot be changed single Number of occupied stations No setting Occupies 1 station Occupies 2 stations Occupies 3 stations Occupies 4 stations Remote station points cannot be changed 32 points when occupies 1 station 64 points when occupies 2 stations 96 points when occupies 3 stations 128 points when occupies 4 stations Reserved invalid station select No setting Reserved station Invalid station error invalid station Intelligent buffer select word No setting Send 0 64 to 4096 Receive 0 64 to 4096 Automatic 0 128 to 4096 Example Set the station data according to the system configuration specified in Section 6 3 CC Link station information Module 1 x Expanded Exclusive station Remote station Reserve invalid Intelligent buffer select word 4 tation Station type cyclic setting points station select Receive Automatic 1 1 Remote 1 0 station x singe Exclusive station 1 32 points T No setting 2 2 Remote device station single Exclusive station 2 64 points 7 No setting 3 4 Intelligent device station single v Exclusive station 4 128 points 7 No setting 4 8 Remote 1 0 station single Exclusive station 1 32 points Reserve station 59 Intelligent device station single Exclusive station 4 128 points v No setting 64 64 128 64 64 128 v Default End Can
489. station count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified No Default Blank Stop continue PLC down select Dolault Sio C Stop gt continue A h h Scan mode setting Synenronous synchronous CAsynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Set 0 Standby master station a Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below Project Edit Find Rey ci Dam S x ese lal sem SIE es En Progam A zb Des ssl 212 iff x je 1 7 sce ars ano co elc el lll ral fea 3 f id Ead 16 Bm Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting Ej Program HF Device comment i 2 3 5 1 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 ist PLC paramete Operational Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Master station v 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start x E E 21 Device memory Mode Remote 1 0 net mode bd x 2 E Device init All connect count 3 Remote Remote output RY Remote register wir Remote registe Fi ww Ver 2 Remote inpu
490. station specified Default Blank Stop continue EE PLC down select P Default Stop Asynchronous synchronous Scan mode setting y y Default Asynchronous Standby master station No 11 40 11 40 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below GX Developer Unset proj t parameters Setting the CC Link list MELSEC Q Bes SU sl je e ee Unset project 5 Program Device comment Parameter 1a PLC paramete Network 12 Remote pass Device memory Device init 11 41 No of boards in module 1 Blank no setting 1 0000 Start 1 0 No Operational settings Operational settin Type Local station Master station data link type Mode Remote net Additional mode All connect count Remote input R Remote output Remote Remote Ver 2 Remote input RX 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote reaister Awr Ver 2 Remote register ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode Delay infomation setti Station information settin Rem
491. station station intelligent station Remote station occupies 4 Reserved device station X Y00 to 1F station occupies 2 stations station occupies 4 stations occupies stations occupies double 1 station 1 station quadruple octuple 6 5 1 Master station network parameter settings 1 settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual Edit Find Replace te laj xl sa ta ta 20 ci EE le oela a e amp 846 ll ele lel v 24 3 ales od eal p s p e Led sene o e e Program z al afz alg sepe zek ele e l x E E Unset precy No of boardsinmodue 1 Boards Blank no setting 89 88 Program Device comment 1 89 19 Parameter Statt 1 0 No s PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 2 Network paral __ Master station 1 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode IR Device init All connect count Remote input AX Remote output FiY Remote reaisterfF Ww Remote register ww Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote outpulfR Y Ver 2 Remote register wi Ver 2 Remote registerfE Ww Specia
492. ster Sw Retry count Automatic reconnection station c Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt settina Remote device station initial setting Operational _ settings Stand by master station v ER Remote net Ver 1 mode v ae qe ue nsi 1000 1000 wo ount Interrupt settinas 4 FUNCTION arises MELSEC Q d Program example when standby master function master station duplex function is used e Control start relay used when master station is operating M10 Control start relay used when standby master station is operating M11 supe SET M10 Control start relay when the master j station is operating eee ee M11 Control start relay when the station master station is local station is xo OF SB7B operating X1 X i e A 4 MC NO MO Initial device set NO__MO SB5A 1 K8 2241000711000 Save remote input RX and emote register RWr data to W device BMOVP D1000 W1500 K16 J Control ladder when the master station is operating BMOVP 1000 K4Y1000 K8 M u gt Set the saved data to remote output RY and remote register RWr BMOVP W1500 D2000 K16 J SB5A SB5B m HWA l ser SBI Refresh change instruction request ON SB42 x 5 x m RST B1 Refresh change instruction request OFF _
493. stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is output automatically for each link scan to remote I O stations Remote I O station Remote I O station Station number 3 Station number 4 PLC CPU Master station occupies 1 station occupies 1 station RY7FF to YOF to YOO to Y10 e When setting the automatic refresh parameters it is recommended to specify Y as the remote output RY refresh device If any device other than Y e g M or L is specified parameter setting must be made to compulsorily clear the device status at a CPU STOP If parameter setting is not made the device status before a STOP is retained as is For slave station compulsory clear in case of CPU STOP see Section 4 3 5 For the method to stop a data link see Section 4 4 10 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 2 Communication with the remote device stations MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and the remote device stations In the communication with remote device stations the signals for handshaking with remote device stations initial data request flag error reset request flag etc are communicated using remote input RX and remote output RX Numeric data averaging processing specification digital output value etc is communicated using remote register RWw and remote register RWr PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Master st
494. system Remote I O station The remote station that handles bit unit data only Remote device station The remote station that handles bit unit and word unit data only Local station veevee s The station having a PLC CPU and the ability to communicate with the master and other local stations Intelligent device station The station that can perform transient transmission 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Compatibility with CC Link This product supports following CC Link functions and performance Cyclic transmission Increase of cyclic transmission data size Transient transmission Less restrictions on the station to station cable length 1 3 Features The features of the CC Link are described below 1 Remote I O station communication The ON OFF status of a switch or indicator lamp is communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY see Section 4 2 1 PLC CPU Master station Remote I O station Automatic refresh Link scan X Remote input Input ots RX Automatic refresh Link scan y Remote output Output RY 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU MELSEC Q 2 Remote device station communication Signals for handshaking with the remote device station initial request error occurred flag etc are communicated using the remote input RX and remote output RY The setting data to the remote device station are communicated using remote registers R
495. t FX Ver 2 Remote outputfRY Ver 2 Remote registerfE Wr Ver 2 Remote register Ww Special relay SB Special register SW Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i i Scan mode Asynchronous s M Delay infomation setti Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting __ ___Interrupt settings J 4 Set if itis needed No setting Already set Indispensable settings No setting Already set PLC parameter Q02H Host station Ovrwrte 9 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below 1 Set the refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 2 Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 3 Set the refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 4 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting the refresh devices for special relay SB and special register SW to SB and SW respectively make sure that they do not overlap with device numbers used in the MELSECNET H network a Example of automatic refresh parameter settings An example of automatic refresh parameter settings is shown below zMELSOFT series GX loper Unset m Setting the CC Link list
496. t RY Remote reqister Awr Remote register Rw w Ver 2 Remote inputf Rx 2 Remote output RY 2 Remote register Awr Ver 2 Remote register E Ww Special relay SB Special registerSW Retry count 3 Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i y Scan mode settin Asynchronous X M Delay infomation setti 0 Station information settin Station information Remote device station initial settinu Initial settings Interrupt setting Interrupt settings pH x est s wisis IT Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset p Ready Q02 H Host station Ove NUM SCRL 11 19 11 19 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Setting the automatic refresh parameters of the master station a Setting the automatic refresh parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters according to the procedure below Setthe refresh device for remote input RX to X1000 N Set the refresh device for remote output RY to Y1000 C2 Setthe refresh device for remote register RWr to WO A Setthe refresh device for remote register RWw to W1000 Set the refresh devi
497. t complete ON Complete Indicates the mode setting status of the transmission rate mode 580060 Hast mode setting switch for the host 5 6 bO OFF Online ON Other than online Indicates the station type of the host OFF Master station station number 0 ON Local station station numbers 1 to 64 Indicates whether or not the standby master station setting exists for 580062 Host standby master host 5 6 b2 station setting status OFF No setting ON Setting exists Indicates the input status setting from a data link faulty station of the host OFF Clear ON Retain 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only SB0061 5 6 b1 Input data status of host data link faulty station SB0065 5 6 b5 8 PROGRAMMING Number 580066 BE64 66 Number of host occupied stations SB0067 b7 SB006A itch setti 5E6 b10 Switch setting status SB006D Parameter setting 5 6 b13 status SBOO6E Host station operation 5E6x b14 status SB0070 Master station 7 b0 Jinformation SB0071 Standby master 5 7 b1 station information SB0072 Scan mode setting bE74 b2 Jinformation Operation specification when CPU is down status SB0073 7 SB0074 Reserved station 5 7 b4 specified status SB0075 Error invalid station 5 7 b5 specified status Temporary err
498. t has been turned on in the initial procedure registration is turned off Therefore about signals that are required to turn always on such as conversion valid signal they should be turned on in the sequence program 2 If the procedure registration is not completed for all stations registered to the remote device station initialization procedure registration the completion status of remote device station initialization procedure SBOO5F does not turn on If there is a faulty station turn off the remote device station initialization procedure registration instruction SBOOOD according to the completion status of the other stations 10 29 10 29 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS Setting with the sequence program Reference MELSEC Q For reference an example setting performed with the sequence program is shown below Status confirmation of AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN X0 XOF Xi SW80 0 0 E me No M100 SW80 3 A T NO M100 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting X1018 1000 MOVP H31 W1001 MOVP 200 1003 wove Ki6 1005 Y1018 SET Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting change Initial setting change AJ65VBTCU 68ADV initial setting processing X1018 7 88 MT RST 1018 X1019 3 122 RST Y1019 AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN initial setting X1078 124 MovP HOFC W1014 1015
499. t to Clear Hold input data not checked Operational settings module 1 x r Parameter name i Data link disorder station setting r Case of CPU STOP setting T Clears compulsorily Cancel e Set the slave station refresh compulsory clear setting at PLC CPU STOP using Operational settings Default value Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Setting range Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Clears compulsorily Clears compulsorily checked Example Set to Refresh Clears compulsorily not checked Operational settings module 1 x Parameter name A p Data link disorder station setting Hold input data r Case of CPU STOP setting i Tz Cancel 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q f Set the station type using Default value Master station Setting range Master station Master station Duplex function Local station Standby master station Example Set to Master station g Set the CC Link mode using Mode Default value Remote net Ver 1 mode Setting range Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Example Set to Remote net Ver 1 mode h Set the total number of connected stations in the CC Link system including reserved stations using All connect count Default value 64 modules Setting range 1 to 64 modules Example Set to 5 modules
500. tation occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote register RWw 1 1 M Numeric data for averaging processing setting A D conversion enable disable setting etc RWwO E 1 RWw1 Rwa BAN REC ae es a E RWw3 Remote register RWw RWw4 Numeric data for sess p COS averaging processing Lise RWwS i i setting A D conversion RWw6 i enable disable setting pamm gt RWwO i i RWw1 1 1 gt P 4 1 RWw2 RWw3 o gt lt RWw4 l RWw5 RWw6 t E es RWw7 po 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ees m Lim im imm imm mem mimm mm mcm mmm ee al Remote register RWw when the AJ65BT 64AD is set to station number 1 Address RWwO RWwi RWw2 RWwa RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 A D conversion enable disable setting RWw The data content to be written to the remote registers RWwO to RWwn is predefined for each remote device station 4 8 4 8 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Reading from the remote register RWr 8 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station is automatically stored in the remote register Rwr buffer memory of the master station 9 The remote register RWr data of a remote device station s
501. tations 2 Station Station number 1 number 2 Check the other station data link status SW0080 to SW0083 for a data link error The station number setting of the station where a data link error has occurred may be wrong 2 Station number 0 station overlap checking Checks whether or not more than one station whose station number setting is 0 exists in the system 1 When duplicating the ERR LED lights up an error code is stored in SWOO6A switch setting status SBOO6A switch setting status turns on 2 Bycorrecting the switch setting to normal and restarting the data link the ERR LED is turned off and the data in SWOO6A can be cleared 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 12 Multiple PLC system support multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via AJ65BT G4 S3 or other station CPUs This function allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any CPU in a This is illustrated by the following example It is possible to monitor CPUA of the local station from peripheral device A connected to the AJ65BT G4 S3 and read the programs of CPU2 of the master station from peripheral device B connected to CPUS of the local station This function cannot be used with function version A Master station Peripheral AJ65BT G4 S3 device A Reading of programs Terminal resistor Peripheral device B Access source CPUs must be control PLCs in order to
502. te Remote Remote output RY input RX put RX output P Remote I O station Station number 2 umber of occupied stations 1 a Remote I O station Station number 3 RY00 tg RYOF RYAO to RY1F r RY20 to RY2F Number of occupied stations 1 X10 to X1F X00 to XOF Data in the shaded areas in the master station is either input or retained according to the Operational settings in the network parameters 4 37 4 37 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Setting method Perform the setting using the GX Developer a Setting the master station First set Type in the network parameters Master station that was down returns to system operation Master station Duplex function MELSEC Q Master station that was down does not return to system operation Master station Next set the Standby master station No of the network parameter Setting range 1 to 64 blank means no specification for standby master station Default blank no specification for standby master station zm spe Start 1 0 No Po Operational setting Operational settings Type Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start bd Mode Remote net Ver mode v All connect count Remote input RX Remote output RY Remote register E wr Remote register F ww Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output RY Ver 2 Remote registerfE wr Ver 2 Remote register F ww Specia
503. te Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 01 and Write Data to 0031 Setting the third condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 03 and the Write Data to 0200 Setting the fourth condition 1 2 3 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RWw the Device Number to 05 and the Write Data to 0010 Setting the fifth condition 1 2 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set Details of execution setting Set the Write Device to RY the Device Number to 18 and the Write Data to ON 10 46 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q f Setting the sixth condition 1 Execute Flag setting Set the Execute Flag to Execute 2 Operational condition setting Set the Operational condition to Same as prev set 3 Detail
504. te ON Startup complete Refresh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master SB0042 acknowledgment Switching have been acknowledged 5E44 b2 us at standby OFF Not executed ster switching ON Instruction acknowledged resh instruction Indicates whether or not the refresh instruction at standby master 580043 complete status at switching is complete 4 standby master OFF Not executed switching ON Switching complete Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment status OFF Not acknowledged ON Stop instruction acknowledged Indicates the data link stop instruction acknowledgment completion 580045 status 4 b5 OFF Not complete ON Stop complete Indicates whether the forced master switching SBO00C signal can Forced master SB0046 switching be executed or not 4 b6 Gxecut bl status OFF Cannot be executed ON Can be executed Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary error invalid instruction OFF Not executed ON Instruction acknowledged Indicates the acknowledgment completion status of remote station Temporary error temporary error invalid instruction invalid complete OFF Not executed status ON Temporary error invalid station established Specified station number is invalid Temporary error Indicates the acknowledgment status of remote station temporary SB004A invalid canceling error invalid cancel instruction 5 4 b10 a
505. te Business Park IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 4353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com IRELAND Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 SIA POWEL LATVIA BY 220030 Minsk Lienes iela 28 Phone 375 0 17 2275 704 LV 1009 Riga Fax 4375 0 17 22 76 669 Phone 371 784 22 80 e mail tehnikon belsonet net Fax 371 784 22 81 Getronics b v Belgium S Maik utu utuly Control Systems UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Pontbeeklaan 43 Savanoriu pr 187 B 1731 Asse Zellik LT 2053 Vilnius Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 Fax 370 0 52322 980 e mail infoautomation getronics com mail powelGutu lt TELECON CO BULGARIA INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA 4 A Ljapchev Blvd Cuza Voda 36 1 81 BG 1756 Sofia MD 2061 Chisinau Phone 359 0 2 97 44058 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 4359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 e mail e mail intehsis mdl net INEA CR d o o CROATIA Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Drvinje 63 Control Systems HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 e mail Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 AutoCont CGEHA mail info gia getronics com Control Systems s r o Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY Nemocnicni 12 Teglverksveien 1 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 N 3002 Drammen Phone 420 59 6152 111 Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 420 59 6152 562 F
506. te station and intelligent device station For details on the station number setting switches see Section 7 3 Specify the station numbers according to the following conditions 1 Specify sequential station numbers Station numbers can be specified regardless of the order in which the stations are connected For a module occupying two or more stations specify the first station number 2 Specify unique station numbers If duplicate station numbers are specified an installation error occurs Error codes are stored in SWO0069 Setting example When station numbers are specified by skipping one station number 3 Standby 5 Local master station station occupies occupies 1 station 4 stations Station number 0 Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 2 Remote device station occupies 2 stations Station number 9 4 Intelligent device station occupies 1 station 1 Remote I O station occupies 1 station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number Station number 4 Station number 5 Station number 6 Station number 7 Station number 8 Station number 9 Station number _ 6 4 1 Remote 2 Remote device station 3 Standby master station 4 Intelligent 5 Local station station device station Data link faulty station If this station is set as a reserved station it will
507. ted under the following conditions when the standby master function master station duplex function is used a System configuration Remote device station Station number 2 Number of occupied stations 2 Intelligent device station Station number 4 Number of occupied stations 1 l Standby master station Station number 1 Number of occupied stations 1 b Parameter settings of the master station Start 1 0 No Operational setting Type Master station data link type Mode All connect count Remote input AX Remote output RAY Remote register Awr Remote register E ww Ver 2 Remote input Rx Ver 2 Remote output R Ver 2 Remote reaister R w Ver 2 Remote register E ww Special relay SB Special register S W Retry count Automatic reconnection station c Stand by master station No PLC down select Scan mode setting Delay infomation setting Station information setting Interrupt setting Remote device station initial setting Operational settings 1000 wo E HIINSESESNEUET YU NE SS swo ount 1 ma 1 1 rj Asynchronous Y _ c Parameter settings of the standby master station Start 1 0 No Operational setting Type Master station data link type Mode All connect count Remote input RX Remote output AY Remote register Rwr Remote register F ww Ver 2 Remote input RX Ver 2 Remote output AY Ver 2 Remote registerfE wr Ver 2 Remote register F ww Special relay SB Special regi
508. teligent device station singe v Exclusive station 4 128 points No setting 64 64 1287 Default End Cancel 3 The following shows the results of the communication buffer and automatic update buffer assignments First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Send buffer First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Receive buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Send buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Receive buffer First module station number 4 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer Second module station number 9 Intelligent device station Automatic update buffer 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q 6 4 2 Master station automatic refresh parameter settings 1 The following shows an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tool e tme osla sla ele ele soul eal l co es eps e e e pe c d S Jalal Program zl l le SLE eleg zl ml x B m Unset project No of boards in module 1 7 Boards
509. th the master station and the corresponding local station e remote device station is not operating normally remote device station e Check the sequence program When multiple remote stations are powered off at e Increase the transmission rate y module switch setting of GX Developer Is the switch 4 setting of the intelligent function Set switch 4 of the intelligent function module switch module switch settings correct settings of GX Developer to 01004 e Check the error code for the PLC CPU Are the various settings specified by the RLPASET e Check the error code for the master station instruction correct Check the operation status of the PLC CPU for the master station When a dedicated instruction is executed the abnormal completion bit turns on The abnormal completion bit turns on when the dedicated instruction RLPASET is executed Has the parameter setting method been changed without turning the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or resetting the PLC CPU Turn the power supply to the PLC system off and back on or reset the PLC CPU Change the module for the one having the same If the condition returns to normal the disconnected the module been changed for the one having number of occupied stations and station type data link error station does not return to the different number of occupied stations When changing the number of occupied stations the system automatically and station type
510. the Remote I O net mode Section 4 4 5 master station and remote I O stations By assigning modules that will be connected in the future as reserved stations they will not be treated as data link faulty Reserved station function stations If any of the connected modules is specified it cannot Section 4 4 6 perform data link The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points Prevents modules that may be powered off in the system Error invalid station setting function configuration from being treated as data link faulty stations by Section 4 4 7 setting the network parameters Synch Performs link scan by synchronizing with ynchronous mode sequence scan Scan synchronous function E Section 4 4 8 h d Perform link scan without synchronizing syncnronous sequence scan Temporary error invalid station Prevents modules specified by GX Developer from being treated ection 4 4 setting function as data link faulty stations temporarily during online operation Data link stop restart Stops or restarts the data link that is being executed Section 4 4 10 Checks for the overlapping of number of occupied stations and whether or not more than one module having a station number Section 4 4 11 setting of 0 exists in the system Station number overlap checking function Allows monitoring and reading writing programs from to any Multiple PLC system support CPU in a multiple PLC system mounted with the QJ61BT11N via Sect
511. the GX Developer For more details on the setting see Sections 6 3 to 6 6 4 FUNCTION eA MELSEC Q 4 3 5 Clearing data in case of PLC CPU STOP Slave station refresh compulsory clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP This function compulsorily clears output Send data to slave stations when the PLC CPU comes to STOP Remote output RY refresh device setting in the automatic refresh parameter dialog box provides the following choices When Y is specified the remote output RY is cleared regardless of the parameter setting When specifying any device other than Y e g M or L make parameter setting whether the remote output RY will be refreshed or compulsorily cleared When using GX Developer for setting use Version 8 03D or later 1 Target output send data The following shows the applicable buffer memory areas Local station station number 4 Local station station number 3 Remote device station station number 2 Remote I O station Master station station number 1 Remote input RX Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 RWw Station number 4 Remote register Station number 1 Remote output RY Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 RWr Remote register Station number 1 Remote register RWw Station number 4 Remote register RWr Station
512. the expanded cyclic setting is double and the remote device station processing time is 1 5 ms SM X n LS X m Remote device station processing time ms 20 1 3 3 1 5 30 5 ms ESSING TIME 5 DATALINK PROCESSING MELSEC Q 5 2 4 Master station local station Ver 1 compatible slave station 1 Master station RX lt local station RY This indicates the time from the moment the local station CPU device turns ON OFF until the master station CPU device turns ON OFF Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 X2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn X 2 SL ms 20 1 2 10 50 ms Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 3 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Li
513. the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be
514. the output module and an external device 1 Using the GX Developer set Y1000 in the Device field for the Bit device by choosing Online Debug Device test and then click on FORCE ON 2 Ifthe connection between the output module and external device is properly performed the indicator lamp corresponding to the external device YOO is lit POINT If X corresponding to the switch does not turn on or the lamp corresponding to Y does not turn on confirm the slave station offset size information buffer memory address 3E0H Un G992 to check the RX RY RWw RWr assignment status of the module 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 T Branch Connection with the CC Link Dedicated Cable This section explains how to perform a T branch connection using the CC Link dedicated cable 7 6 1 T Branch system configuration The following shows a system configuration using T branch connection Bs me block connector Remote I O station remote device station Main line Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station Master remote device station station I Branch line Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Remote I O station remote device station Local station Remote I O station Y A intelligent remote device station A maximum of 6 stations device station can be connected maximum of 6 sta
515. the refresh device for ver 2 remote output RY to Y1500 7 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWr to W1000 8 Setthe refresh device for ver 2 remote register RWw to W1500 9 Setthe refresh device for special relay SB to SBO 10 Set the refresh device for special register SW to SWO When setting X Y B W SB and SW as refresh devices make setting so that they do not overlap with the device numbers used on the other networks etc b Setting example A setting example is shown below amp MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list BEE Project Edit Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Tools Window Help 8 TE BEDL E alel ll t mE Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 9 88 Program Device comment 1 2 3 sf Parameter Start 1 0 0000 g s PLC paramete Operational settin Operational settings 2 Network parat Type Master station Y 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start bd 8 Device memory Mode Remote net Additional mode Bi Device init All connect count 2 Remote 1000 Remote output RY 1000 Remote register R wr wa Remote reqister RWw 100 Ver 2 Remote input FiX 1500 Ver 2 Remote outp
516. the specifications of the QJ61BT11N For the general specifications of the QJ61BT11N refer to the user s manual for the CPU module to be used 3 1 Performance Specifications Table 3 1 lists the performance specifications of the OJ61BT11N Table 3 1 Performance specifications Maximum overall cable distance Maximum transmission distance Maximum number of connected stations 64 See Section 2 1 master station Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 stations local station The number of stations can be switched using the GX Developer parameter setting 1 Remote I O RX RY 2048 points Maximum number of link points per system Remote register RWw 256 points master Station remote device station loc l station intelligent x1 device station standby master station Remote register RWr 256 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station Remote I O RX RY 32 points local station is 30 points Remote station local station intelligent device Remote register RWw 4 points master station remote device station local station intelligent station standby master station device station standby master station Number of link points per station Remote register RWr 4 points remote device station local station intelligent device station standby master station master station ommunication method Broadcast polling method ynchronous method Flag syn
517. ther stations stations other than the one to which peripheral devices are connected a Operating procedure Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT diagnostics 1 Select CC Link for Module Setting 2 Specify the target master module of Monitoring other station for Module No or I O Address 3 Click the button 4 Click the button CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station Invalid station if temporary error Setting Cancel For current cursor station tt Monit Stop Monitoring Close b Monitoring items 1 Station Displays the head station number of each station 2 Reserve Displays whether or not a reserved station is set Reserved station is set Reserved station is not set 3 Invalid error Displays whether or not an error invalid station is set Error invalid station is set Error invalid station is not set 13 17 13 17 13 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Station type Displays the station type The CC Link compatible version is also displayed in the remote net ver 2 mode or remote net additional mode Intelli Local station intelligent device station and standby master station Remote I O station Device Remote device station Number of occupied stations Displays the number of occupied stations Status Displays the link status of the module Transient error Displays whether or not an error occurred during transient transmissio
518. thin the range of the Start number of the device in which control data is stored specified device Device name Within the range of the S2 Start number of the device to which write data is to be stored specified device Device that is turned ON for one scan upon completion of writing D 1 also turns ON at an abnormal completion The file register of each of the local device and the program cannot be used as a device for setting data Within the range of the specified device Control data Set data ule the status when the instruction is complete 81 0 Completion status No error normal completion System m than 0 Error code 51 Station murmber Specify the station numbers of the local station and intelligent 0 to 64 station b8 b7 Access code F See 1 and 2 User Attribute code Access code Attribute code Buffer memory 3 address or device number 1 to 480 S1 Specify the write data count in word units 3 User to write Cow Specify the buffer memory start address or device start User number App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 See the manual for the local station or the intelligent device station to which data will be written When the random access buffer is specified specify the addresses by setting the start address of the random access buffer memory as 0 2 Indicates the maximum number of data items that can be written Specify the bu
519. time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM X n X 1 SL ms 20 1 1 10 30 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS 2 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple S Se Eee 15 Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 2 3 1 10 51 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic set
520. ting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM Xn 2 SL ms 20 X 1 X2 10 50 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q 3 Master station RWr lt local station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting Example When the sequence scan time for the master station is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms the expanded cyclic setting is double and the sequence scan time for the local station processing time is 10 ms SM LS X 1 X m 1 SL ms 20 3 X 1 X3 1 10 42 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n X 1 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time SL Local station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 n LS X m SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number m Constant expanded cyclic setting Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Examp
521. tion Local station Standby master station Remote net Ver 1 mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Remote net Additional mode Remote I O net mode Off line Default Remote net Ver 1 mode 1 to 64 E connect count Default 64 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote input RX Device name Select from X M L B D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote output RY Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Ver 2 Remote register RWw Device name Select from M L B T C ST D W R or ZR Special relay SB Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Special register SW Device name Select from M L B D W R SW or ZR 1to7 R etry count Default 3 Automatic reconnection station 1to 10 count Default 1 Blank 1 to 64 Blank No standby master station specified Default Blank PLC down select Fiopieon nue p eo Default Stop A h Scan mode setting synchronous synchronous Asymohmaeeesym Nonos Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Co Ver 2 Remote register RWr Device name Select from M L B D W R or ZR D Standby master station No 11 37 11 37 11 CO
522. tion RWr local station RWw 1 Master station The send data from the remote register RWr of the remote device station and the remote register RWw of the local station is stored When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 2 Local station Data is sent to the master station and other local stations by storing it in the address corresponding to the host station number Data in the remote register RWr of the remote device station can also be received When 1 station is occupied any of 4 to 32 words are used The number of used points changes depending on the expanded cyclic setting and the number of occupied stations see Section 3 1 Example Remote device station Station number 1 Occupies 1 station Station number 2 Occupies 1 station Master station Expanded cyclic setting single Expanded cyclic setting quadruple Remote register RWw Address 4 00 IO ie zo Ne NEU ad RWw 2 4402 number 1 Rwa pr Pa a 4 04 RWw 4 4404 mRws5 1 1 MEM Caco RW P EE po 5 EE RWw7 4407 4 08 EE en acon RWr9 9 sna aa joi 4
523. tion 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms 220X1 43X2 410 36 ms 5 DATALINK PROCESSING TIME MELSEC Q Maximum value a Asynchronous mode SM LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM LS X 2 SL ms 20 3 2 10 36 ms b Synchronous mode SM X n LS X 2 SL ms SM Master station sequence program scan time LS Link scan time see Section 5 1 SL Local station sequence program scan time n LS SM value when fractions following the decimal point are rounded up to the next whole number Example When the master station sequence scan time is 20 ms the link scan time is 3 ms and the local station sequence scan time is 10 ms SM Xn LS X 2 SL ms 220X1 43X2 410 36 ms Master station RWr lt local station RWw This indicates the time from the moment data is set to the local station CPU device until the data is stored in the master station CPU device Expression Normal value a Asynchro
524. tion Remote device station Remote I O station 0 N 1 0 000 li d RS 232C Analog digital Remote I O module converter module AJ65BTB1 16D i Interface module AJ65BT R2 AJ65VBTCU 68ADVN AJ65BTC 32D AJ65VBTCU 68ADIN Total 64 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Applicable System Applicable PLC CPUs and notes on the system configuration are described below 2 2 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted 1 Applicable modules and number of CPUs that can be mounted The CPU modules and network modules for remote I O station to which the QJ61BT11N can be installed and number of modules that can be installed are listed in the table below a When performing the parameter setting with the GX Developer Applicable module Number of CPUs that can be mounted Q00JCPU QOO0CPU Maximum 2 Q01CPU QO2CPU QO2HCPU CPU QO6HCPU Maximum 4 module Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 12PHCP Q ore Maximum 4 1 9 Q25PHCPU 12PRHCPU 9 Maximum 4 EENES Q25PRHCPU QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G Maximum 4 QJ72BR15 x1 Refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 For use in the remote net additional mode select a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of serial No 06112 or later It can be mounted only with the P MA Network module If any incompatible PLC CPU is used the operation can not guaranteed x3 For use in the remote net additional mode use a PLC CPU with first 5 digits of serial No 05032
525. tion can communicate with the master station However Ver 2 compatible stations are recognized as faulty so that data of these stations cannot be confirmed Local station Local station Remote device station Remote device station Ver 2 mode Ver 1 mode Ver 2 compatible Ver 1 compatible Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 4 Ver 2 mode station ceca station Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Ver 2 compatible remote output RY Ver 2 compatible remote input RX Station number 1 gt Station number 1 Station number 2 station number 2 Station number SI tation number 3 Station number 4 Station number 4 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x2 When the master station is in the remote net additional mode of the QJ61BT11N and the local station is in the remote net ver 2 mode of the QJ61BT11N a link is performed as shown in the following areas Local station Local station Local station Standby master station Ver 1 mode Ver 2 mode additional mode additional mode Master station Station number 1 Station number 2 Station number 3 Station number 7 additional mode Occupies 1 station Occupies 1 station Occupies 4 stations 1 station prodni e Astiasaran openkan O Peete tose sSSsececea4 1 pren FERAS va EE pia
526. tion with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status On o ot Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed E audet normally L RUN RUN e Controlling data link L smst SMST SD e e RD Receiving data Sending data L em O LERR b LED display of the local station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status On O Off Module is normal QUJeIBTTIN The data link is being performed normally L RUN RUN e MST O SMST SD RD j Receiving data Sending data ERR OLERR 11 46 11 46 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 2 Confirming the operation with the sequence program Using the sequence program confirm that the data link is being performed normally 1 When X20 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 1 turns on 2 When X21 of the local station of station No 1 is turned on 40 of the master station turns on 3 When X21 of the master station is turned on Y41 of the local station of station No 5 turns on 4 When X21 of the local station of station No 5 is turned on Y41 o
527. tions can be connected Branch line Branch line Branch line Terminal resistor between DA and DB Terminal resistor between DA and DB Remote I O station remote device station Local station intelligent device station Remote I O station remote device station The number of branch lines is determined by the branch line length per branch line and the overall branch line length When the model name and hardware version of the master module are as indicated below in a T branch system configuration change the terminating resistor connection method as described below When using the other master module connect the terminating resistor packed with the product AJ61BT11 Hardware version C or earlier AJ61QBT11 Hardware version C or earlier A1SJ61BT11 Hardware version D or earlier A1SJ61QBT11 Hardware version D or earlier 1100 5 1 2W x 4 Connect between DA and DG DB and DG both ends Use a commercially available terminal resistor of 110 5 and 1 2 W resistance 110 and 130 resistors that are supplied with the master local modules cannot be used Connection 1100 1100 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 6 2 T Branch communication specifications list The following describes the communication specifications for T branch connection For communication specifica
528. tions not listed below see Section 3 1 625 kbps 156 kbps 10 5 2 5 Mbps are not allowed Indicates the length of the cable between terminal 100 m 500m Maximum length of the main line resistors The length of the T branch cable branch line 328 1 ft 1640 5 ft A length is not included Maximum length of the branch line m 26 25 ft Indicates the overall cable length per branch Overall branch line length 50 m 164 05 TA 200 m 656 2 ft Indicates the overall length of the entire branch cable Maximum number of connected The total number of connected stations depends on the 3 6 stations per branch stations the branch line CC Link specifications The CC Link dedicated high performance cable cannot be used CC Link dedicated cable Mixing of different brands of CC Link dedicated Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable cables is not allowed Mixing of different brands of Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cables is allowed Terminal block Off the shelf terminal block When wiring cables for the main line side try not to T branch terminal block connector Connector Connector for the FA sensor remove the covering as much as possible ICE947 5 2 comparable product is recommended CC Link dedicated cable Ver 1 10 compatible CC Link dedicated cable uses 110 terminal resistor Length of cabl n th c Length of cable between the Maximum length of main line distan
529. tomatic refresh 11 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh 12 Automatic refresh Hog PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters Y 4 10 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Data link startup 1 When the PLC system is powered on the network parameters in the PLC CPU are transferred to the master station and the CC Link system starts up automatically On off data from a local station to the master station or other local stations 2 The on off data of the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters is stored in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station The remote output RY is used as output data in local station systems 3 The data in the remote output RY buffer memory of the local station is automatically stored for each link scan in the remote input RX buffer memory of the master station and the remote output RY buffer memory of other local stations 4 The input status stored in the remote input RX buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters The remote input RX is used as input data in local station systems 5 The input status stored in the remote output RY buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Local station Station number 2 occupies 4 stations Local station Station number 1 occupies 1 station PLC CPU PLC CPU Master station
530. tomatic update 8 21 Buffer memory list sess 8 5 CC Link dedicated cable 3 3 CC Link diagnostics 13 16 CC Link ver installation parameter matching CiU DEEP 8 38 COC Link version sese 2 9 Communication between the master station and intelligent device stations 12 1 Communication between the master station and local stations 11 1 Communication between the master station and remote device stations 10 1 Communication between the master station and remote I O stations 9 1 Communication buffer 8 20 Communication with the remote I O stations 4 3 Communication with the local stations 4 10 Communication with the remote device stations 4 5 Compatible CC Link ver information 8 38 Compatibility with 1 2 Completion status of remote device station initialization procedure 8 28 Connecting the modules 7 9 Connection cable sss 3 1 CPU monitoring time setting 8 31 Current link scan time 8 34 Cyclic points increase 1 12 4 67 Cyclic trans
531. tored in W100 to W103 RWw0 to RWw3 3 Upon completion of storage in W100 to W103 Y1000 RYO for handshake turns ON Y1000 Y1000 4 By cyclic transmission remote output RY data are sent following the remote resister RWw data and the receiving station s X1000 turns ON 5 Data of WO to W3 RWrO to RWr3 are stored in D100 to D103 6 Upon completion of storage in D100 to D103 Y1000 RYO for handshake turns ON 7 When the data transmission to the receiving station is complete Y1000 turns OFF 11 13 11 13 11 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND LOCAL STATIONS MELSEC Q 11 2 5 Performing the data link Turn on the power to the local station first and then turn on the power to the master station to start the data link 1 Confirming the operation with the LED display The following diagram shows the LED display status of the master station and the local station when the data link is being performed normally a LED display of the master station Make sure that the LED display shows the following status on OO Off Module is normal QJ61BT11N The data link is being performed normally L RUN RUN Controlling data link Sending data e sT SMST e SD e RD Receiving data L L ERR b LED display of the local station Make sure that the
532. tored in the remote register RWr buffer memory is stored in the CPU device set with the automatic refresh parameters Remote device station Remote device station Station number 1 Station number 3 PLC CPU Master station occupies 2 stations occupies 2 stations Remote register RWr i Numeric data such as 1 digital output values i detected temperature value etc f f 1 Remote register RWr Numeric data such as digital output values detected temperature value etc Not used 4 FUNCTIONS 4 2 3 Communication with the local stations PLC CPU Network parameters Automatic refresh parameters MELSEC Q This section explains an overview of the communication between the master and local stations 1 Communication between the master and local stations by cyclic transmission Data communication between PLC CPUs can be performed in N N mode using remote input RX and remote output RY bit data used in local station systems as well as remote register RWw and remote register RWr word data for writing and reading used in local station systems Master station Buffer memory Remote input RX from local station No 1 from local to Remote output RY local station No 1 local station No 2 to Remote register RWw local station No 1 local station No 2 to Remote register RWr Network parameters
533. tration data link startup M303 onl H eP RLPASET 00 D100 D110 D150 D160 Processing at completion of the RLPASET instruction M304 339 K100 K100 KO D170 D170 D171 D172 M304 M303 SB3 M310 Lu Start of the control program N305 4 Performs abnormal completion processing M310 XOF 3624H ME Mc NO M320 NO 4320 Refresh of RX SB6E 380 MW FROM HO HOEO K4X1000 K6 Refresh of RWr SB6E 396 FROM HO 2 0 D1000 K4 Station number 1 control program 580 0 413 Station number 1 control program H Station number 2 control program sW8o0 1 f 427 Station number 2 control program Station number 3 control program 3180 2 441 Station number 3 control program Refresh of RWw SB6E d 455 0 HO HIEO D2000 K4 J Refresh of RY SB6E 412 K4Y1000 K6 488 MCR NO Refresh of SB SW SM400 1 489 TO HO H5EO K4SBO K4 J 10 HO H600 SWO K64 J 2 D150 and D160 are dummy devices MELSEC Q First station number 1 local station Send buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Receive buffer 100 word First station number 1 local station Automatic refresh buffer 0 word Dedicated instruction RLPASET 2 Turn the parameter setting instruction off Instruct to refresh at normal completion of the RLPASET instruction Instruct to start the control program at normal completion of the RLPASET ins
534. truction RX00 to RX5F are read to X1000 to X105F RXr0 to RWr3 are read to D1000 to D1003 D2000 to D2003 are written into RWwO0 to RWw3 Y1000 to Y105F are written into RYO00 to RY5F SB0000 to SBOOSF are refreshed SW0000 to SWOOSF are refreshed 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK MELSEC Q 7 PROCEDURE BEFORE STARTING THE DATA LINK This chapter explains the procedure from the module installation to the data link startup 7 1 Procedure Before Starting the Data Link The following describes the procedure from the module installation to the CC Link data link startup Start Mount the master module local module and standby master module on the base unit Mount the remote modules on the control board and machine Sheeld Bu cose SEU SES Se eee ese cee se eu esas 4 Check the master module local module and standby master module individually to see if See Section 7 4 they operate normally hardware test Connect the modules with the CC Link dedicated cable Connect a terminal resistor that matches See Section 7 5 the cable type to the modules located at both ends Check items prior to turning power ON Check the module installation status Check the input power voltage Verify that the PLC CPU RUN STOP switch is set to STOP Verify that the PLC CPU RESET switch is set to the middle position Set the switches on the master module local module and standby master modul
535. tting items 2 2 Standb Reference Master Local Setting item Description master section station station station Sets the type of the connected remote station local station intelligent device station and standby master station Default value Ver 1 remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 1 to Ver 1 remote I O station occupies 1 station station number 64 Setting range Station type Remote I O station remote device station intelligent device station Ver 1 Ver 2 single double quadruple octuple Number of occupied stations 1 to 4 Station number 1 to 64 Specifies the assignments of buffer memory sizes during transient transmission to a local station a standby master station and an intelligent device station Default values Send buffer size 40H 64 word Receive buffer size 40H 64 word Assignments of Automatic update buffer size 80H 128 word communication Setting range Communication buffer size 0 word Not specified or 40 64 word to 10004 4096 word However the total communication buffer size must be 10004 4096 word or less Automatic update buffer 0 word Not specified or 804 128 word to 10004 4096 word However the total automatic buffer size must be 10004 4096 word or less POINT 1 For the communication buffer size specify the size that is calculated by adding seven words to the data s
536. ttings 1 The following describes an example of the parameter settings See 2 for actual settings MELSOFT series GX Developer Unset project MUI LA 1815 lm Project Edt Find Replace View Online Diagnostics Window 218 x allta c alie t D Se As EE EI DR HRA S open 85 stil ele lel ziale j Progam zI A of Sl m xl z Unset project No of boards in module Boards Blank no setting 19 08 Program t IV Device comment i 2 3 Ei uf Parameter Stat 120 No 0000 W PLC paramete Operational setting Operational settings 15 Network Type Local station E E 5 Remote pass Master station data link type z i z 18 Device memory Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode 18 Device init All connect count Remote Remote outputfRY Remote register wr Remote reaisterf Ww Ver 2 Remote inputfEiX 2 Remote outputf AY Ver 2 Remote reaister E wr Ver 2 Remote register Aww Special relay SB Special register S Ww Retry count Automatic reconnection station count Stand by master station No PLC down select z z z Scan mode setting z Delay infomation setting Station information setting Remote device station initial setting Interrupt setting Interrupt settinas Indispens
537. tus 66 Switch setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 WOO06D S es Max link scan time Stores the maximum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units SWO006E 66E Current link scan time Stores the current value of the link scan time in 1 ms units WO06F s Min link scan time Stores the minimum value of the link scan time in 1 ms units pepe SW0070 Total number of Stores the final station number set in the parameter 6709 stations 1 to 64 stations Stores the maximum station number setting of the station number setting switch that is performing data link 1 to 64 stations SW0072 Number of connected Stores the number of modules that are performing data link 672 modules SW0073 Standby master Stores the station number of the standby master station 6734 station number 1 to 64 stations Stores the reserved station setting status 0 Not reserved station 1 Reserved station SW0071 communication 6714 station number Swo0074 6749 SW0075 b15 bi4 bi2 675 Reserved station SW0074 Swo076 specified status 3 swoo075 32 6769 swo076 48 SW0077 SW0077 64 6779 Numbers 1 to 64 in the above table indicate the station numbers Stores the error invalid station setting status 0 Other than error invalid station 1 Error invalid station SW0078 6784 SW0079 b15 014 b12 6791 Error invalid stat
538. uction completion Refresh Write to PLC direction 2 Remote I O station Remote device station 00000 2 o0000 Data link start 1 Setting method For more details on the setting see Section 6 7 For the RLPASET instruction see Appendix 2 7 2 Precautions when using the RLPASET instruction to set the network parameters a The remote I O net mode cannot be used The module operates in remote net mode b If it is necessary to change the network parameters while the PLC CPU is running and the data link is being performed the data link should be stopped once using SB0002 data link stop 4 FUNCTION aes MELSEC Q c Itis necessary to set I O assignments for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction In addition do not use GX Developer to set the network parameters and automatic refresh parameters for modules whose network parameters are set by the RLPASET instruction If the RLPASET instruction is used to set network parameters for modules whose network parameters and automatic refresh parameters have been set by GX Developer the RLPASET instruction will complete with an error and the network parameter settings performed by the RLPASET instruction become invalid d If the switch setting of an intelligent functional module for which an I O assignment is set has not been performed or is wrong the RLPASET instruction completes with an error However the QJ61BT
539. ule during wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation 5 Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for the terminal block It is recommended that the wiring connecting sections of the solderless terminals will be covered with a marking tube or an insulation tube 6 Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module 7 Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal screws using torque within the following ranges Tightening torque range Module mounting screws M3 screws 0 36 to 0 48 N m Terminal block screws M3 screws 0 42 to 0 58 N m Terminal block mounting screws M3 5 screws 0 66 to 0 89 N m 8 To mount the module on the base unit fully insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit and press the module using the hole as a fulcrum Improper installation may result in a module malfunction or may cause the module to fall off POINT 1 Be sure to turn off the power supply to the applicable station before installing or removing the terminal block If the terminal block is installed or removed without turning off the power supply to the applicable station correct data transmission cannot be guaranteed 2 Always make sure to
540. umber 4 AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN 1 to Y1060 Y107F to 1070 Y108F to Y1080 Y109F to Y1090 10 32 10 32 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q Remote registers RWw and RWr Remote device station station number 1 Remote device station station number 4 PLC CPU AJ65VBTCU 68ADV AJ65VBTCU 68DAVN RWw0 A D conversion enable prohibit specification RWw1 CH 1 to CH 4 input range setting RWw2 CH 5 to CH 8 input range setting RWws Average processing specification RWw4 CH 1 average time number of times setting RWw5 CH 2 average time number of times setting RWw6 CH 3 average time number of times setting RWw7 CH 4 average time number of times setting RWw 8 CH 5 average time number of times setting RWw9 CH 6 average time number of times setting CH 7 average time number of times setting CH 8 average time number of times setting RWwO RWw1 RWw2 RWw3 RWw4 RWw5 RWw6 RWw7 CH 8 digital value setting RWw8 Analog output enable disable setting RWw49 CH 1 to CH 4 output range setting RWWA CH 5 to CH 8 output range setting RWwB HOLD CLEAR setting 1 digital value setting 2 digital value setting CH 3 digital value setting CH 4 digital value setting 5 digital va
541. us function This function selects whether or not the link scan should be synchronized with the sequence scan 1 Synchronous mode Performs data linking using the scan that is synchronized with the sequence program The sequence scan and link scan start at the same time In the synchronous mode the link scan interval becomes longer when the sequence scan takes long because the link scan is synchronized with the sequence scan IMPORTANT While in the synchronous mode the sequence scan time must not exceed the time specified for the corresponding transmission rate as listed below If the scan time exceeds the specified time a time out error occurs at each station Transmission rate Sequence scan time 10 Mbps 5 Mbps 2 5 Mbps 625 Mbps 156 Mbps 1 The asynchronous mode is recommended for a mixed system of local stations A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 when the QJ61BT11N is used as the master station When using the synchronous mode make sure to observe the restrictions in 2 and 3 below When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations set the sequence scan time of the local station CPU to be shorter than ST For more details on ST see Section 5 1 When using a system consisting of the QJ61BT11N as the master station in the synchronous mode and both the A 1S J61BT11 and A 1S J61QBT11 as local stations use XnC as a
542. utfRY 1500 Ver 2 Remote registeifE Wr w1000 Ver 2 Remote register Ww w1500 Special relay SB 5 0 Special register SW SWO Retry count Automatic reconnection station count 1 Stand by master station No PLC down select Stop i y Scan mode settinc Asynchronous X Delay infomation setti 0 Station information Remote device station initial Interrupt setting 4 Indispensable settings No setting Alreadyset Setifitisneeded setting Alreadyset E Ready Q02H Host station Ovrwrte SCRL 10 44 10 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MASTER STATION AND REMOTE DEVICE STATIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Initial setting of the remote device station This section explains the initial setting of the remote device station 1 10 45 Setting the target station number Set the target station for which the initial setting is performed a Setting the target station number Set the target station numbers to 1 and 4 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Module 1 b Selecting the Regist procedure Click the Regist procedure of the target station number 1 Setting the regist procedure registration Set the conditions and details of the remote device station settings In this section AJE5VBTCU 68ADV is used as an example for the Regist procedure registration The details to be set are as follows Set channels 1
543. utocomp sk INEA d o o SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 email infoGbeijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS TURKEY Dar laceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbiGcbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics LTD Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 4972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel meGnetvision net il ISRAEL EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE AVTOMATIKA SEVER Krapivnij Per 5 Of 402 RU 194044 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 7 812 3039 648 e mail pav avtsev spb ru CONSYS Promyshlennaya St 42 RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 7 812 325 36 53 e mail consys consy
544. utside the setting range in the slave station type setting results in abnormal completion App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Reserved station specification data Set data Setting range Setby Specify reserved stations 4 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 614 613 b12 b3 b2 bi bO 16 15 14 13 to 4 3 2 1 Setting for 1 to 64 32 31 30 29 to 20 19 18 17 Te 48 47 46 45 to 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 to 52 51 50 49 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No reserved station specification for all stations 5 Perform the settings for station numbers up to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data 6 Specify only the head station number of a module in the case of a remote station local station or intelligent device station that occupies 2 or more stations Error invalid station specification data Set data Setting range Setby Specify the error invalid station 0 Not specified 1 Specified b15 b14 613 b12 to Setting for 1 to 64 User modules 7 1 to 64 in the table indicate station numbers The default parameter setting is No error invalid station specification for all stations 7 Perform the settings for station numbers to the largest station number set by the slave station setting data 8 Specify only the head station number of a m
545. veloper see Sections 10 1 3 10 2 3 and 10 3 3 1 Initialization procedure setting method The initial settings are performed using the Remote device station initial setting in the network parameters A maximum of 16 stations can be set When 17 or more remote device stations are connected perform the initial settings for the 17th and subsequent stations using the sequence program In Target set the station number of a module for which the initial settings are to be performed Setting range 1 to 64 Remote device station initial setting Target station number setting Uniti Noo target noo 5 8 i 3 2 Begstpecedue 9 _ Recist procedure 2 5 Regist procedure 10 _ Regist procedure Regist procedure 11 Regist procedure So 0E Beaist procedue 13 Recist procedure a 7 Registprocedurel 15 Regist procedure e Resist procedure 16 Reaist procedure End setup Cancel b Set the initialization procedure in Regist procedure 1 Input format Set the data input format for Write data in details of execution Setting range DEC HEX Default DEC 4 FUNCTION aes MELSEC Q 2 Execute Flag Set whether or not to execute the specified initialization procedure Setting range Execute Only set use as a memo when the execution conditions are the same as when the execution flag is set as Execute but the co
546. vice to which write data is to be stored P Device specified device Number of points to write 0 to 4096 2 Binary 16 bits 1 The value set in the station information settings of the network parameters of the GX Developer 2 No processing will be performed when set to 0 App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 1 Functions a Operation chart for the RITO instruction Master station Specified station PLC CPU Master module Command G RITO Device memory Y update buffer Intelligent device station Communication commences Buffer memory when conditions are met Automatic update buffer memory Automatic App 27 1 Accesses the device after the device specified by D of the master module specified by Un 2 Writes to the automatic update buffer specified by n1 and n2 The RITO instruction writes data when it is executed However this instruction cannot be executed simultaneously at more than one location for the same intelligent device station The maximum points that can be read by the RITO instruction are 4096 The basic number of steps of the RITO instruction is 9 steps The automatic update buffer assignment is performed using the Station information setting of the network parameters of the GX Developer For more details see Section 6 2 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Operation error In the f
547. y dedicated instruction 0 Start by CPU parameter 1 Start by dedicated instruction 9 Slave station refresh compulsory Clear setting in case of PLC CPU STOP 0 Refresh 1 Clears compulsorily gt Expanded cyclic setting 00 single 01 double 10 quadruple 11 octuple Indicates the retry count setting information when there is an error response 1 to 7 times Indicates the setting information for the number of automatic return stations during one link scan 1 to 10 stations Stores the parameter information area to be used Ou CPU built in parameters Dedicated instruction parameter setting with the RLPASET instruction and data link startup Du Default parameters automatically starts CC Link Stores the parameter setting status 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the duplicate station number status and parameter matching of each station 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Details are stored SW0098 to 9B and SWO09C to 1 Can be used for the master station only 2 Can be used for the standby master station only x4 This register checks and stores the status only at link startup 8 33 8 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Table 8 6 Link special register list 4 8 Availability Available x Not available Number Name Description mE E Ohne Master station Local station SWOO6A Stores the switch setting sta
548. y emer Indicates the delay time setting information 6664 information SW0069 x4 869 Loading status Sone Parameter information 6674 50058 Host parameter status 668 P Stores the execution result of the forced master switching instruction with SBOOOC 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 0 Normal Other than 0 Stores the error code see Section 13 3 Stores the mode setting status 0 Online Remote net mode 1 Online Remote I O net mode 2 Offline 3 Line test 1 4 Line test 2 6 Hardware test Stores the station number of the host that is currently in operation 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station Stores the operation setting status of the module b15 b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 0 to 0 0 0 0 Remote device station Stores the execution result of the initialization procedure registration SWOOBF _ initialization procedure instruction with SBOOOB 65Fu registration instruction gt Station type 0 Master station local station 1 Standby master station Valid only when b1 is 0 Master station duplex function 0 Master station duplex function invalid 1 Master station duplex function valid Input status from the data link faulty station 0 Clear 1 Hold Number of occupied stations 00 Occupies 1 station 10 Occupies 2 stations 11 Occupies 3 stations 01 Occupies 4 stations Master station local station start b
549. y time due to response delay of remote I O station Il Delay time of transmission from the remote I O station to the master station Delay time from reception by the master station to storage in the buffer memory IV Delay time until the master station s information is refreshed in the PLC CPU 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 4 9 Replacing modules without error detection Temporary error invalid station setting function This function prevents remote stations local stations intelligent device stations and the standby master station that are specified with the GX Developer from being treated as data link faulty stations while online It allows the replacement of modules while online without error detection 1 Input output status at temporary error invalid station setting All the cyclic transmission data of the stations set as temporary error invalid stations is refreshed However when a station set as a temporary error invalid station becomes faulty the input is retained and the output switches off 2 Setting method Set the Diagnostics CC Link CC Link LT Diagnostics Monitoring other station Invalid station if temporary error using the GX Developer Place the cursor at the station to be set as a temporary error invalid station and click Setting Cancel CC Link 7 CC Link LT Diagnostics Other station __ Station Reserve Invalid Error Station Type Decupied Number MEE o 17 08 777711777 r Inv
550. ynchronous CAsynchronous gt synchronous Default Asynchronous Delay information setting Set 0 Standby master station Number of occupied stations Station Intelligent buffer select word No Remote Reserve invalid station points station select Expanded cyclic setting Station type Send Receive Automatic Occupies 1 Ver 1Remote device station 3 stations single 96 points No setting Occupies 1 station 4 Ver 2Remote device station quadruple 64 points No setting b Example of network parameter settings An example of network parameter settings is shown below series GX Developer Unset project Network parameters Setting the CC Link list E ct Edit e View Online Di Tools Window Help 18 x Led tinh e Brioude ed S 15 alale gla ele zisleal seu nl S Fm I ELE Ek Hale B B Unset project No of boards in module 1 Boards Blank no setting 09 8 Program 9 1 Device comment 1 2 3 5 18 Parameter Start 1 0 No 0000 s PLC paramete Operational settinc Operational settings Network Type Master station x 2 Remote pass Master station data link type PLC parameter auto start IB Device memory Mode Remote net Addit
551. ystem to increase the number of cyclic points Select this mode when the system consists of only the master station and remote I O stations Since cyclic transmission is made at high speed the link scan time can be reduced 15 Reserved station function Stations that are not actually connected stations to be connected in the future Will not be treated as faulty stations if they are specified as reserved stations The reserved stations can also be set as 0 points see Section 4 4 6 Master station Station number 1 Remote station occupies 2 stations Station number 3 Remote station occupies 1 station Stations that will be connected in the future Reserved station 7 Local station occupies i Station number 8 Station number 10 4 stations Remote station J Remote station Reserved station Remote station dier SOY 4 occupies 1 station occupies 2 stations 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 16 Error invalid station setting function By setting the network parameters the module that is powered off in the system configuration will not be treated as a data link faulty station by the master station and local station However caution is required since errors are no longer detected see Section 4 4 7 Stations to be specified as error invalid stations Remote station occupies 2 stations Remote station occupies
552. zl x Start 0 No 0000 Operational setting settings Type 4 4 Master station data link type Mode ele 5 1000 1000 B0 SWOI Indispensable setngs setting Aeadyset Setifitisneeded No setting Already set Project Ready 0 Host station I wwe INUM 2 Setthe automatic refresh parameters using the following procedure a Setthe remote input RX refresh device using Remote input RX Default value None Setting range Device name Select from X M L B D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to X1000 b Setthe remote output RY refresh device using Remote output RY Default value None Setting range Device name Select from Y M L B T C ST D W Ror ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to Y1000 c Setthe special relay SB refresh device using Special relay SB Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M L B D W R SB or ZR Device number Within the range of the device points that the CPU has Example Set to SBO 6 PARAMETER SETTINGS MELSEC Q d Set the special register SW refresh device using Special register SW Default value None Setting range Device name Select from M

CC-Link System Master/Local Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents